Home

PARTNER® ACS/IP PARTNER Version

1. 76 4 8 3 MONIIOr 2 ee 76 ASG Ay TAP lassen nun 77 4 8 5 Call Logging Applications ue 78 AO TRV SICAN Polster 78 4 9 1 ANALOG PO pa nat 78 49 2 Audio POM sca oes arena 79 49 53 DS PONS csi na 79 BOA ETR PO Here gene 80 4 9 5 Expansion PO aerieni a nennen nennen 80 A O 6 E KI O P Poll ee hear 80 IT LAN PO araa 81 498 PF RON osaa e 81 4 9 9 Phone POT P rlasuu anne 82 4 9 10 PR PON zes en 83 A OAT RS232 DTE POl 2 2 02H es 83 5 Administration 5 1 Initial Configuration aan EEE 88 5 2 Changing the Default Password uuus02eren nenn 88 5 3 9 Card ACION Sic nein 89 5 3 1 Removing SD Cards ccsceccccececeeeesseeeseeeeeees 89 5 3 2 Directories and FIl S ccccssseeecssseeeeeeeseeeeees 90 5 3 3 Booting from the SD Cards cccccceesessseeeeeees 91 5 3 4 SD Card Removal c sccccsssssserererseceseerens 91 5 3 5 Recreating an IP Office SD Card 92 5 3 6 Backing Up the System SD Card 93 5 4 External Trunk Configuration ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 5 4 1 Clock Qually r a rasen 94 542 Unused Tr nksaau n ne 95 5 5 Changing COMPONENMS ccccceecececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 95 5 5 1 RUNNING SSA a 97 So Adding LICCN COS Sais ernennen 97 5 7 Additional Processes cccccccsseeceeeeseeeesseeeeeeseaeeees 98 5 7 1 Upgrading the SyStem cccccc
2. aa Intercom Buttons pin a Fa TE LA JLo ts JL s TAAN MTE PARTNER User Guide Page 12 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 1408 Telephone SO Mol 010 1416 Telephone PARTNER User Guide IP Office PARTNER Version SO MO 083C ee 050 AO 2099 O O amp 008 HEHN MUTE VOLUME 0220 1400 Series Phones Line Programmable Buttons 6 with lights Intercom Buttons oo 2 i gaa gt OO 090 00 gt M Noa oO DK D O 00 DK Hs Line Programmable Buttons 14 with lights Page 13 Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 3 Basic Call Handling PARTNER User Guide Page 15 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 3 Basic Call Handling 3 1 Making Calls You can make a call by dialing an outside telephone number or an extension number e If the telephone number is one that is used frequently called it can be stored and dialed as a personal speed dial or using an auto dial button To make a call to another extension 1 Pick up the handset and press an idle INTERCOM button The green light next to the button is on steady and you will hear the dial tone 2 Dial the extension number e On 1400 Series phones if the other extension doesn t answer press AutCB automatic callback to have that extension call you after it is next used and then hangup To make
3. Configuration 0 i Servier 1 Trunks 0 Link 0 Call Quality of Service U Module Nurnber 3 1 8 Exit The File Exit command exits the Manager application If you have unsaved changes you are prompted to save them 3 2 View Menu The View menu commands enable you to configure the mode in which Essential Edition PARTNER Version manager presents system features and tasks 3 2 1 Toolbars This command allows you to select which toolbars should be shown or hidden in configuration mode A tick mark is displayed next to the name of the selected toolbars aN Currently there is only one toolbar available 3 2 2 Tool Tip Switches tool tips on and off Tool tips are help text that is displayed when the mouse pointer is hovered over a window item or menu option PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 96 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands View Menu 3 2 3 Advance View The Advance View command is a standard IP Office Manager command that is not applicable to working with Essential Edition PARTNER Version This menu item is only available when Manager is not connected to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system It is grayed out in all other modes h Caution Only used by experienced Manager users 3 2 4 Hide Admin Tasks This item is enabled by default It hides the Admin Tasks and Details side panes on t
4. e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To change your extension name 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Telephone Programming When displayed press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extension Name When displayed press Select 4 The current setting is displayed 5 To enter a new name dial the characters using the dial pad buttons When finished press Enter e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space Di sasos pa zws TE sum a inn s soa e 6mnowno Eo 7 7arsPors e oww o wwz meren fel o sn e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique 3 To remove the current name press Clear e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 24 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Advanced Features Naming Your Extension 4 3 Absent Text Messages The absent text message feature assists internal callers by displaying a message on their te
5. Dial FEATURE 20 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls N OW A The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Coverage O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a call coverage button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 20 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Coverage and press Select 5 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 6 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls 7 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Coverage O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Versio
6. PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 30 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Calling Lists system List Management Allowed Lists Account Code List i Telephone Numbers in list Disallowed Lists E a Emergency Number Lists Number Account Code Account Code Entries Hote 6 Digit Account Code Assign Users to list Available Users Selected Users Add gt Add All gt gt lt Remove lt lt Remove All L Note that this list is only used for validation of the account code used by the users set to forced account code entry on outgoing external calls Voluntary which are verified account codes account codes entered by users when they make or receive calls are not validated by the phone system In both cases voluntary and forced account code entry the account code used will be included in the SMDR output 46 gt for the call Up to 99 code entries can be made 2 6 Speed Dial Setup This dialog allows you to configure names and numbers that can be accessed by dialing the associated speed dial code system Speed Dial Setup Speed Dials Configured Number Speed Dial Code BOO e Filter This option allows you to show only speed dial entries where the name number or speed dial code matches the filter value entered If there are no matches the whole set of speed dial entries is displayed PARTNER Version Administration Tool Use
7. 2 Press 1 The message is forwarded to your email address To switch off email notification If you have chosen any of the email notification options you can switch them off from your telephone 1 Log into your mailbox 2 Press 03 You hear a confirmation message to tell you that the option is now turned off PARTNER User Guide Page 46 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Using Voicemail Voicemail Email 5 10 Visual Voice 1408 and 1416 phones can access their mailbox messages and settings using a series of menus displayed on the phone This is called Visual Voice To access visual voice press the MESSAGE button on the phone The controls available are e Listen Access your own voicemail mailbox When pressed the screen will show the number of New Old and Saved messages Select one of those options to start playback of messages in that category Use the d up arrow and arrow keys to move through the message Use the options below e Listen e Save Play the message Mark the message as a saved message e Pause e Call Pause the message playback Call the message sender if a caller ID is available e Delete e Copy Delete the message Copy the message to another mailbox When pressed as number of additional options are displayed e Message Record and send a voicemail message to another mailbox or mailboxes e Greeting Change the main greeting used for callers to your mailbox If no greeting has been reco
8. A Preconmenses Processor 600MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD 800MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP RAM 128MB 256MB HD Space 1GB 800MB for NET2 200MB for Manager 1 4GB 800MB for NET2 600MB for the full IP Office Admin suite Display 800 x 600 256 Colors 1024 x 768 16 bit High Color Operating Supported on Windows XP Pro Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 2003 and Windows System 2008 e 32 bit and 64 bit versions are supported e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions Installing the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Tool Manager 1 Using the Add or Remove Programs option in the Windows Control Panel check that the PC does not already have a version of Manager installed e If yes and the suite is a pre IP Office R3 2 version remove the existing application via Add Remove Programs e If the existing suite is IP Office R3 2 or higher it is possible to upgrade without removing the previous installation as the installation wizard overwrites the old version without conflict 2 Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications DVD or log into a directory that contains the application install files Select the Manager option 3 Double click setup exe 4 Select the language you want to use for the installation process This does not affect the language
9. Display shows only 16 Possible power outage unplug the modular telephone characters per line cord and replug Some Accented letters do not The PARTNER Eurostyle phones generation 1 do not display properly display some accented characters properly Display time and date are not Is your system s clock correct correct Use System Date 101 and System Time 103 to set the date and time Caller ID does not work Are you subscribed to Caller ID Is the line connected to a module that supports Caller ID Did someone activate Call Coverage If so their extension number will appear PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 29 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Telephone does not Work Intercom Autodialer does not work Cannot record a call Standard phone message waiting light does not light Cannot make outside calls Can t make outside calls from pool buttons on pooled extensions Calls are answered automatically a call rings once then disappears as if answered Auxiliary device does not answer Is the telephone cord plugged into the right jack on the bottom of the telephone Telephone may need to be reset unplug the cord and with the handset hung up replug Telephone cord may be defective switch cords and try again Telephone may be defective switch telephones and try again There may be a problem with the control unit switch to a different port and try again Is the tele
10. Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines e Avoid placing your telephone in areas with high background noise caused by sources such as motor vehicles manufacturing equipment loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment or heater and air conditioning fans e Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through e Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your telephone system e When talking always face your telephone and stay within two feet of it e Place your telephone at least six inches 15 cm away from the edge of your desk e If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation e In conference rooms a separate speakerphone is recommended since the built in speaker on a system telephone is designed for individual use To make a call without lifting the handset 1 Press SPEAKER or SPKR to get a dial tone 2 Dial the number you hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without
11. cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaaeees 25 4 4 Forwarding CalllS ccccccecccceeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesans 26 4 o Calli Coverage ai nei 27 A OAM DAMO ara 29 4 7 Locking Your EXxtensiOn cccccsscecssseeseseeeseseeeseeeees 30 4 8 System Speed Dials cccccceeccecssseeeeceeseeesseeseeesees 30 4 9 Personal Speed Dials u0222200222200 nennen 31 4 10 ACC0unt CodeS 3505 ee na 32 AV Parking Calls streuen 33 2 12 Call Pickup ins tan 33 Ao Bo INOL DISWINO rit el 34 4 14 Voice Mailbox Transfer cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 35 5 Using Voicemail 5 1 Accessing Your MailbOX cccceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 39 5 2 Listening to Your MESSAGES ceccecseeeeceneeeeeeeeeeaees 40 5 3 Record Your NAMe cccccceccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 41 5 4 Changing Your Access COde ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 42 5 5 Changing Your Greeting ccccceeeccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeees 43 5 6 Voicemail Coverage On Offf ccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeees 44 5 7 Forwarding a MESSAGE ccccseeceeseeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeesaees 45 5 8 Calling a Message SENdel cccccecseseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 45 5 OV OICE Mall Emalk z as2 iss 46 5 10 VISUAL VOICE orr R 47 6 Contacts 1408 1416 6 1 Viewing Contacts Details u002220002220 nennen 50 6 2 Make a Call from the Directory 0000000
12. e Avaya UPS Calculator http ups avayaups com An online calculator for uninterruptible power supply UPS requirements Allows specification of a range of equipment to be supported See Power Supply Backup UPS e Other Non Avaya Web Sites A number of third party web forums exist that discuss Essential Edition PARTNER Version These can act as useful source of information about how the Essential Edition PARTNER Version is used Some of these forums require you to be a member and to register These are not official Avaya forums and their content is not monitored or sanctioned by Avaya e Tek Tips http www tek tips com e IP Office Info http www ipofficeinfo com e Yahoo Groups http groups yahoo com group ipoffice e Lycos Forum http members lycos co uk ipoffice e PBX Tech http www pbxtech info forumdisplay php f 8 1 6 Training Avaya University provides a wide range of training courses for IP Office and its associated applications This includes courses necessary for IP Office resellers to become Avaya Authorized Channel Partners and for individuals to achieve IP Office certification PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 9 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Details of all the course can be found on the Avaya University web site http www avaya learning com The site can be used to check course availability and to book course It also includes on line courses
13. 700415573 700415656 700434236 Page 70 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Telephones 4 7 Out of Building Telephone Installations COPY The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be connected to the IP Office system In these scenarios additional protection in the form of protective grounding and surge protectors must be fitted h The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage It merely reduces the chances of damage Main Building Control Unit Secondary Building CO Analog Lines ab Analog Module F Phone Module External Contact Closure Device Earthed Ducted i Cabling Approved Ground Point Ed Cabling Requirements e Cables of different types for example trunk lines extensions ground and power connections should be kept separate e All cabling between building should be enclosed in grounded ducting Ideally this ducting should be buried e A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building This should be three point protection tip ring and ground Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time DS Phone Extensions ITWLinx towerMAX DS 2 e Connection from
14. 8 9 Button Clicks While using the phone menus the phone can provide a key press confirmation click sound This can be turned off if it is annoying 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Button Clicks 4 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 5 When completed press the Done soft key 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 10 Default Handsfree Audio Path By default when you make a call or answer a call without lifting the handset the audio is played through the phone s speaker while you speak via the phone s microphone If you have a headset attached you can change the phone s behavior so the audio is played through the headset by default rather than the speaker 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Audio Path 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the Change soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 61 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 62 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Index 6 6D Telephone 7 A Absent Text Message 22 25 Ac
15. e All All directory entries e Personal Your personal speed dials e External The system speed dials e Users The names and numbers of other users on the telephone system e Groups The names and numbers of hunt groups on the telephone system c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 When the required entry is displayed press Call 3 Continue as for a normally dialed call 6 3 Editing a Contact You can edit the contacts in your own personal directory 1 Access your personal directory contacts a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select your Personal directory Extensions 10 and 11 can also add edit and delete entries from the External directory c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 Locate the required entry 3 Press the Details soft key 4 Press the More soft key and then the Edit soft key e The menu now allows editing of t
16. 0dB Sets the analog to digital gain Range 4 0dB to 3 5dB in 0 5dB steps e D gt A Default 0dB Sets the digital to analog gain Range 4 0dB to 3 5dB in 0 5dB steps e DIMF e DTMF Mark Default 80 80ms Range 0 to 255 Interval when DTMF signal is kept active during transmission of DTMF signals e DTMF Space Default 80 80ms Range 0 to 255 Interval of silence between DTMF signal transmissions e VMS Settings e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when unanswered calls should be redirected to the voicemail system The delay for the redirection is set by the VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night values for the channel The options are Always Day Only Night Only or Never 2 13 2 PRI Trunks If a trunk with the Line Subtype of PRI is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks Clicking on Advanced Setup 53 when a PRI line type is selected accesses a dialog of additional settings for the trunk and settings for the trunks individual channels PARTNER Version Administration Tool
17. Hazard Symbol A The shock hazard symbol is intended to alert personnel to electrical hazard or equipment damage The following precautions must also be observed when installing telephone equipment 2 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 3 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 4 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 5 Always use caution when working with telephone lines PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 108 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Appendices Safety Statements 6 2 2 Trunk Interface Modules To ensure the validation of the approvals only the following types of trunk interface cards must be fitted in the following IP Office control units u 7 A USA Canada k PF d IP Office Essential Edition X PARTNER Version 6 2 3 Further Information and Product Updates Further information including Product and Reference Manual updates can be obtained from Avaya s Dealers and Distributors or from Avaya s web site http www avaya com This guide is also available from the Avaya s support web site http support avaya com Support Telephone Numbers For initial help and support contact your distributor supplier The following contact points are for Avaya authorized partners e In
18. Light Pattern Line Button Programmable Button Intercom Auto Dial Intercom Button Green You are using the line Green Feature is on Red Extension is busy Red Line in use by another extension Flash Green Flash A call is ringing A user is entering a a four digit long on long off at your extension code to lock or unlock their Red Flash A call is ringing on extension the line but not at your extension Alternating Alternating green and red flash Red Green appears at both extensions ina joined call Wink Green Wink The call is on long on short off hold or parked at your extension Red Wink Call is on hold or parked at another extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the call Green Flutter Caller ID Inspect Call Log or short on short off Absent Msg is on Absent Text Message Mot is active Call Logs is active 1 5 Adjusting the Telephone Display The phone must be idle and the handset must be in its cradle when you adjust the display contrast To adjust the display brightness 1 With the extension idle press 2 Use the d up arrow and down arrow keys to change the display brightness PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 10 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 2 1400 Series Phones PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 11 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 2 1400 Series Phones The IP Office PARTNER Version syste
19. ON I CA A a en ONE u eee eee l N The number of ETR 34D phones supported is limited to a maximum of 4 with a maximum of 2 per ETR6 base card PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 8 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 ETR Telephones 1 1 Fixed Buttons In addition to the line buttons the telephones have some or all of the following fixed buttons which are already imprinted e INTERCOM not labeled Press to make or answer a call to or from another extension If you receive a call on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID and you cannot access that line from a line button the call will appear on your Intercom button e FEATURE Press to change programmed settings or use system features e CONF Press to add other parties to your call e TRANSFER Press to pass a call to another extension e HOLD Press to put a call on hold e SPKR Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on e MIC HFAI Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature e Volume Control Buttons Press to decrease or d to increase the volume as follows e To adjust ringer volume press while the telephone is idle or ringing and the handset is in th
20. e P Office core software level R6 0 minimum e Bin file ip500v2 bin Internal power supply unit Free standing rack mounted requires IP500 Rack Mounting Kit or wall mounted requires IP500 Wall Mounting Kit Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 365mm 14 4 Height 73mm 2 9 2U Clearance 90mm minimum all sides 220m at front 500mm all side when wall mounted Maximum configuration file size 2048KB 3 1 1 Grounding Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks PARTNER Version Quick Install IP Office Essential Edition Page 17 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 All IP Office control units and external expansion modules must be connected to a functional ground In some cases such as ground start trunks in addition to being a protective measure this is a functional requirement for the equipment to operate In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high lightning risk h WARNING During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment The ground point on IP Office control units and external expansion modules are marked with a rh or 5 symbol Ground connec
21. e When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 42 group e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension Pattern Ringing ls ring 2s Off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 1 75s off 0 4s ring 0 8s Off 2s ring 4s off 0 945s ring 4 5s Off 0 25s ring 0 24 off 0 25 ring 2 25 Off ls ring 3s Off ews 2s ring 2s Off 2 13 1 1 Analog Advanced Setup A Because some settings can conflict with or nullify other settings do not use this dialog except under direction of a trained Avaya technician or when directed to do so by support personnel PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 49 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Trunks Analogue Advanced Setup Trunk Number 4 Trunk Parameters Voice Impedance C Quiet Line Echo Cancellation 16 mg Automatic Balance Impedance Match stop Gains Ring Off Maximum S000 ms Gains amp gt D 1 Await Dial Tone S000 f ms Gains D gt A dEB cL oo i i 4 Intermediate Digit Pause a f ms DTMF Long CLI Line d DTMF Mark DTMF Space VMS Settings Delay Day Ei ka Maing Hum Filter Delay Night d Mains Hum Filter Frequency OFf w Schedule e Trunk Parameters e Impedance Default Default Set the impedance used for the line
22. 2 14 3 Advanced Parameters nn 70 2 14 4 System BAC KUD cai seer niert 72 2 14 5 Changing Component cccccceceeesseeeeeeeees 73 3 Main Menu Commands aT Aile Mensen 78 3 1 1 Open Configuration ccccccccccececeeeeeseeseseeeeees 78 3 1 2 Close COnfiguration ccccccccccecceeseesesseeeeeeeees 79 3 1 3 Save Configuration uueeessesssnnsnennnnnnnneeeeeenneenn 79 3 1 4 Save Configuration AS cccccccceesseseeeeseeeeeees 79 3 1 5 Preferences 220022420022020nnnnnenennen nennen nennen 80 Oi MeO OHNE eren ee 84 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 3 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Chapter 1 The Manager Application PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 5 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application 1 The Manager Application The Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration tool application called Manager throughout this document is an application for viewing and editing an IP Office system configuration It is a tool meant primarily for system installers and maintainers Manager runs on a Windows PC and connects to the equipment via the Ethernet LAN connection on the rear of the control unit IP Office Manager is used to access all parts of the IP Office Essential Edition configuration Manager is also used to upgrade the software fi
23. 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 15 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to VMS Cover e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a VMS cover button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Program and either dial 15 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Cover and press Select 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to VMS Cover e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 44 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Using Voicemail Voicemail Coverage On Off 5 7 Forwarding a Message You can forward a message to a different mailbox or to several mailboxes at the same time When you forward a message you can record your own comment to the start of the message Login 4 New messages playe Ea Forward m
24. 3 Technical Bulletins Each Essential Edition PARTNER Version software release is normally accompanied by a Technical Bulletin detailing special installation requirements known issues etc Various software releases and their associated Technical Bulletins can also be obtained from http support avaya com 3 2 6 Cabling and Cables The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is designed primarily for use within an RJ45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling and RJ 45 sockets A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ 45 patch panel in the communications data room to individual RJ 45 sockets at user s desk All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are connected straight through This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket For example making one user socket a phone port and another user socket a computer LAN port without requiring any rewiring of the cables in between Line Provider s Building Structured Network Termination Cabling e Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations Where necessary the far end RJ 45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems using punch block connectors This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician e Trunk Connections The
25. Administration Tool User Guide Page 46 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Auxiliary Equipment Auxiliary Equipment SMOR Setup Door Phone 1 Door Phone SMDR output Contact Closure Group 1 IP Address i92 168 42 203 OMSC osure aroup lt Contact Closure Group 2 TCP Part Music On Hold Record to buffer 500 yt SMOR Call splitting for Diverts e SMDR output Default Off This control can be used to switch the output of SMDR on or off e IP Address Default 0 0 0 0 Listen The destination IP address for SMDR records e TCP Port Default 0 The destination IP port for SMDR records e Record to Buffer Default 500 Range 10 to 3000 The phone system can buffer up to 3000 SMDR records if it detects a communications failure with destination address When the buffer is full each new record overwrites the oldest record e Call Splitting for Diverts Default Off When enabled for calls forwarded off switch using an external trunk the SMDR produces separate initial call and forwarded call records This applies for calls forwarded by forward unconditional forward on no answer forward on busy DND or mobile twinning It also applies to calls forwarded off switch by an incoming call route The two sets of records will have the same Call ID The call time fields of the forward call record are reset from the moment of forwarding on the external trunk 2 12 Co
26. Auto Dial Intercom Button Green You are using the line Green Feature is on Red Extension is busy Red Line in use by another extension Flash Green Flash A call is ringing A user is entering a a four digit long on long off at your extension code to lock or unlock their Red Flash A call is ringing on extension the line but not at your extension Alternating Alternating green and red flash Red Green appears at both extensions ina joined call Wink Green Wink The call is on long on short off hold or parked at your extension Red Wink Call is on hold or parked at another extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the call Green Flutter Caller ID Inspect is on short on short off 1 5 Adjusting the Telephone Display The phone must be idle and the handset must be in its cradle when you adjust the display contrast To adjust the display brightness 1 With the extension idle press 2 Use the up arrow and down arrow keys to change the display brightness PARTNER User Guide Page 10 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 2 1400 Series Phones PARTNER User Guide Page 11 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 2 1400 Series Phones The IP Office PARTNER Version system supports the 1400 Series of Avaya digital telephones Supported models are the 1403 1408 and 1416 1403 Telephone m Line Button a Dia aa EE
27. ER Pain ICI External Forward Unconditional In this example user 203 has a forward unconditional number set for calls This is indicated by the External Targeting Cause showing user and forward unconditional The External Targeter ID shows the source of the call being forwarded in this example user 207 The External Targeted Number shows the actual external number called by the IP Office L 222 41 00200202 5 207 0 203 203 0 1000034 0 E207 E21n207 72005 Line 5 1 0 0 Extn203 0000 00 0000 00 0 0 618 1 00 U u Extn2 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 111 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Transferred Manually In this example the internal user transfers a call to an external number The External Targeting Cause in the first record indicates that this external call is the result of a user U transfer proposal XfP call The Continuation field indicates that another record with the same Call ID will be output The additional records are output after the transferred call is completed The first relates to the initial call prior The second is the transferred call with the External Targeting Cause now indicating user U transferred Xfd 16 33 19 00 00 05 3 203 0 9416 9416 0 1000044 1 E203 Extn203 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 yyrrrr Hr 1 Hr U X P Extn207 16 393 09 00200 02 2 207 0 203 2027 7 1 1000043 0 E20 7 ExEn207 E20 2220203 11 Oye ur EHE FH HH 16 33 19 00 00704 0 207 0 9416 9
28. Enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Function Press to insert Character Description Inserts a 1 5 second pause R_ Senda hook switch flash signal Stop CONFERENCE Stop dialing 6 The current setting of the button will now be AD I auto dial intercom or AD O auto dial other followed by the stored number e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an auto dial other button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Program and either press Intercom 2 or use the d amp up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auto Dial Other and press Select 4 At the AD O prompt enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer SPEAKER R Send a hook switch flash signal Stop CONFERENCE Stop dialing 5 The current setting of the button will now be AD O followed by the stored
29. P500 run Dewshter cards IP500 Analog trunks w 12 IP500 PRI trunk channels wf 24 IP500 VCM Cards 2 Height x Width x Depth 73x445x365mm 2 9 x17 5 x14 4 Only supports VCM channels provided by fitting IP500 Combination cards 2 5 SD Card The Avaya SD card exercises central control over the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system and acts as the License dongle for the control unit The SD card is inserted into the System SD slot on the rear of the control unit Except during maintenance the System SD slot should contain an Avaya SD card at all times The files on that card are used when the system is started and the Feature Key serial number only present on Avaya cards is used for the licensing of Essential Edition PARTNER Version features System 3D System fonmary ibackup Mim all fynamic temp Feature Key e The SD card stores system files the system status application SSA and a voice mail application providing 2 channels by default but can be licensed for up to 6 channels total e The system SD card is also used to store copies of core software binary files configuration files and backups e Various commands within Manager interface enables the SD card contents to be backed up restored or copied e The control unit has an Optional SD slot as well as the System SD slot This Optional SD card slot can be used to store occasional full copies of the System SD card or as an additional memory card
30. PARTNER Version Administrator Tool Guide e IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Programming and User Guide e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version ETR Telephone System Programming and User Guide e Individual User Guides for associated telephone instruments ETR 1400 3920 A Limitations This document contains only basic information for systems using standard analog telephone equipment Essential Edition PARTNER Version is an out of the box installation and is meant to be operational for analogue telephone users when it is switched on without requiring any setting up or pre configuration For telephones that require system configuration such as SIP or Trunk settings or if you are not fully familiar with the Avaya IP Office system you should refer to the installation and configuration instructions contained in the Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual and the Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator Tool Guide i Note IP Office Essential Edition can be installed without using Avaya IP Office Manager software but only if it is a very basic system If this method of installation is used only those sections of this document listed below are relevant Chapter 1 Introduction this section and System Constraints 9 only Chapter 2 Getting Started 12 gt all Chapter 3 System Installation 16 all except Manager Responses 21
31. Privacy On Off 22 R Reason 55 Recall 22 Red Flash 10 Redial 16 LastNumber 22 Saved Number 22 Release 22 Remote Call Forwarding 22 Reply 45 Rewind Message 40 Ring Time 55 Ringer Audible alerting on off 59 Ringer volume 9 19 Ringing Patterns 9 S Save Message 40 Save Number Redial 22 Simultaneous Paging 22 Skip Message 40 Speaker Button 9 Speaker volume 9 19 Speakerphone 18 Speed Dial Personal 31 System 30 Supervised Call Transfer 19 System Release 22 System Speed Dial 30 T Telephone 6D 7 To VM 17 Transfer To Voicemail 35 Voicemail 22 Transfer a Call 19 Transfer Button 9 U Unlock 22 30 Unsupervised Call Transfer 19 Users 50 51 V Version 22 Visual Alerting 59 VMS Cover On Off 22 Voice Mailbox Transfer 22 Voice Signal 22 Voicemail 39 Coverage 44 Transfer 35 Volume 19 Volume Control Buttons 9 W With Cust until 25 With visitors until 25 Y Your Mailbox 39 Page 64 Issue 1c 09 April 2010 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 65 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights
32. System and Optional Slots EXT O P AUDIO RS232 LAN WAN Aux Reset EXPANSION rh External mains power input socket Indicates correct operation of the internal firmware green Indicates correct operation of SD card and optional card if fitted Provided to house SD memory cards SD must be present at all times Optional slot allows another SD to be read programmed or written with a backup 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input 9 Way D Type socket serial data connection Used for system maintenance RJ 45 sockets These ports form a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover ports Not used by Essential Edition PARTNER Version Pressing the Aux button while the control unit is starting up causes the control unit to boot up from backup system files on the SD card instead of the primary files Pressing the button while the control unit is starting up pauses the start up until the button is released The effect of pressing the button during normal operation will depend on how long the button is pressed and is indicated by the CPU LED CPU LED Summary Off None None Orange Reboot When Free Reboot when free with new incoming
33. The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Program and either dial 14 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Voice Mailbox Transfer and press Select 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Voice Mailbox Transfer e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 35 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 5 Using Voicemail PARTNER User Guide Page 37 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 5 Using Voicemail Each extension on the system has a voicemail mailbox by default Except for special cases for example the extensions connected to the fax machine and loudspeaker the mailboxes are used when the extension has calls it does not answer within a set time by default 15 seconds though this can be adjusted for each extension by the system administrator In addition to accessing your mailbox 39 and listening to your messages 40 you can perform a range of other actions e Record Your Name 41 gt Your can replace the extension number played to callers with a recording of your name e Set an Access Code 42 You can set an access code that must be entered whenever you try to access your mailbox e Record a Greeting 43 You can replace the default greeting asking a caller to you mailbox to leave a message with your own recorded greeting e Switch
34. This only affects the ring and does not affect the visual alerting 59 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d amp up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the amp up and down arrow keys to locate the option Audible Alerting 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 4 Ring Sound You can adjust the sound of the ring used by the phone 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d amp up and down arrow keys to locate the option Personalized Ringing Press the Select soft key e Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the different available ring patterns e Press the Play soft key to repeat the currently display ring pattern e To make the currently displayed ring pattern the selected ring pattern for the phone press the Save soft key e To leave the menu without making any changes press the Cancel soft key 4 When completed press the Done soft key 5 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER User Guide Page 59 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 8 5 Display Brightness 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the up and down P arrow keys to adjust the brightness as required 5 When completed press the
35. Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e f fitted with an IP Office 500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone ports 7 and 8 are connected to analog trunk port 12 However during normal operation analog phone ports 7 and 8 are not useable P500 Digital Station Base Card This card provides 8 DS digital station ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones other than IP phones e The card can be fitted with an IP Office 500 trunk daughter card which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per control unit e 4400 Series phones 4406D 4412D and 4424D are not supported on this card They are supported on an external expansion module 2 7 Trunk Cards IP Office 500 daughter trunk cards can be fitted to IP Office 500 base cards to provide support for trunk The daughter card uses the physical ports provided on the front panel of the base card for cable connection The addition of an IP Office 500 daughter card is supported on any IP Office 500 base card except the IP Office 500 Legacy Card Carrier base card For those base card that support daughter cards there are no restrictions on the combination of card types However in systems with both analog phone base cards and analog trunk daughter cards combining the two types is recommended as it then provides analog power failure support for one trunk extension Each daug
36. advanced system settings 70 Auto attendant 43 Auxiliary equipment 45 speed dial 31 system 26 user 33 user advanced 67 setup exe 12 Show hide admin tasks 97 toolbars 96 tooltips 96 shows Avaya IP 97 SIP trunks 62 SMDR 45 46 calltimes 106 enabling 106 examples 109 fields 106 records 106 ring time 106 SMTP server 70 Sorting list 90 Speed dialling 31 SSA application 11 Start up 7 Status bar 23 STUN settings 70 Sub Net mask 26 System backup 72 backup files option 90 changing components 73 Page 117 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 System details 23 licence 66 operating 11 12 parameters 26 password 24 26 39 setup 26 shutdown 90 status 11 upload file option 90 System Status application 95 T Tasks administration 22 TCP 81 addresses 81 change 78 scan 78 Technical bulletins 90 TFTP Log 97 TFTP Log window 97 TNS code 56 Tool tips 23 Trunk advanced setup 48 49 analog 48 analog advanced 48 AT amp T 56 channel setup 53 DTMF 49 hold disconnect time 48 installed 48 line administration 48 parameters 49 53 PRI advanced 53 PRI advanced channel setup 55 SIP 62 T1 57 T1 advanced setup 59 60 VMS settings 49 Twinning 33 U UDP 81 Unit Broadcast Address 78 Upgrade manager during 90 system during 90 wizard 90 User 34 User setup 33 Using Manager 16 V Validate Configuration 84 Validate option 90 Validating 84 Validation prompt 84 selecting 84 Viewing a memory card 92 Visual preferences 82 VMS 55
37. be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips 7 Ty Only the screws M3 x 6mm provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 34 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Getting Started TATA aaa IPO 500 Rack Mounting Kit 700429202 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 35 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 2 9 Wall Mounting The IP Office 500v2 control unit can be wall mounted This requires an IP Office 500 Wall Mounting Kit SAP 700430150 plus additional 4 5mm fixtures and fittings suitable for the wall type The wall mounting kit includes two brackets one top and one bottom Environmental Requirements In addition to the existing environmental requirements for an IP Office system the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting a unit AN The wall surface must be vertical flat and vibration free h A minimum clearance of 500mm 19 7 inches is required on all sides e h The unit must be orientated as shown when mounted That is with the base card slots facing right when viewed from in front of the unit h The brackets must be used as shown with the deeper tray like bracket used at the bottom of the wall mounted control un
38. the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a socket outlet When wall mounted a clearance of 500mm is required on all sides The ventilation slots on the rear and sides should not be covered or blocked 445rmm 17 5 Clearance 90mm 3 5 Unit 365mm 14 4 Total with clearance S4Smm 21 5 220mm 8 7 Clearance 9Omm 3 5 3 2 5 Tools and Parts Required This section outlines the tools and miscellaneous parts likely to be required during the installation and setup of an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Other tools may also be required g Tools Required 1 Pozidrive No 1 screwdriver for removal of module covers Cutter for cable ties Pozidrive No 4 screwdriver 2 3 4 Flat blade screwdriver medium size 5 Wrist strap for anti static grounding or similar 6 PC running Windows XP 2003 During the Staging Installation later in this manual we recommend that you use a Laptop PC with IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version installed using a directly connected LAN cable This will enable you to make any changes to the basic configuration system configuration and set up user lists 7 Indelible marker for cable labeling PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 31 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 U Parts Required 1 Cable ties 2 Cabling labels
39. 0 This field sets the IP address of the SMTP server being used to forward SNMP alarms sent by email e Port Default 25 Range 0 to 65534 This field set the destination port on the SMTP server e Email From Address Default Blank This field set the sender address to be used with mailed alarms Depending of the authentication requirements of the SMTP server this may need to be a valid email address hosted by that server Otherwise the SMTP email server may need to be configured to support SMTP relay e Server Requires Authentication Default On This field should be selected if the SMTP server being used requires authentication to allow the sending of emails When selected the User Name and Password fields become available e User Name Default Blank This field sets the user name to be used for SMTP server authentication e Password Default Blank This field sets the password to be used for SMTP server authentication e Use Challenge Response Authentication Default Off This field should be selected if the SMTP uses CRAM MD5 2 14 4 System Backup The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is backed up automatically close to midnight each day when the contents of the primary directory on the SD card are copied to the backup folder on that same SD card Any files in the backup folder with the same name are overwritten PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 72 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01
40. 0 1000019 0 E 403 Extn403 T9001 Line 1 1 0 O prrrrrrrrrrrie Busy Number Unavailable Tone In this example 2122 calls 2123 who is set to DND without voicemail This results in 2122 receiving busy tone The records shows a call with a Connected Time of 0 The Call Number field shows 2123 as the call target but the Party 2 Device and Party 2 Name fields show that the connection is to a virtual device 2008 07 09 17 59 00400200 0 2122 0 2123 2123 1 1000033 0 22122 Eztn2122 V8000 UL 2 0 0 0 Page 110 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Issue 1b 01 February 2010 IP Office Essential Edition Appendix SMDR SMDR Examples Call Pickup The first record shows a call from 2122 to 2124 with a Connected Time of zero but a Ring Time of 8 The Continuation field indicates that the call has further records The second record has the same Call ID but the Party 2 Device and Party 2 Name details show that the call has been answered by 2121 2003 07 09 18 00 00 00 00 8 2122 0 2124 2124 1 1000088 1 E2122 E21n2122 E2124 E En2124 0 0 2008 07 09 18 00 00 200238 1 27T22 0 2124 2124 71730090538 0 2722 2 72 722 2 121 Ex 21 070 Internal Twinning The records for scenarios such as internal call forwarding or follow me indicate the rerouting in a single record by having Caller and Called Number details that differ from the final Party 1 and Party 2 details Internal twinning differs is showing a call
41. 1 192 168 42 254 IP Search Critena 192 168 42 1 1924 168 4 454 192 168 44 1 192 168 46 1 UDP Discovery Enter Broadcast IP Address 255 755 PRR 255 Use DNS e TCP Discovery Default On This setting controls whether Manager uses TCP to discover systems The addresses used for TCP discovery are set through the IP Search Criteria field below e NIC IP NIC Subnet This area is for information only It shows the IP address settings of the LAN network interface cards NIC in the PC running Manager Double click on a particular NIC to add the address range it is part of to the IP Search Criteria Note that if the address of any of the Manager PC s NIC cards is changed the Manager application should be closed and restarted e IP Search Criteria This tab is used to enter TCP addresses to be used for the discovery process Individual addresses can be entered separated by semi colons for example 135 164 180 170 135 164 180 175 Address ranges can be specified using dashes for example 135 64 180 170 135 64 180 175 e UDP Discovery Default On This settings controls whether Manager uses UDP to discover IP Office systems Pre 3 2 systems only respond to UDP discovery By default IP Office 3 2 and higher systems also respond to UDP discovery but that can be disabled through the IP Office system s security settings e Enter Broadcast IP Address Default 255 255 255 255 The broadcast IP address range that Manager should
42. 1 per system ATM 4 3 per system DS 16 Phone 16 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved AVAYA This is Essential Edition PARTNER Version Rear View BEBBEBBBE BEBBEEEBE BEBEBBENE BEBBEBBE BEBBENBE UL BBEBNE ante len e Ban Titi uw QBEREEEEEE BEBBEBEEE INPUT Bnnnnannn System 0 ana A AC 100 240V SplenS0 ai 50 60 Hz 1 7A en 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved This is Essential Edition PARTNER Version nangset 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved This is Essential Edition PARTNER Version NEW 1408 Digital Telephone NEW 1416 Digital Telephone With Optional BM32 unit NN na A Vie 2009 Avaya nc All rights reserved Out of the Box Operation AVAYA system running in Key System mode with analog trunk support Customers can place receive calls without any further programming once the system is installed 2 digit dial plan is pre configured All ETR amp Digital sets have 2 Dedicated Intercom Buttons Pre configured Line Appearance buttons for all analog lines on system 3 SIP channels Expandable to 20 channels with licenses 8 PRI TI channels Requires PRI T1 Card Expandable to 24 channels with licenses 3 Mobility licenses expandable to 20 with licenses 2 Port Embedded Messaging All users have Voicemail activated automatically Expandable to 6 ports with licesnes
43. 2 Make a Call from the Directory 51 6 3 Ed1lINI 3 COnlact anne 51 6 4 Adding a New Contact ccccsceecccececeseseeseseeeeeeseeeeees 52 6 4 1 Add a Contact from the Call Log 52 6 5 Deleting a Contact uuusssnnnnnnnnnnnnnneeeeennnennennnnn 52 PARTNER User Guide IP Office PARTNER Version Contents 7 Call Log 1408 1416 2 1 Using Ihe Gall E09 54 7 2 Making a Call from the Call Log un 54 7 3 Viewing Call Details uss 0000eeeeeneeeeeeenneneennnnn 55 7 4 Deleting a Record 222220002200002nnnnnnnnnnnnnennenn 56 7 5 Deleting All Records 4224240000B0nennnen nennen 56 7 6 Adding a Record to Your Contacts 56 8 Phone Settings 1408 1416 BA MENU AUS EX ei engeren 58 8 2 Visual Alerting zes 59 8 3 Audible Alerting uuss0044040neeennnnnnnene nennen 59 SARNO SOUNA sense 59 8 5 Display BrightneSs cccccsscecccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeees 60 8 6 Display Conirastre oi a a ENEE 60 8 7 Display LANQUAQGE cccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeesneeeeseaaeeess 60 SS ENE TONG Serie ee etoile 61 8 9 Button GliCK niie mars E 61 8 10 Default Handsfree Audio Path 61 MOCK aid Ere eee enn ere thee PEE 63 Page 3 Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 1 ETR Telephones PARTNER User Guide Page 5 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 Janua
44. 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 62 of 46eesethinigs txt _ U2 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 1004 of 4bexsettings bet U2 Mar 2006 13 06 26 GMT Sent 10 of C Program FilestAvapasl P Office M anager b1 0d01b2_ 3 bin PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 97 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 98 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Chapter 4 Managing Configuration Files PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 99 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 4 Managing Configuration Files These actions are non Essential Edition PARTNER Version activities and must be done with caution 4 1 Welcome Screen Options You can only start from this screen when Manager is disconnected from the control unit or if you have closed a configuration file i e there is no configuration file in Manager memory This operating mode would usually be used offline to prepare or alter configuration files for the SD card This is necessary when an SD card is not available or the configuration file on the current SD card is not suitable By default when Manager is started and a configuration file is not found the Welcome view is presented The administration tasks 100 concerned with configuration files accessed from the welcome screen pull a configuration file into Manager memory and you must save them back a
45. 22 1993 including Al A2 AS NZ 3548 1995 ROW e WARNING This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC NOTICE This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 110 IP Office Essential
46. 4 Press Program and either dial 20 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Coverage and press Select 5 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 6 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls 7 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Coverage O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 28 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Advanced Features Call Coverage 4 6 Auto Dialing Auto dialing uses numbers stored under one of the phone s programmable buttons Whenever a number need to be dialed pressing the button will dial the stored number To use an auto dial button 1 At dial tone or whenever you want to dial a number press the programmed auto dial button 2 The stored number is dialed To create an auto dial button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 To create an auto dial button to store an extension number press Intercom 1 For a button to store any other type of number press Intercom 2 5
47. 45 dialogs which set which users are alerted when a the door phone extension goes off hook e Fax Machine Extension Select this option for an extension connected to a fax machine PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 69 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e Standard Select this option for a standard telephone extension e Restrictions e Forced Account Code Entry Default Off If selected the user is required to enter an account code from the Account Code Entries 30 list when making an external call This can only be overridden by use of the System Password 24 to make a call e Outgoing Call Restrictions Default No Restriction This field sets the type of outgoing external calls that the user can normally make Any restrictions applied do not apply to numbers in the Emergency Number List 22 and to numbers in any Allowed Lists 28 of which the user is a member e No Restrictions The user can make outgoing external calls Note that the Allowed Lists and Disallowed Lists of which the user is a member still apply e Inside only The user can only make internal calls e Local only The user can only make outgoing external calls to numbers matching local numbers 2 14 3 Advanced Parameters This dialog is reached by selecting Advanced Parameters from the Admin Tasks 66 pane Displays a number of settings which normally do not need to be adjusted unless adding support for SIP tru
48. 7002134 1m 3 3 1m 3 3 modules except WAN3 modules RJ 45 to 57 RJ 45 Blue LAN Cable Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 7002134 3m 9 10 100m 328 devices RJ 45 to RJ45 Grey 81 N The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types Telephone Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP 50nf Km AWG22 AWG26 CW1308 0 65mm 0 4mm 1400 Series 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 Analog Phones 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1640 800m 2620 3 2 Grounding Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems This is especially important in buildings where multiple items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs for example phone and data networks All IP Office control units and external expansion modules must be connected to a functional ground In some cases such as ground start trunks in addition to being a protective measure this is a functional requirement for the equipment to operate In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step for example areas of high lightning risk h WARNING During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground Test ground points before relying on them to ground connected equipment The ground point on IP Office control un
49. 77901 Mobility Features 77999 2 12 Core Software amp BIN Files Each IP Office 500v2 control unit and expansion module contains and runs its own part of the IP Office core software These parts take the form of bin files binary files The Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit is supplied with a base level of IP Office software that acts asa software loader for upgrading the unit to the required software level This software loader supports the LAN connection necessary for local PC to IP Office upgrade See IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator User Guide The bin files for each IP Office software level are included on the Essential Edition PARTNER Version SD Card for that software level They are installed from that SD as part of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager application Manager can then be used to upgrade the bin files loaded in the modules within a system Updated sets of software and bin files may also be made available through the Avaya support web site See Web Sites e Software Level The IP Office core software level is expressed in the form X Y Z for example 2 1 27 where X is the major software level Y is the minor level and Z is the build number The following rules apply to the core software level used by modules within an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system and between linked IP Office systems e All modules within an Essential Edition P
50. 85 88 103 erase 88 reboot mode 86 receive 88 send 86 Contact closure 45 47 Contact information check 102 Control unit 7 95 Copy and print 34 Copying files 92 Coverage 37 Coverage destination 48 51 57 Create an offline configuration 100 Create config 84 Cut and paste 36 D Daylight saving 26 Default address 7 gateway 26 password 14 Deleting files 92 DESI label 34 software 40 Destination 43 Dial plan 53 62 Dialling 31 DID mapping 51 57 Directory binary 81 changing 81 selecting 81 working 81 Disallowed calls 28 Discovery TCP 81 UDP 81 Page 115 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 DNS 81 Document conventions 7 layout 7 Door phone 45 Downloading 92 DTMF 48 E Edit services base TCP 80 Embedded file management 72 92 Emergency calls 29 Enable application idle timer 83 boot IP 80 port for serialcomms 80 simplified view 80 time server 80 Erase configuration files 88 Ex directory 33 Exit manager application 96 Expansion module 40 84 Export 31 66 Extension 33 alert 45 assign 45 enabling 47 users 33 Extension ID 73 External equipment 67 F Failed to communicate message 102 FAX 67 Feature key 8 94 File configuration 92 copy 92 create an offline configuration 100 deleting 92 downloading 92 management 92 managing configuration 100 managing configurations 100 menu 78 open a configuration 100 preferences 80 read an offlineconfiguration 100 read configuration 103 Filter 31 62 F
51. ACKING nennen ee 13 2 2 Cabling and Cables cccccccscseseecceccceseesssesseeeeeeeeeeees 13 3 System Installation Si COMMO United aA 16 3 121 Ground ns 17 92 Bk Oe aa Ve ee 18 3 3 Fitting Base Gards nach scenes 19 3 4 GOING EV a 20 3 5 Manager RESPONSES cccseeceeccseeeeeceeseeeessneeeessaaeees 21 3 6 Changing PaSSWOl sez ccsoiecuc crs celussesestecdsenadele en 22 3 7 Connecting the SYStOM ccccceccececeeeseseessseeeeeeeeeeees 24 3 8 EINALACHORSH rs 24 4 Troubleshooting HdE die ee een herren reset 33 PARTNER Version Quick Install IP Office Essential Edition Contents Page 3 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 1 Introduction PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 5 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Introduction 1 Introduction The Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version is a telephone system software that runs on the Avaya IP Office 500v2 hardware platform It is designed for small businesses and more specifically retail stores manufacturers and professional offices generally with 5 to 25 users IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version is compatible with the Avaya PARTNER Advanced Communication System ACS This quick guide explains how to install the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version system using IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version It is intended that installation should be carried out by an Av
52. ACS R8 Control Unit 1 995 IP 500v2 1 650 308EC Module 1 567 SD Card 1 50 5 Slot Carrier 1 175 Wall Mount Kit 1 39 PVM 12 Voice Mail 1 726 Power Cord 1 15 RAC Card 1 250 Combination Card 2 1200 PARTNER 18D sets 10 2490 1416 Telephones 10 3588 Total 5203 Total 4944 Vv 5 SAVINGS vV INVESTMENT PROTECTION 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved ACS R8 vs PARTNER Version AVAYA 24 users and below Constructs Include IP 500v2 And Phones Digital Phone Configuration ETR Phone Configuration Users BE IP Office PARTNER Version Users iy IP Office PARTNER Version R8 3465 R8 3465 a PV 3148 10 Savings i PV 3148 10 Savings ie R8 5701 ee R8 5701 PV 5542 3 Savings PV 5542 3 Savings un R8 8535 ig R8 8535 PV 8286 3 Savings PV 7936 7 Savings R8 10029 F R8 10029 PV 10630 6 Difference PV 9930 1 Savings ACS R8 PVM12 lt 13 Sta PMSG R7 gt 12 sta ACS R8 PVM12 lt 13 Sta PMSG R7 gt 18 sta IP500v2 using Combination Cards DS8 and1416 IP500v2 using ETR6 ATM4 Combo Card and1416 Using1416 sets and digital ports for configs over 18 ETR sets AVAYA How Do Get Ready maimoa Partner Authorization SME Sales Partner Implement _ gt 1 Avaya Professional Sales Specialist APSS amp Partner E Version Installation Training Authorized to Sell Product Only Authorized to Install and Both Partner Version and IP Office Maint
53. As each handset is connected any necessary software it contains is automatically checked and updated as necessary 3 8 Final Actions You may be required to compile calling lists build groups and allocate permissions etc before leaving the customer premises This depends on arrangements made between your local office and the customer If required use Manager to create any lists Changes to the basic Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration setting up trunks adding licenses etc are detailed in the Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator Tool User Guide identified in the Introduction 7 gt h As you use Manager to make changes to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version setup you are forced to save or discard changes you have made before leaving any set up screen to go on to another task However you should remember that you are accumulating these changes in a COPY of the control unit configuration file which must be saved back to the SD card before changes are effective Similarly system changes such as plugging in handsets during this time are recognized by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system but are undetected by Manager which is working with a copy of the configuration file Avaya recommend that whilst using Manager you save the configuration file at frequent intervals to ensure the working copy and Manager copies of the configuration file remain as compatible as possible PARTNER Vers
54. Avaya University http www avaya learning com Avaya provides a range of training courses including specific IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version implementation and installation training It also provides certification schemes for installers to achieve various levels of IP Office accreditation See Training e It is the installer s responsibility to ensure that all installation work is done in accordance with local and national regulations and requirements It is also their responsibility to accurately establish the customer s requirements before installation and to ensure that the installation meets those requirements e You should read and understand this documentation before installation You should also obtain and read the Avaya Technical Bulletins relevant to recent Essential Edition PARTNER Version software and hardware releases to ensure that you are familiar with any changes to the equipment and software L Quick installation instructions are contained in a separate document 3 1 IP Office Manager Installation and maintenance of Essential Edition PARTNER Version can be performed through telephone system TUI commands described in the Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Guide However the Manager application provides a comprehensive and easy to use interface for installation and maintenance The IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Tool Manager is an application for viewing
55. Avaya web sites for different countries e Avaya Enterprise Portal http partner avaya com This is the official web site for all Avaya Business Partners The site requires registration for a user name and password Once accessed the site portal can be individually customized for what products and information types you wish to see and to be notified about by email e Avaya Support http support avaya com Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office Copies of the IP Office CD images are available from this site and updated core software bin files e Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Access to an on line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base Currently this link is only available to Avaya Business Partners while running an ARA account Avaya Remote Access connection e Avaya University http www avaya learning com This site provides access to the full range of Avaya training courses That includes both on line courses course assessments and access to details of classroom based courses The site requires users to register in order to provide the user with access to details of their training record See Training e Avaya Community http www aucommunity com This is the official discussion forum for Avaya product users However it does not include any separate area for discussion of Essential Edition PARTNER Version issues
56. C Request Login on Save Close Configuration Security Settings After Send Save Configuration File After Load Backup Files on Send Backup File Extension Number of Backup Files to keep Enable Application Idle Timer 5 mins C Secure Communications e Request Login on Save Default Off By default a valid user name and password is required to receive a configuration from an IP Office and also to send that same configuration back to the IP Office De selecting this setting allows Manager to send the configuration back without having to renter user name and password details This does not apply to a configuration that has been saved on PC and then reopened This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Close Configuration Security Settings After Send Default Off When selected the open configuration file or security settings are closed after being sent back to the IP Office system e Save Configuration File After Load Default On When selected a copy of the configuration is saved to Manager s working directory 81 gt The file is named using the IP Office s system name and the suffix cfg This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Backup Files on Send Default On If selected whenever
57. Changing Remote Administration password 22 gt and Final Actions 24 1 1 IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Tool IP Office Manager is an application for viewing and editing an IP Office system configuration It is a tool meant primarily for system installers and maintainers Manager runs ona Windows PC and connects to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version equipment via Ethernet LAN connections It is the recommended tool you should use during installation When Manager is used with Essential Edition PARTNER the PC running Manager is connected directly to the IP Office 500v2 control unit being installed or updated Manager detects that an Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration is present and automatically starts in its Essential Edition PARTNER mode designed to manage the system PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 7 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 IP Office Manager San nn 1 IP Office 500v2 Control Unit running ji IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version LAN Cable Manager is part of the IP Office Admin suite of programs and has its own user manual for Essential Edition j PARTNER It is important to note that the software level of Manager application is 2 higher than the software level of the IP Office 500 system core software with which it is released For example IP Office Manager R8 0 was released with IP Office R6 0 core soft
58. Contact 51 52 email alert 46 email notification 46 Extension Lock 22 Name 24 Unlock 22 External 50 51 F Fast Forward message 40 Feature Button 9 Forward 26 Remote 22 Forwarding 45 G Green Flash 10 Greeting Message 43 Group Call log 54 Missed 54 Group Calling 22 Group Hunting 22 Group Pickup 22 Groups 50 51 H Handset volume 9 19 Handsfree 18 Hands Free Answer on Intercom 18 Hear Help Prompts 39 43 Page 63 Issue 1c 09 April 2010 HFAI 18 Hold Conference 20 Hold a Call 19 Hold Button 9 Hunt group Calllog 54 Missed 54 I Idle Line Pickup 22 Ignore 17 Intercom Buttons 9 Intercom Codes 22 Intercom Dial Tone 9 J Joining a Call 20 L Lamp 59 Last Number Redial 16 22 Light Patterns 10 Lock 22 30 Loudspeaker Paging 22 M Mailbox Access 39 Mailbox Access Code 42 Make a Call 16 Make call from CallLog 54 from Contacts 51 Meeting until 25 Menu A Menu 58 Calllog 54 Contacts 50 Message waiting lamp 59 Messages 39 Microphone Button 9 Missed 52 54 55 56 Missed calls Hunt group calls 54 Mobile Twinning 26 More 54 N Name 24 New Contact 52 56 O On holiday until 25 On vacation 25 Out to lunch 25 Outgoing 52 54 55 56 Outside Dial Tone 9 p Paging 22 Parking Calls 33 Persoanl Speed Dial 31 Personal 50 51 Phone Manager 39 Pickup 33 Active Line 22 Call 22 Group 22 Idle Line 22 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Please call 25
59. Details 6 2 Make a Call from the Directory You can use any directory contacts to make a call You can also use the directory in almost any telephone function where you need to select the number for a destination for example during transfers 1 Access the contacts directory a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select which type of directory entries you want displayed e All All directory entries e Personal Your personal speed dials e External The system speed dials e Users The names and numbers of other users on the telephone system e Groups The names and numbers of hunt groups on the telephone system c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 When the required entry is displayed press Call 3 Continue as for a normally dialed call 6 3 Editing a Contact You can edit the contacts in your own personal directory 1 Access your personal directory contacts a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select your Personal directory Extensions 10 and 11 can also add edit and delete entries from the External directory c Either
60. Disollowed Lists elephone Numbers in hst Fmergenry Number ists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries 01 911 06 02 07 03 08 nd na 05 10 Valid digits are 0 3 Selected Lisers Add telephone numbers to required lists and assign users 2 5 4 Account Code Entries Account codes are commonly used to control cost allocation and out going call restriction The account code used on a call is included in the call information output by the system call log Incoming calls can also trigger account codes automatically by matching the Caller ID stored with the account code Once a call has been completed using an account code the account code information is removed from the user s call information This means that redial functions will not re enter the account code The maximum recommended number of accounts codes is 1000 Extensions can be configured to require entry of a valid account code when they make an outgoing external call The Account Code Entries list contains the account codes that are accepted as being valid and the selected users who are required to enter one of these codes Using the Assign Users to List dialog to add or remove users from the Selected User list will enable disable the Forced Account Code Entry 67 Restrictions setting for the appropriate users The selected users are then required to check that restriction settings in User Advanced 67 gt Settings are still valid and change the settings if required
61. Done soft key 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 6 Display Contrast 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the amp up and down arrow keys to locate the option Contrast 4 Press the Select soft key 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys to adjust the brightness as required 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 7 Display Language The system administrator can configure which language your extension uses Though the phone s menu you can change this settings IP Office PARTNER Version only supports English French and Latin Spanish The phone menu may display other languages supported by the phone If one of these other languages is selected the languages displayed on the phone menu may be a mix of that language and English 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Advanced 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the amp up and down arrow keys to locate the option Language 5 Press the Select soft key 6 Use the up and down arrow keys scroll through the different languages available 7 To select the language currently displayed press the Select soft key or OK 8 When completed press the Done soft key 9 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER User Guide Page 60 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Phone Settings 1408 1416 Display Language 8 8 Err
62. ETR6 card in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system All Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phone are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone AUX socket ter Te Line Ap Line Ap interco Interco The ETR PARTNER Version telephones have fixed buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 67 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 ETR6 Telephone Features Featu re Display Speakerphone 4 6 10 3910 This single station DECT phone is supported on an IP 500v2 control unit running in Partner Version mode The base station uses an ETR port for connection to the IP Office This phone is no longer available from Avaya and has been superseded by the 3920 4 6 11 3920 The Avaya 3920 is a single station DECT phone wireless telephone designed specifically for small businesses Utilizing next generation digital technology DECT 6 0 the Avaya 3920 wireless telephone offers high quality voice communication DECT unlike other wireless technologies uses a dedicated frequency that prevents interference from other devices
63. Edition PARTNER Version Partner Version to which you are connected This is static information that cannot be edited PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 23 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Wa Avaya IP Office R6 Manayes File Edit View Help dd Admin Tasks ay System 3 Welcome lo IP Office Essential Edilion PARTNER Version Adminislralion System Setup What would you like to do Please review the current IP Office Setup below Sneed Dial Set Change Remote Administrotion Password Hardware Installed PORADNE Control Unt IM 500 V2 Change System Settings Internal Modules DIGSTABIATIVIA Create Calling Lists Expansion Modules NONE o Administer Speed Dial Serial Number 000000000000 i IP Address 19 1AR AP 1 Configure User Button Programming Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 77 Auxiliary Equipment Kanane EEE T p System Locale United States US English Ir Manage CUM GrOUpS Number assigned to first Extension 10 i Administer Auto Attendant RA Arita Altendant Setup Number ot ne on System amp Features Confiqured Setup Auxiliary Equipments z reek Advanced Parameters Daylight Saving Enabled Update Trunk Configurations System Trunks per phones 5 Licenses Installed NONE ETR 1 Digital Extensions Connected NONE 1 Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Gruup Extensiuns Calling Group Extensions System Details Night Service Group Extensions NONE Assign
64. England Tel 44 0 1707 392200 Fax 44 0 1707 376933 Web http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 120 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010
65. February 2010 System 3D system fonmary backup Mim all fqynamic temp Feature Key Administration Tasks Additional Administration Tasks However the automatic backup procedure only backs up operational files not voicemail records You can use Manager to fully backup your system at any time Insert an SD card in the Optional SD slot in the rear of the control unit and use Embedded 92 gt file management facility File Advanced Embedded File Management to suitably format the card and then copy all folders from the System SD Card to the Optional SD card System 3D system fonmary Optional SD fsystem forimary backup backup vrmall imal dynam fdynamic Memb Feature Key Ty Note Except during maintenance the System SD slot should contain an Avaya SD card at all times The files on that card are used when the system is started and the Feature Key serial number only present on Avaya cards is used for the licensing of IP Office features 2 14 5 Changing Components Base cards and external expansions modules must only be removed and added to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system when that system is switched off In the sections below the term component can refer to a card fitted into the control unit or an external expansion module L Note that for extension ports by default both an extension entry and a user entry will exist in the Essential Edition PARTNE
66. Guide Page 14 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application Starting Manager The application continues its search and when it detects that it is connected to Essential Edition PARTNER Version normally after 5 to 10 seconds it displays the User log in dialog which contains the name of the configuration file it has found and intends to use Contiguration Service User Login IP Office QOEOOFOS2194 IP 500 WE Service User Name drministrator Default password is Administrator case sensitive Note If no configuration file is found the welcome screen remains displayed and the log in dialog does not appear until a configuration task 100 is selected 1 6 Home Page After successful log in the Manager Home screen is displayed The window contains hot links to the common tasks most likely to be needed during Essential Edition PARTNER Version installation and standard set up activities See Administration Tasks 22 gt ia Avaya IP Office RG Manager 00E00 70521 94 6 0 11019 Administrator Administrator System Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration What would you like to do Please review the current IP Office Sctup below Change Remote Administration Password Hardware Installed F Control Unit IP 500 2 Change System Settings Internal Modules PHONES8 Unknown DIGSTAS Unknown ETR Unknown Unknown Unknown Create Calling Lists Expansi
67. Hunt Group A single hunt group 200 called Main is created and the first 10 users are placed into that hunt group as members e Incoming Call Routes Two default incoming call routes are created Voice calls are routed to the hunt group Main Installing Telephones After you have installed the IP Office 500v2 control unit and have connected the line and extension cords and gone live 20 you are ready to install the telephones Installing the telephones includes assembling testing and connecting the telephone As desired you also can connect an Intercom Autodialer to certain telephones Assembling PARTNER Telephones All PARTNER telephones are shipped with a stand for either desk mounting or wall mounting the telephone For other telephones see the instructions that are provided with the telephone Gather the line and extension cords hanging from the control unit and twist tie or wire wrap them Testing the modules 1 Test the base card modules by doing the following a Plug a system telephone into the first port on each module b Press the line button on the telephone for each outside line and listen for a dial tone Connecting handsets 1 For telephone systems that are based on a patch intermediate connection system 2 Connect line cords to the line jacks on the modules 3 Connect the free end of each line cord to the appropriate telephone network interface jack 4 Fill each module before moving to the next module to the right d
68. Initiation Protocol 3264 11 An Offer Answer Model with Session Description Protocol SDP 3323 14 A Privacy Mechanism for SIP 3489 18 STUN Simple Traversal of User Data gram Protocol UDP Through Network Address Translators NATs 3824 24 Using E 164 Numbers with the Session Initiation Protocol SIP E 164 is the ITU T recommendation for international public telecommunication numbering plans 2 9 External Expansion Module This module can be used to add additional ports to a Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Only one external expansion unit is supported e The external expansion module is supplied with a blue 1 meter 3 3 expansion interconnect cable This cable must be used when connecting to expansion ports on the rear of a control unit Each module uses an external power supply unit supplied with the module A locale specific power cord for the PSU must be ordered separately PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 21 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e IP Office 500 Digital Station Module Provides an additional 16 DS ports for supported Avaya digital phones e IP Office 500 Phone Module Provides an additional 16 PHONE ports for analog phones 2 10 Supported Phones Essential Edition PARTNER Version supports the following phones and phone add ons Availability may be subject to local restrictions e 3910 3920 e 1403 1408 1416 e All POTS t
69. Installed with Manager if not Vista Ultimate already present Vista Business Enterprise RAM Server OS Hard Disk Free Space Windows 2003 Server Processor Windows 2008 Server Pentium Client OS O Celeron 2000 Professional x AMD XP Professional Windows 7 Includes disk space required for NET2 component Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office Ports IP Office Manager R6 0 Manager manager exe TCP Port 50802 TCP Port 50804 TCP Port 50812 UDP Port 50798 IP Office Upgrade Wizard Manager upgradewiz exe UDP Port 50798 PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 8 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Introduction System Constraints 1 2 System Constraints i This data is provided for information only It is not part of the installation procedure Max allowed in system IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Base Cards Phone 8 Base Phone 2 Base DS 8 Base ETR6 Base new 6DS 2POTS VCM10 LE Combination new IP Office 500 Daughter Cards ATM 4 Uni daughter PRI 1 Uni daughter IP Office 500v2 Expansion Modules IP Office 500v2 PHONE 16 IP Office 500v2 DIGITAL STATION 16 System capacity for the Essential Edition PARTNER Version is flexible and can use combinations of the following hardware components e Control unit 4 available slots maximum of 4 of the following cards e The first left hand slot of the control unit must have a D
70. Make call 51 Count 55 Coverage Call 27 Voicemail 44 D Default Mailbox Access 39 Delete Message 40 Details Call Log 55 Dial Tones 9 Direct Line Pickup 22 Directory Add 52 56 Edit 51 52 Make call 51 Do Not Disturb 22 25 34 Don t disturb until 25 Drop 22 E Edit Contact 51 52 email alert 46 email notification 46 Extension Lock 22 Name 24 Unlock 22 External 50 51 E Fast Forward message 40 Feature Button 9 Forward 26 Remote 22 Forwarding 45 G Green Flash 10 Greeting Message 43 Group Call log 54 Missed 54 Group Calling 22 Group Hunting 22 Group Pickup 22 Groups 50 51 H Handset volume 9 19 Handsfree 18 Hands Free Answer on Intercom 18 Hear Help Prompts 39 43 Page 63 Issue 1a 20 January 2010 HFAI 18 Hold Conference 20 Hold a Call 19 Hold Button 9 Hunt group Calllog 54 Missed 54 I Idle Line Pickup 22 Ignore 17 Intercom Buttons 9 Intercom Codes 22 Intercom Dial Tone 9 J Joining a Call 20 L Lamp 59 Last Number Redial 16 22 Light Patterns 10 Lock 22 30 Loudspeaker Paging 22 M Mailbox Access 39 Mailbox Access Code 42 Make a Call 16 Make call from Call Log 54 from Contacts 51 Meeting until 25 Menu A Menu 58 Call log 54 Contacts 50 Message waiting lamp 59 Messages 39 Microphone Button 9 Missed 52 54 55 56 Missed calls Hunt group calls 54 Mobile Twinning 26 More 54 N Name 24 New Contact 52 56 O On holiday until 25 On vacation 25 O
71. Match Order Default First Name Last Name Determines the name order used for keys set to the Dial by Name action The options are First then Last or Last then First e Direct Dial By Number Default Off This setting affects the operation of any key presses in the auto attendant dialog set to use the Dial By Number action e If selected the key press for the action is included in any following digits dialed by the caller for extension matching For example if 2 is set in the actions to Dial by Number a caller can dial 201 for extension 201 e If not selected the key press for the action is not included in any following digits dialed by the caller for extension matching For example if 2 is set in the actions to Dial by Number a caller must dial 2 and then 201 for extension 201 e Morning Afternoon Evening Out of Hours Menu Options Each auto attendant can consist of distinct time periods defined by associated time profiles A greeting can be recorded for each period The appropriate greeting is played to callers and followed by the Menu options greeting which should list the available actions e Out of Hours Greeting Through Manager or using short code a hunt group can be taken in or out of service When the group is Out of Service callers are played the group s Out of Hours greeting and can then leave a message Alternatively if an Out of Service Fallback Group has been configured then callers are passed to that group Si
72. Office LAN ports to IP 700213481 3m 9 10 100m 328 devices RJ 45 to RJ45 Grey The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP 50nf Km Telephone 1400 Series 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 400m 1310 T3 Series Upn 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1310 Analog Phones 1000m 3280 1000m 3280 400m 1640 800m 2620 PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 14 AWG22 AWG26 CW1308 0 65mm 0 4mm IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 3 System Installation PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 15 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 System Installation The procedures detailed in this section take you through an installation of Essential Edition PARTNER Version The instructions should all be completed in the order they are given E Objective To prepare and connect the major units of an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system so that it is capable of being used for making and receiving telephone calls This installation section assumes that phones are being connected to IP Office within an existing RJ 45 structured cabling system If phone connections are being made through older punchdown wiring systems then the installer is expected to be qualified and approved for that type of installation The basic installation procedure described in this
73. Press FEATURE 21 2 Dial the four digit code you used to lock the extension 4 8 System Speed Dials The system administrator can program up to 100 frequently used number as system speed dial numbers 600 to 699 Any user in the system can use a system speed dial by pressing FEATURE and dialing the three digit code of the system speed dial required e Except in special cases which the system administrator can configure system speed dials do not override any dialing restrictions that apply to an extension e 1408 and 1416 phone users can view and use system speed dials through the phone s CONTACTS 50 menu Extensions 10 and 11 can also edit the system speed dials through the menu To use a system speed dial 1 At dial tone or whenever you want to dial a number press FEATURE and dial the three digit system speed dial code between 600 and 699 2 The stored number is dialed PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 30 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features System Speed Dials 4 9 Personal Speed Dials You can create up to 20 personal speed dial codes 80 to 99 to store frequently dialed numbers The numbers can be quickly dialed by pressing FEATURE and the two digit code for that personal speed dial The personal speed dial numbers programmed for a particular extension can only be used at that extension e If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is ne
74. Settings IP Address 19 1AR 47 1 7 Trunks Configure User Button Programming Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Xi System Locale United States US English Auxiliary Equipment ee Number assigned to first Extension 10 Administer Auto Attendant Number ot Extensions on System 9 Features Configured Daylight Saving Enabled Undate Trunk Configurations System Trunks per phones 5 Licenses Installed NONE ETR 1 Digital Extensions Connected NONE Hunt Group Extensions 4 Group Management 85 Auto Attendant Setup Setup Auxiliary Equipments aa Advanced Parameters Pickup Gruup Extensiuns Calling Group Extensions Night Service Group Extensions NONE Assigned Configure Allowed List Extensions Disallowed List Extensions Name IPOffice_1 Emergency List Configured 911 IP Address 192 168 421 Extensions MOT Configured for VoiceMail NONE varam ee z Extensions excluded from Directory Listing NONE Mode PARTNER Edition risen Status Offline Fealuic Key N A System Details Exlensiurs assigned fur Twinning NONE This view is obtained by de selecting menu command View Hide Admin Tasks Many advanced administration tasks are carried out through selections from the main menu toolbar See Menu Bar Commands 78 2 14 1 System License Management This dialog is reached by selecting System License Management from the Admin Tasks 66 pane It is used to enter licenses required for additional teleph
75. Ssthings DTMF Breakout Voicemail Code Reception Breakout DTMF 0 Confira Voicemail Code Breakout DTMF 2 Voicemail Email breakout DI MF 3 Voicemail Email off Copy Forward Alen Eyupineril Type C Loudspesker Paging DoorPhone 1 DoorPhone 2 C Fax Machine Extension Standard Restrictions Forced Account Code Enty L Outgoing Call Restrictions No Restriction v P What can do from here Administer advanced user settings for selected user 8 9 voice mail to e mail auxiliary e User Selection e Select User This drop down list is used to select the user whose settings are displayed and being edited e Advanced Parameters e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension Pattern Ringing SA isting 80f O OO Ee 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 1 75s off O a fodsring osson OOOO O 4 fasting 4s off 5 esting of OSS a o sassring asso SOS 8 0 25s ring 0 24 off 0 25 ring 2 25 off ls ring 3s Off e Abbreviated Ringing Default Active When active on an ETR or 1400 Series extension if a user is already connected to a call any additional call will give just a single quiet ring Note that for additional calls alerting on line appearance buttons the Immediate Delayed Ring or No Ring settings of the button still apply e Call Coverage Ring Def
76. To retrieve a call that somebody else put on hold 1 Press the button next to the winking Red light You are reconnected to the call The Red light changes to a steady green light 3 Transferring Calls Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside and internal calls to another extension To transfer a call 1 While the call is active press the TRANSFER button The call is put on hold and the green light next to the line or intercom button will wink 2 When you hear the inside dial tone dial the number to which the call is to be transferred Then do one of the following e To transfer the call without announcing it an unsupervised transfer hang up or press the transfer button again as soon as you hear the extension ringing The transfer is complete If the call is not answered it will be returned to your extension When your extension rings lift the handset to be reconnected to the caller e To announce the call before completing the transfer a supervised transfer wait for the call to be answered If the called party is willing to accept the call hang up or press the transfer button again to complete the transfer If no one answers or the call is refused press the button next to the winking green light to be reconnected to the caller PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 19 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 3 8 Conferencing Calls The Conferen
77. User Guide Page 51 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Trunks Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Lard Module Number of Channels Analog Trunk Analog Trunk PRI 24 Universal Advanced Setup A Channel Appearance ID Admin Local Number Anonymous Coverage Destination Ring Pattern Out Ofserice None Out OF Service None Out OF Service Hone Out OF Service Hone DID Mapping Table DID Number Incoming CLI Destination Ring Pattern New gt 1 e PRI Trunk Channel Setup e Admin Default Out of Service Options are In Service DID Only Maintenance and Out of Service e Channel For information only not editable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned Range 2 to 9 digits Used for configuring Line Appearances with button programming The line appearance ID must be unique and not match any extension number e Local Number e Anonymous Default Off e Coverage Destination Default None If set to None calls on the channel only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the channels Appearance ID Alternatively a specific extension hunt group calling group or the auto attendant can be selected to also receive call alerting for incoming calls on the channel e When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 42 group e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern th
78. VMS settings 48 Voicemail 8 37 67 92 W Welcome screen 100 Within preferences 81 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 118 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 119 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to Lucent Technologies have been transferred or licensed to Avaya All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Any comments or suggestions regarding this document should be sent to wgctechpubs avaya com 2010 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Avaya Unit 1 Sterling Court 15 21 Mundells Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1LZ
79. Voicemail Cover On Off 44 You can select whether voicemail should be used to cover call ringing at your extension e Forward a Message 45 You can forward a message to another extension or extensions You can also add you own comments to the message e Call a Message Sender 45 If the message includes the caller ID you can initiate a call back to the message sender e Voicemail Email 45 You can use email to receive notification of a new voicemail message e Visual Voice 47 gt 1408 and 1416 phone users can access their mailbox using a series of menus on the phone s display PARTNER User Guide Page 38 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Using Voicemail 5 1 Accessing Your Mailbox Your system administrator can also configure other methods of access including access to your mailbox from other phones and access to hunt group mailboxes e On 1408 and 1416 phones you can access your mailbox using Visual Voice 47 gt Accessing Your Mailbox 1 Press the Intercom 1 or Intercom 2 button and dial 777 2 If your mailbox has an access code 42 gt set you will be prompted to enter it Enter your access code 3 You will hear a prompt telling you how many messages you have If you have any new messages the voicemail system will start playing your new messages 4 You can use the controls indicated below to manage your mailbox and messages Login Enter mailbox and password Mailbox Fla
80. also be changed directly from the Upgrade Wizard as follows 1 Right click on the list area 2 Select Select Directory 3 Browse to and highlight the folder containing the bin files Click OK 4 The list in the Available column will be updated to show the bin files in the selected directory that match IP Office units or modules listed 3 1 7 5 Change Mode A This option is only for use by very experienced users and if selected is challenged by administrator log in before continuing Administrator log in is followed by an IP Office discovery by Manager so that IP Office systems are listed for you to choose another system This means you are about to abandon any actions or changes you have carried out in this management session A Before changing mode it is advisable to backup the configuration Change Mode Warning A This will immediatly change the mode of 00E007052194 to IP Office Do you want to continue The feature is designed For demonstration purposes to rapidly change between IP Office full version and Partner Version and vice versa without swapping SD cards and shutting down etc A Be aware that if you change mode from PARTNER Version to IP Office and you have an ETR 6 card installed IP Office cannot recognize it This means you may get a firmware conflict and not be able to revert to PARTNER Version mode 3 1 7 6 Embedded File Management A By selecting this option you will exit the Manager application and
81. and Reference Manual Page 52 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Port Type Ports Features e ICLID mode Bellcore 202 Trunk Daughter card during power failure both these ports are connected to analog trunk port 12 e Phrase IP500 ETR PortSupports ICLID modes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 e REN 2 1 for external bell device e Off Hook current 25mA e Ring Voltage 40V e Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing capacitor For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing Capacitors The ETR6 can be fitted with an Analog Trunk card Trunk Ports System Component Details Base Cards Port LEDs E a e If fitted with an IP500 No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions LED use depends daughter card type fitted e LED 9 is used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Slow Flash Initializing Analog Trunk Daughter Card e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Trunk Daughter Card e Off No trunk present e Green on Trunk present e Green flashing Trunk in use e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10
82. and accessory items have been included Report any errors or omissions to the dealer that supplied the equipment e Check All Documentation Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with the equipment 2 2 Cabling and Cables The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is designed primarily for use within an RJ 45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling and RJ 45 sockets A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ 45 patch panel in the communications data room to individual RJ 45 sockets at user s desk All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are connected straight through This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket For example making one user socket a phone port and another user socket a computer LAN port without requiring any rewiring of the cables in between PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 13 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Line Providers Building Structured Network Termination Cabling e Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations Where necessary the far end RJ 45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems using punch block connectors This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician e Trunk Connec
83. and delivers increased coverage in warehouse and campus like environments Coverage area depends on building construction and environmental conditions The base station uses an ETR port for connection to Essential Edition PARTNER Version PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 68 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Telephones 4 6 12 POTS Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems support most types of analog phone There are differences in behavior between ETR6 POTs and PHONE Combination POTs that should noted ETR6 POTs are defined as POTs directly connected to the ETR6 module and not to the AUX jack on the back of an ETR digital telephone PHONE Combination POTs are POTs connected to PHONE or Combination system modules PHONE Combination POTs cannot have line appearances whilst ETR6 POTs can ETR6 POTs having line appearances is consistent with PARTNER ACS operation PHONE Combination POTs ring with ring patterns consistent with IP Office whilst ETR6 POTs ring with ring patterns consistent with PARTNER ACS e Intercom calls to PHONE Combination POTs are one long ring while on ETR6 POTs they are one long ring followed immediately by one short ring e Outside calls on PHONE COMBO POTSs are one very long ring whilst on ETR6 POTs they are just one long ring e Transferred calls on PHONE COMBO POTs are the same ring as the base call type inside or outs
84. and in Managing Configuration 100 Files topic 1 1 2 Control Unit The base item of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is the system server or control unit It stores the system configuration and controls system operation Essential Edition PARTNER Version uses the IP Office 500v2 R6 0 control unit or above A control unit can be customized by adding various internal cards such as trunk cards external expansion modules can be also be connected to add additional extension and trunk ports The IP Office 500v2 control unit has four front slots for IP Office 500 base cards It has an internal power supply unit and uses a mandatory dongle in the form of an SD Card 8 plugged into a rear panel slot It includes a 2 port ethernet LAN switch layer 3 managed on the rear e A E a E E EER EEEIEE E eee m D E3 EPA HE H SeG0 08808 5 6 7 BEBE ESSERE AUX CCLLLLLoeLe SEE EEE EEE E Er REZ LAH WAH INPUT SSR ESRD ECCT SsemS0 Ope ED SP ADD o Ac 100 W Ss Em SD Op bra So amima ci u oe SMSO HI TA i gt AS2a2 DTE Reset Expansion ports for status LEDs Port switch Expansion Modules oe System S card slat External LAN Ports Optional SO card slot music on hold LAN LANI External output switch input WAN LANZ Rear panel PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 9 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Ports pec eee INPUT CPU LED System and Optional SD LEDs
85. answered at the twin exactly the same as having been answered at the primary 203 is internally twinned to 201 Call from 207 to 203 but answer at 201 2008 07 09 16 25 26 00 00 03 7 207 0 203 203 1 1000037 0 E207 Extn207 E203 Extn203 0 0 Park and Unpark Parking and unparking of a call at the same extension is simply shown by the Park Time field of the eventual SMDR record Similarly calls held and unheld at the same extension are shown by the Held Time field of the eventual SMDR record for the call The records below however show a call parked at one extension and then unparked at another The records show a call from 207 to 203 203 then parks the call shown by the Park Time The call is unparked by 201 hence the first record is indicated as continued in its Continuation field The matching Call ID indicates the subsequent record for the call 20087 07709 16 39 11 00 00 00 2 207 0 203 203 7b 1000082 1 E207 Extn20 203 320370 4 2008 07 09 16 39211 00 00 302 0 207 0 203 203 71 1000092 09 2207 E2 2207 E201 Ex 2201 0 0 Distributed Hunt Group Call An incoming call to site A is targeted to a distributed hunt group member on site B They transfer the call back to a hunt group member on site A 2008 08 01 15 32 52 00 00 10 19 01707299900 1 4002 390664 0 1000024 1 E209 Luther 209 T9001 Line 1 2 0 0 yyrrrrrr rrr 2008 08 01 15 33 19 00 00 00 2 209 1 4203 203 0 1000025 07 E209 Luther 209 E403 Extn403 0 O rrrrr
86. apply to them is available on Avaya s web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support Trademarks Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the United States of America and other jurisdictions Unless otherwise provided in this document marks identified by and SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Documentation information For the most current versions of documentation go to the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support or the IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center The support telephone number is 1 800 628 2888 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support P
87. are miss dialed Call rings continuously but no one at other end Calls on hold are disconnected Calls on Automatic System Answer lines are disconnected Call on Hold hangs up but line doesn t disconnect All telephones dead no dial tone or lights Multiple telephones dead no dial tone or lights Is Forced Account Code Entry assigned to this extension Is your dial mode touch tone or rotary incorrect Use Dial Mode 201 to reset it Has someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction for the extension Did someone lock the extension with Station Lock Use Station Unlock from extension 10 or 11 to unlock it Local telephone company may not be receiving signals accurately If problem is on just one telephone see Telephone Doesn t Work above TOO many tip ring devices may be trying to dial at once Local telephone company line may be faulty unplug each line from its module and test it by using a single line telephone e If the trouble doesn t occur on the single line telephone the problem is in your control unit e If the trouble occurs on the single line telephone switch the line cord and try again If this doesn t work call the telephone company Is Forced Account Code Entry assigned to this extension Is your dial mode touch tone or rotary incorrect Use Dial Mode 201 to reset it Has someone changed the Pool Access Restriction for the extension Pool may not be assigned to the extension T
88. caller a confirmation that Your message has been sent Goodbye Change Message Status to New allows you to change the status of an Old or Saved message back to New putting it in the New Message queue and reactivating the Message Waiting light This is available from both Visual Voice as well as via TUl command 06 q Badger Communications Durand WI 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version System Features Increased support for ATM 4 Cards The system now supports up to 16 Analog CO telephone lines Unique Line Ringing with Override Allows user to differentiate by sound which line is ringing via a unique ring pattern Up to 8 ring patterns are available One Touch Call Transfer Users can now press their pre programmed auto intercom button to transfer a call to an extension Transfer Return To Programmable Extension Allows an unanswered transferred call to be re routed to an alternate extension TUI Menu Optimization The 1408 1416 menu has been optimized for easier programming and use Wake up Service Allows extension 10 to set a wake up reminder call for a user on the system If call is not answered by the user the system re tries a 2nd time 5 minutes later Ideal for the hospitality industry Service and Support Features SD Card Shut Down Start Up via TUI Allows the administrator to shut down or start up either the Primary or the Secondary SD car
89. card by dragging and dropping or by right clicking on the Files pane and selecting Upload or by using File Upload File The IP Office will ask for confirmation if the file already exists on the memory card The progress of the file upload is then indicated PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 93 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e The Manager TFTP Log 97 gt shows the activity for files sent to and received from the memory card It can be displayed by clicking on the TFTP Log button shown on the file upload download dialog or by selecting View TFTP Log e Deleting Files Existing files can be deleted by right clicking on them and selecting Delete e Downloading Files Files can also be copied from the card by right clicking on the file and selecting Download Manager will prompt for the download location Existing files are overwritten if present e To exit this mode of Manager back to normal configuration operation select File Configuration from the menu bar Alternatively to view the card in another system select File Close File Settings and then File Open File Settings 3 1 7 7 Format IP Office SD Card Only this method should be used for formatting an Avaya SD card Using Manager ensures that special files required for Essential Edition PARTNER Version operation are created and that the Feature Key information is retained a h WARNING All File Will Be Erased Note that t
90. communicate directly with the SD card 8 If you have made unsaved changes changes to the copy configuration file you are prompted to save the configuration before the command progresses PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 92 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu This option is only for use by experienced users and if selected is challenged by administrator log in 14 gt before continuing Administrator log in is followed by an IP Office discovery by Manager so that IP Office systems are listed for you to choose another system This view provides access to the SD card and enables you to add and remove files from it This may be useful when the memory card is being used to store Music on Hold or IP phone firmware files Ui Avaya IP Office R Manager Bubedded File Management 00E0070521 9A 6 0 11014 Aduinistratur DEBR File Edit View Help MODE DEF ay ee Name Name MODE DEF Me st rg 3 erg J MODL DEF Date Modifed 22 09 2003 10 45 08 c BACKUP Size bytes 77 E DYNAMIC LYMAIL PRIMARY V Read ony V Hidden TEMP V Archive V System Altributes Total Space Used bytes 505 577 472 Space Remaining bytes 3 447 029 760 Lae e Viewing a Memory Card When a system is selected a valid service user name and password for configuration access to that system is requested If the system selected does not have a memory card installed
91. connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system Im ern Tun Perenumier All IPO 500 Digital Station 16 Ports 700449499 IEC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom X 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 58 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Expansion Modules 4 5 2 Phone Module IPO 500 Phone modules can be used to add additional PHONE ports to an IP Office Partner Version system Note that this requires the IP Office 500 control unit to be configured with an IP Office 500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license The module is referred to as the IPO 500 Phone 16 Software Level IP Office core software level 2 1 36 minimum Bin file dvpots bin Included Power supply unit see below and Expansion Interconnect cable Power Supply The module is supplied with a Earthed 3 Pin
92. current call Caller ID Inspect FEATURE 20 Enable call coverage from your extension to another lt Own Extension gt extension To disable call coverage enter your own Call Coverage 27 lt Covering Extension gt extension number twice Lock or unlock your extension Set clear an absent text message Operate the system s first contact closure switch Operate the system s second contact closure switch Display the software version of the system PARTNER User Guide Page 22 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Intercom Codes Advanced Features Feature and Intercom Codes The following features are accessed by pressing an idle intercom button Feature Group Pickup Direct Line Pickup I dle Line Direct Line Pickup Active Line Loudspeaker Paging Simultaneous Paging Group Calling Group Calling Page Group Hunting Group Hunting Voice Signal PARTNER User Guide IP Office PARTNER Version Intercom 6 lt Extension Number gt Intercom 66 lt Pickup Group gt Intercom 8 lt Line Number gt Intercom 68 lt Line Number gt Intercom 70 Intercom 70 Intercom 7 lt Calling Group gt Intercom 7 lt Calling Group gt Intercom 77 lt Hunt Group gt Intercom 77 lt Hunt Group gt Summary Answer the longest waiting call ringing at an extension Answer the longest waiting call ringing any extension that is a member of the pickup group 1 t
93. current types of records being shown 4 To exit the call log press the PHONE EXIT button 7 2 Making a Call from the Call Log You can use the call log to make calls to the number included in the currently selected call record 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the Call soft key or OK to call the number displayed in the call record PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 54 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Call Log 1408 1416 Making a Call from the Call Log 7 3 Viewing Call Details You can view additional details about the currently shown call 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the Details soft key The individual details of the currently selected call record are displayed 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the details The possible values are e Time The time of the call e Duration The length of the call e Name The name of the caller if Known e Number The number of the caller if available e Reason The type of call record i
94. dial tone 2 Feature T c 3 3 D lt Do Not Disturb On Off 34 FEATURE 01 Switch your do not disturb on off FEATURE 03 Send a recall or hook switch flash signal during a call Save Number Redial FEATURE 04 Save the number dialed during a call Then redial that number when idle FEATURE 05 Last Number Redial Redial the last dialed number Conference Drop FEATURE 06 Drop the last added party from a conference FEATURE 07 1 Privacy On Off Turn privacy on off during a call Call Forwarding 25 FEATURE 11 lt Extension Number gt Forward your calls to another extension Remote Call Forwarding 25 FEATURE 11 lt Personal Speed Dial gt Forward your calls to an external number by selecting one of your personal speed dials as the destination Cell Phone Connect 25 FEATURE 11 lt Personal Speed Dial gt Similar to remote call forwarding but with your calls ringing at both your extension and the external number FEATURE 12 Account Code Entry Enter and exit account code entry mode during a call FEATURE 14 lt Extension Number gt Voice Mailbox Transfer 35 gt Transfer your current call to an extension s mailbox VMS Cover On Off 44 FEATURE 15 Turn your voicemail cover on off Caller ID Name Display FEATURE 16 Toggle the display between name and number information FEATURE 17 See the call details of a call on another line button without interrupting your own
95. displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 28 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Absent Message e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an absent message button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 28 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Absent Message and press Select 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Absent Message e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu To activate an absent text message 1 Press the absent text message button The first absent text message is displayed 2 Scroll through the default messages by pressing the button beneath the word Next until the required message is displayed e Back soon Please Call Back tomorrow e On Holiday Until e Do not disturb At lunch until On Vacation e Meeting until e Out to lunch Don t disturb until At home e With visitors until e Away from desk With cust until Be right back 3 Press the button beneath the word Activ to select the message show
96. document ts as follows 1 Equip 19 gt the control unit 16 gt with base cards fitted with daughter cards where needed Insert base cards 19 gt working from left to right and do not leave unoccupied slots between cards Insert the supplied SD 18 card Connect the Manager 7 laptop PC to the control unit 16 gt Connect telephones to extensions 10 and 11 Admin users U PR W N Start up the PC and run the Manager application Ignore the manager display because as yet it has not discovered an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system to manage 6 Switch ON the control unit 7 IP Office automatically configures the connected system and contacts the laptop 8 Manager software on the PC displays the Welcome screen identifies basic system components and system settings 9 Plug in telephone 24 gt connectors to the remaining extensions 10 Apply simple housekeeping rules to cables by tying them in associated and clearly labeled bundles 11 Route cables carefully so that they do not intrude the working area or create a hazard 12 Manager 7 can be used to prepare user lists permissions group memberships and other administration tasks or the customer may do this through handset TUI actions detailed in the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version ETR Telephone System Programming and User Guide The procedures above are elaborated in the following sections h Note Connection to analog and digital phones not
97. extension by changing the extensions Base Extension number to match the user s Extension ID PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 95 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Like for Like Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type no configuration changes are necessary 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 4 Restart the IP Office system Higher Capacity Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type but higher capacity when restarted the IP Office will automatically create configuration entries for the new trunks or extensions users 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 4 Restart the IP Office system 5 Use Manager to configure the new trunks or extensions users Lower Capacity Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type but lower capacity after restarting the IP Office the con
98. features that can be used with your extension They are accessed by pressing FEATURE and dialing the required feature code Depending on the feature be used this is done either when the phone is idle or during a call e On ETR phones the FEATURE button is used to start dialing a feature code e On 1400 Series phones select Feature on the display to start dialing a feature code During a call you may need to select gt gt first to display the Feature option e On analog phones at dial tone dial followed by the feature code To do this during a call you need to press recall first to get to dial tone The table below lists some of the features Note that some feature may have restrictions on which extensions and or types of phone can us the feature Feature Dial Summary Do Not Disturb On Off 34 gt FEATURE 01 Switch your do not disturb on off Recall FEATURE 03 Send a recall or hook switch flash signal during a call Save Number Redial FEATURE 04 Save the number dialed during a call Then redial that number when idle Last Number Redial FEATURE 05 Redial the last dialed number Conference Drop FEATURE 06 Drop the last added party from a conference Privacy On Off FEATURE 07 Turn privacy on off during a call Call Forwarding 26 FEATURE 11 Forward your calls to another extension lt Extension Number gt Remote Call Forwarding 26 FEATURE 11 Forward your calls to an external number by selecting one lt Personal Speed Dial gt of y
99. for configuring Line Appearances with button programming The line appearance ID must be unique and not match any extension number e Tx Gain Default OdB The transmit gain in dB e Rx Gain Default OdB The receive gain in dB e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range O to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when unanswered calls should be redirected to the voicemail system The delay for the redirection is set by the VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night values for the channel The options are Always Day Only Night Only or Never 2 13 2 3 PRI Advanced AT amp T Specific Setup A Because some settings can conflict with or nullify other settings do not use this dialog except under direction of a trained Avaya technician or when directed to do so by support personnel These settings are only available for a PRI trunks where the Provider has been set to AT amp T PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 56 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks Trunks PRI Advanced AT amp T Specific Setup Trunk Number 9 TNS Code TNS Codes Spe
100. information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com 1 1 Introduction When Manager starts up it automatically looks for the control unit 9 configuration file It pulls the file into its memory from the Avaya SD card 8 that is plugged into the rear panel of the IP Office 500v2 control unit running the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office T Manager IP Office 500v2 Control Unit running IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version LAN Cable PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 7 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 h IMPORTANT Manager is an off line editor It receives a copy of the current configuration settings for the system from the control unit SD Card 8 Changes can be made to that copy and it must then be sent back 79 to Essential Edition PARTNER Version for those changes to become active This means that any changes to the active configuration in the system that occurs between Manager receiving and sending back the edited copy would be overwritten For example this may affect changes made by users through their phone or voicemail mailbox while Manager holds a copy of the configuration Software Compatibility Manager is part of the IP Office Admin suite of programs 11 You should note that the software level of Manag
101. licensed capacity IP500 4 Port Expansion LEDs 1 to 8 are used for the expansion ports on the rear of the control unit LEDs 9 to 12 are used for the card s own expansion ports Green On Expansion module present Red Flashing initializing Red On Error Orange Regular Flash Base card okay IP500 Combination LEDs 1 to 6 e Green On Phone detected Trunk Daughter Card LEDs Trunk Daughter Card LEDs 9 to 12 Usage e LED 9 is used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog Trunk e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Trunk e Off No trunk present e Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green Fast e Green on Trunk present Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS e Green flashing Trunk in use from the trunk remote end e Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor External Expansion Module LEDs e Green on Module okay e Red on Error e Red flashing Module starting up Telephone Problems Problem Check this Telephone does not ring Ringer volume may be too low Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding may be turned on Line Ringing may not be set to Immediate Telephone may be faulty switch telephones and try again If MLC 6 telephone is Unique Line Ringing 209 set to a pattern other than 1
102. lifting the handset To switch modes e If you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to the speakerphone by pressing SPEAKER or SPKR and then hanging up the handset e If you are using the speakerphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset The speaker and microphone are turned off e On ETR phones to turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press MIC HFAT This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you On 1400 Series phones to do this press the MUTE button 3 4 Hands Free Answer on Intercom When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your telephone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your telephone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system telephone by pressing an intercom button and and then dialing an extension number You cannot make a voice signaled call to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active The call will not appear at the extension 1 The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your telephone is idle On ETR phones use the HFAI button on 1400 Series phones use the MUTE button Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns of
103. like a lamp one or more system modules may be out try reseating the module in the control unit Page 31 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Index A Admin tool user manual 21 Administrator 22 Analog lines 24 Antistatic 19 Applying power 20 Associated documents 7 ATM4 daughter card 9 B Base card 9 16 19 Basic install 7 Bulletins technical 12 C Cable ties 12 Cable RJ45 13 Card base 9 16 19 combination 9 daughter 9 ETR 9 expansion 19 folders 18 format 18 front lamps 20 insertion 19 reinsertion 18 removal 18 19 SD 13 18 20 21 serialnumber 18 slots 16 19 trunk 16 VCM 16 Change password 22 Code SAP 13 Combination card 9 Connection grounding 17 Control unit 16 18 21 grounding 17 rear 20 Cover slot 19 CPU LED 20 Customer handover 24 D Daughter card 9 Default password 21 Dial tone 24 Dimensions 16 E Expansion module 9 Extension port 16 Extensions 24 G Grounding control units 17 H Hard Disk Space 8 Hardware components 9 Home page 21 Install basic 7 12 confirmation 21 Manager 8 PARTNER Version Quick Install IP Office Essential Edition Index pre requirements 12 system 16 telephone 24 IP Office admin suite selecting 8 administrator applications CD 8 DVD 8 Manager application 7 selecting 8 IP500 Installation Check CardLED 28 J Java 8 L LAN socket 20 Laptop 7 20 LED CPU 20 Lines analog 24 cord 24 Log in session 21 Maximum units 9 Mounting 16 N NET2
104. located in the same building as the IP Office is only supported with the addition of additional protective equipment and additional installation requirements See Out of Building Telephone Installations in the Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual 3 1 Control Unit The IP Office 500v2 slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right They can be used in any order See limitations 9 However if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled The unit must not be used with uncovered slots as this would affect unit cooling PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 16 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Installation Control Unit Removable base cards Typical card complement F Maximum Extensions Conference Parties Trunks Cards VCM Card Slots Locales Software Level Power Supply Mounting Dimensions Memory Up to 48 extension ports of which there may be a maximum of 18 ETR ports Maximum 64 in any individual conference Silence suppression is applied to conferences with more than 10 parties Four Any combination of IP500 trunk daughter cards and up to two IP400 trunk cards Four Up to a maximum of 128 channels using two IP500 VCM cards Supported in Canada United States plus Countries that support North American telephony US standards
105. not receive a response from a DHCP server it will configure itself as a DHCP server and use the following default address details Network Settings LAN1 LAN2 WAN IP address 192 168 42 1 192 168 43 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 DHCP Mode Server Server No of DHCP IP Addresses 200 200 If the IP address and DHCP mode settings are not suitable for the customers network then they should changed Note that changing the IP Office IP address settings requires it to restart Connect to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system and start IP Office Manager In the home page click Change System Settings In the System Parameters area Name field enter a distinctive name for the IP Office system Make sure the Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server box is not checked Change the IP Address Sub Net Mask and Default Gateway settings to match the customer requirements O oa A W N e Click Apply 7 Click the save icon i in the menu bar to save the updated configuration back to the IP Office system 8 After the IP Office has restarted unless the Manager PC is using a DHCP client address change the PC address to match 5 7 4 System Shutdown IP Office can be shut down in order to perform maintenance The shut down can be either indefinite or for a set period of time after which the IP Office will automatically reboot During the shut down process the current configuration in the control unit RAM memory is copied to t
106. not selected e Sub Net Mask Default 255 255 255 0 Enter the Sub Net Mask that the telephone system should use if Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server is not selected e Default Gateway Default 0 0 0 0 Enter the Default Gateway that the telephone system should use if Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server is not selected e Automatic Daylight Saving Time Default On When selected the telephone system will automatically apply daylight saving time adjustments to its internal clock PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 26 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks System Settings e Lines per phone Default 5 This is the number of physical analog line ports For phones with programmable buttons those buttons can be configured as line appearance buttons each matching a particular incoming line This setting controls how many of each users buttons are automatically allocated as line appearance buttons Note that if this value is increased the existing functions on some user buttons may be overwritten If value is decreased the lines are removed and replaced with blank programmable buttons e System Password Default Blank No system password Range 4 digits This is a four digit code used at first instance on a telephone handset by administrators extension 10 amp 11 Once set the system password can be used to override station lock forced account or disallowed calls lis
107. number e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 29 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 4 7 Locking Your Extension You can use the lock feature to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from your extension while you are away from the extension To lock your extension 1 Press FEATURE 21 2 Dial a four digit code using the 0 to 9 numbers 3 Redial the four digit code To unlock your extension 1 Press FEATURE 21 2 Dial the four digit code you used to lock the extension 4 8 System Speed Dials The system administrator can program up to 100 frequently used number as system speed dial numbers 600 to 699 Any user in the system can use a system speed dial by pressing FEATURE and dialing the three digit code of the system Speed dial required e Except in special cases which the system administrator can configure system speed dials do not override any dialing restrictions that apply to an extension e 1408 and 1416 phone users can view and use system speed dials through the phone s CONTACTS 50 menu Extensions 10 and 11 can also edit the system speed dials through the menu To use a system speed dial 1 At dial tone or whenever you want to dial a number press FEATURE and dial the three digit system speed dial code between 600 and 699 2 The stored number is dialed PARTNER User Guide Page 30 IP Off
108. of the second party 3 When the call is answered press the CONF or CONFERENCE button again to add the second party to the call 4 You can now speak to the first and second parties An alternating Red Green Flash appears at any extension connected during a conference call 5 Repeat step 2 to add more parties To use hold during a conference call If you need to answer or make another call during a conference call you can use the Hold feature When you put a conference call on hold the other parties can still talk to each other 1 Press the HOLD button 2 The Green light next to the intercom or line button will wink to show that the call is on hold 3 To re join the conference call press the button next to the Green light You will rejoin the conference An alternating Red Green Flash appears next to your intercom or line button to indicate that you are in a conference call 3 9 Joining Calls Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension e Join an intercom call or a conference call at anther extension Join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Put a joined call on hold Tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line button change to alternately flashing Red and Green Program Privacy onto a system telephone button to allow or prevent others from joining your calls Join a call that is being answered by the voice mes
109. on No software e Green on Okay e Flashing Red Error Shutdown EXPANSION RJ45 socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module EXT O P 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office INPUT AC power input port LAN RJ 45 socket With the WAN port forms a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch The ports are full duplex 10 100Mbps auto sensing MDI crossover ports Optional SD Used for the Optional SD card The LED is used in the same way as for the System SD see below RESET This switch is used to restart the IP Office optionally erasing the configuration and or the core software in the process See table below RS232 9 Way D Type socket Used for system maintenance System SD Used for the System SD card The LED is used as follows e Off Card shutdown e Red flashing Card initializing or shutting down e Green on Card present e Red fast flashing Card full e Green flashing Card in use e Red steady Card failure wrong type e Orange steady Reset imminent WAN Not used in Essential Edition PARTNER Version AB Used for connection of a function or protective ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement Reset button Pressing the button while the c
110. outgoing call barring A reboot using the reset button is recorded in the Audit Trail 10 to 30 Flashing orange Erase Configuration Erase the configuration alarm log and audit trail Immediate Reboot Immediate reboot without waiting for active calls to end 30 to 40 Red Erase All Erase configuration alarm log and core software Over 40 Flashing green None None RJ 45 socket Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module Only Port 1 of the extreme right hand expansion ports should be used Used for connection of a function or protective ground Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement Control Unit IP Office 500v2 Base Unit 700476005 SD Card IPO System SD Card Partner 700479728 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit 700429202 IP Office 500Wall Mounting Kit IP Office 500Wall Mounting Kit 700430150 IP Office 500Blanking Plate Kit IP Office 500Blanking Plate Kit 700429194 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 10 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application Administration Software 1 2 Administration Software Avaya produce a suite of management programs for family of IP Office systems to which IP Office Essential Edition belongs System Status is on the SD card and can be starte
111. part of the call See SMDR Examples 109 Each SMDR record contains call information in a comma separated format CSV format that is variable width fields with each field separated by commas See SMDR Fields 106 Unless otherwise stated the SMDR referred to in this documentation is the SMDR output direct from the IP Office rather than that output via the IP Office Delta Server application e SMDR Buffer Persistence For IP Office Release 6 the operation of SMDR on IP Office 500v2 control units has been enhanced to store any buffered SMDR records during any controlled IP Office power downs or reboots Enabling IP Office SMDR 4 1 Use the Admin Tasks Auxiliary Equipment Dialog 2 Select SMDR 3 Check the SMDR output box 4 Enter the required IP Address and TCP Port SMDR Records An SMDR record is generated for each call between two devices on the IP Office system Devices include extensions trunk lines or channels on a trunk voicemail channels conference channels and IP Office tones Calls that are not presented to another device do not generate an SMDR record For example internal users dialing short code that simply changes a configuration setting The SMDR record is generated when the call ends therefore the order of the SMDR records output does not match the call start times Each record contains a call ID which is increased by 1 for each subsequent call When a call moves from one device to another an SMDR record is outpu
112. press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER User Guide Page 61 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 PARTNER User Guide Page 62 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Index 6 6D Telephone 7 A Absent Text Message 22 25 Account Code 32 Account Code Entry 22 Active Line Pickup 22 Add Contact 52 56 Adjust Ringer Volume 9 All Call Log 52 54 55 56 Contacts 50 51 A Menu 58 Answer a Call 17 Answer on Intercom 18 Answered 52 54 55 56 Athome 25 At lunch until 25 Audible Alerting 59 Audio Path 61 AutCB 16 Auto Dial 29 Away from desk 25 B Back soon 25 Back tomorrow 25 Be right back 25 Bridge 20 C Call Bridge 20 Coverage 27 Forward 22 26 from Call Log 54 from Contacts 51 Ignore 17 Join 20 Park 33 Pickup 17 33 ToVM 17 Call Coverage 22 CALL LOG 52 54 55 56 Call from 54 Details 55 Menu 54 Call Pickup 22 Call Settings Audible alerting on off 59 Audio Path 61 Visual alerting on off 59 Call Transfer Supervised 19 Call Transfer Unsupervised 19 Caller Details 55 Caller ID Inspect 22 Name Display 22 Caller volume 19 Cell Phone Connect 22 26 Changing Mailbox Access Code 42 PARTNER User Guide IP Office PARTNER Version Index Your Greeting Message 43 Code Account 32 Lock 30 Conference Hold 20 Start 20 Conference Button 9 Conference Drop 22 Contact Add 52 56 Edit 51 52 Contact Closure 22 CONTACTS 50 51 52
113. press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 Locate the required entry 3 Press the Details soft key 4 Press the More soft key and then the Edit soft key e The menu now allows editing of the name and number e Use the d amp up and down arrow keys to switch between number and name entry e When the name has been entered as required press the OK soft key e When the number has been are required press the Save soft key e To exit without making any changes press the Cancel soft key PARTNER User Guide Page 51 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 6 4 Adding a New Contact So long as the telephone system capacity has not been reached you can add up to 100 personal directory entries 1 Access your personal directory contacts a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select your Personal directory Extensions 10 and 11 can also add edit and delete entries from the External directory 2 Press the New soft key e The menu now allows editing of the name and number e Use the d up and down arrow keys to switch between number and name entry e When the name has been entered as required press the OK soft key
114. ring immediately at the next available extension in the group e To avoid missing calls when Do Not Disturb is not needed turn it off e Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active ring at that extension if they transfer return e Users with VMS Cover 44 turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to send all calls immediately to their voice mailbox e Users with Call Coverage 27 turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to send all calls immediately to the covering extension e You receive a slow interrupted intercom dialling tone when Do Not Disturb is active To manually switch do not disturb on off 1 Dial FEATURE 01 To create a do not disturb button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial Feature 01 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Do Not Disturb e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a do not disturb button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the but
115. set to either CPE Customer Premises Equipment or CO Central Office This field should normally be left at its default of CPE The setting CO is normally only used in lab back to back testing PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 54 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks e Haul Length Default 0 115 feet Sets the line length to a specific distance e Channel Unit Default Foreign Exchange Trunks This field should be set to match the channel signaling equipment provided by the Central Office The options are Foreign Exchange Special Access or Normal e Dial Plan This table is used to process numbers dialled by extension users and convert them to numbers output by the phone system to the line This outgoing number manipulation is used to Block up numbers between the time of seizing the Channel and the INVITE being sent out The Blocking up is configured independently per SIP Trunk but is shared amongst all the Line Appearances on that trunk By default the SIP URI convention shall be used in the INVITE The complete default table is XXXXXXXXXXN N Dial ON ON Dial IN IN Dial N N Dial 911 911 Dial 2xxN 2N Dial 3xxN 3N Dial xxN N Dial 65 Explicitly not Anonymous 207 Call Anonymously Once you dial 65 or 67 you return to dial tone but these codes can be used to override the anonymous flag which is set on a channel b
116. that was ringing the specified extension PARTNER User Guide Page 33 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 4 13 Do Not Disturb Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from ringing lights may still flash You can still use the extension to make calls e You need to program a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also on indicating that the telephone will not ring e Use Do Not Disturb when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you e Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will Skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in the group e To avoid missing calls when Do Not Disturb is not needed turn it off e Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active ring at that extension if they transfer return e Users with VMS Cover 44 turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to send all calls immediately to their voice mailbox e Users with Call Coverage 27 gt turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to send all calls immediately to the covering extension To manually switch do not disturb on off 1 Dial FEATURE 01 To create a do not disturb button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the dis
117. the USA only Avaya provides a toll tree Customer Helpline 24 hours a day e Name Avaya Technical Support Organization TSO e Customer Helpline 1 800 628 2888 e Address 8744 Lucent Blvd Highlands Ranch Colorado 80129 USA e URL http support avaya com If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system call the Helpline or your Avaya representative Consultation charges may apply e Outside the USA If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your Avaya representative e URL http support avaya com 6 2 4 Compliance with FCC Rules Transmit and Receive Gain Settings for PRI T1 and Analog Ports The Gain settings are password controlled for use by qualified installation personnel only and must not be made available to the end user The default gain settings of OdB ensures compliance with FCC part 68 section 68 308 b 5 and TIA EIA IS 968 Section 4 5 2 5 Through transmission amplification from ports for the connection of separately registered equipment or from other network connection ports Gain setting adjustment by unqualified personnel may result in violation of the FCC rules Qualified personnel may adjust gain settings above these levels only where 1 Measurement is made to ensure that the power levels sent to line at each network interface connected does not exceed the maximum levels specified in FCC part 68 section 68 308 b and TIA EIA IS 968 Section 4 5 for
118. the files view remains blank and the message TFTP Received TFTP Error Not Found appears in Manager s status bar e Embedded Voicemail Files When viewing the memory card the files related to Embedded Voicemail are visible in LVMAIL directory however these files are grayed out ie cannot be deleted downloaded or overwritten e Mailbox greetings and messages are shown as c p files e The language prompts for Embedded Voicemail functions are stored in separate language sub folders of LVMAI L e Named prompt files for use by Embedded Voicemail auto attendants are stored in the Ivmail AAG folder and use the same c11 file formats as the language prompts These files can be created from standard wav files before being downloaded to the memory card e Avaya IP Phone Files The memory card can be used as the source of files requested by IP Phones when rebooting For phones using IP Office DHCP once the files are loaded onto the card the TFTP Server IP Address and HTTP Server IP Address on the System System tab must be set to match the IP Office LAN address e For IP Office 5 0 the Manager menu option File Upload Phone Files will automatically select and transfer all DS phone H323 phone and IP DECT binary files from the Manager folder to the embedded memory card e Changing the Files View The type of display used in the Files pane can be changed by selecting from the View menu in the toolbar e Adding Files Files can be added to the
119. the order in which group members are listed The Group Management dialog is used to configure which extensions are members of the different available groups You can also indicate which groups a user uses through the User Setup 33 dialog Group Management Hunt Groups Configured Aunt Groups Name Number Ring Mode Pickup Groups HurtGroupt 7 Sequential Calling Groups Hunt Group 2 rf Sequential l l Hunt Group 3 fra Sequential Night Serice Group Hunt Group 4 tid Sequential Hunt Group 5 feo Sequential Hunt Group 6 fro Sequential Assign Users to Group Available Users Selected Users Add gt Add All gt gt lt Remove lt lt Remove Al Group Category Number Ring Mode Description Sequential Hunt groups are usable as the coverage destination for incoming external calls Six hunt groups with extension numbers 771 to 776 may be configured Each extension can be a member of several hunt groups Pickup Groups Sequential Users can be configured to pickup a call currently alerting any member of a pickup group Four pickup groups can be configured Calling Groups Ring All Users can call or transfer calls to a calling group Four calling groups with extension numbers 71 to 74 can be configured Night Service Group Ring All When the phone system is set to night service mode incoming external calls other than those routed by DDI mapping are rerouted to the users in the night service group e Name
120. the various IP Office software releases involved before proceeding These may contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was completed Bulletins are available from http Support avaya com e Multi Stage Upgrades The upgrade path may require several intermediate upgrades Skipping an intermediate level may lead to incorrect system operation and configuration corruption Multi stage upgrades are only necessary for control units External expansion modules can be upgraded directly between any two levels supported by the module There are two methods that the IP Office may use for upgrading these are Validated and Non validated e Validated Upgrade This is the preferred method and can be used with any IP Office system that already has IP Office software By default the Validate option within the Upgrade Wizard is pre selected During this process the required BIN files are first transferred to the IP Office RAM memory Only when the files are received will the IP Office overwrite the existing software in its Flash memory and restart using the new files e Non validated Upgrade This is the least preferred upgrade method It should only be used from a PC directly connected to the IP Office and with a fixed IP address on the same LAN domain as the IP Office LAN1 This method involves erasing the existing software in the IP Office Flash memory and then copying the new BIN files directly to the Flash memory Its uses BOOTP
121. to or from which files can be copied Non Avaya cards can be used for this as long as they conform to the standard below o SDHC minimum AGB FAT32 format Single partition SDHC class2 FAT32 SPI amp SD bus PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 18 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 h SD Card Removal System Overview SD Card SD cards should never be removed while being used Though the SD card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an SD card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard The IP Office Manager provides methods to shutdown and restart an individual card or to shutdown the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system in order to allow removal of an SD card Ifthe System SD card is removed licensed features will continue operating for up to 2 hours 2 6 Base Cards IP Office 500 Analog Phone Base Card IP Office 500 ATM Combination Card IP Office ETR6 Base Card The IP Office 500v2 control unit has 4 slots to accomodate base cards Each base cards includes an integral front panel with ports for cable connections The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right Normally they can be used in any order however if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the highest slot will be disabled This card has 12 RJ45 ports The card is available in two variants providing 2 or 8 analog extension ports for the connect
122. upgrade process Ensure that only one copy of Manager is running when upgrading an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system en HAL Procedure Upgrade Procedure 1 Using Manager click and receive the configuration from the Essential Edition PARTNER Version If not already done this action creates a BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system and displays a Essential Edition PARTNER Version admin tool screen This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC and the Essential Edition PARTNER Version 2 Select File Save Configuration As and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC This action should be completed before upgrading any IP Office system 3 Select File Advanced Upgrade 4 The Upgrade Wizard is started and scans for IP Office unit using the Unit Broadcast address Adjust this address and click Refresh if the expected modules are not shown 5 For each unit found the Upgrade Wiz displays the module type its current version of software installed in the unit and the software version of the bin file that Manager has available 6 For those units and modules where manager detects that it has a higher version available the tick box next to the unit or module is automatically selected 7 For those modules which you want to upgrade tick the check box For modules where a later version of software is available the check box may have already been auto
123. used by Manager when running PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 12 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application Installing Manager 5 Click Next gt 6 Select Administrator as the person who should be able to run the Admin Suite 7 Click Next gt If required select the destination to which the applications should be installed We recommend that you accept the default destination 8 Click Next gt The next screen is used to select which applications of the suite should be installed Clicking on each will display a description of the application 9 Click the icon beside Manager 10 Click Next gt jie IP Office Admin Suite InstallShield Wizard Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a Feature is installed Feature Description Provides a system view of all active calls This Feature will be installed on local hard drive JB This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on local hard drive F This Feature will be installed when required Install t M This Feature will not be available C Pra Installshield Help 11 Click Install lt Back Cancel 12 Installation of Windows Net2 components may be required If dialogs for this appear follow the prompts to install Net 13 If requested reboot the PC 1 4 Preparing Ma
124. user belongs that can also be done through the List Management 27 and Group Management 42 gt dialogs Configure User List Group Memberships Ex Outgoing Tua Tinned Directory Call Bar E Number US English None NG 1 US English nr P A None NG 1 US English o O dl US English F C F Mone Hone Oo F O 4 Fi E Extension Name Language List Memberships None None US English None None US English None None Membership Assignment Type List Group Available Groups a Selected Groups Calling Groups Might Service Group 1 Calling Groups 2 Calling Groups 3 Add gt Calling Groups 4 HuntGroup 1 HuntGroup 2 HuntGroup 3 HuntGroup 4 HuntGroup 5 lt Remove U Hr OC e Configure User List This list shows the current settings of all the extension users The list is scrollable and sortable The current group and list settings are show in the list and for the currently selected user can be edited in the Membership Assignment table below the list e Extension Information field not editable This is the extension number of the user e Name Default Blank Display Extn lt extension number gt Use this field to enter the extension user s full name The recommended format is lt first name gt lt space gt lt last name gt When set the Name is used for display by phones and within these dialogs Only alphanumeric characters and spaces are supported in this field Do not use punctuation characters su
125. yet configured gt None Channel Appearance Direction Display Name Local URI Password Anonymous Bothway lt Not yet configured gt Local URI Password Display Marne Destination len lt New gt sNews Clicking on Advanced Setup 4 when an SIP Trunk line type is selected in the list and a domain name has been entered accesses a dialog of additional settings e SIP Trunk Setup Descriptive Name The name of the trunk Domain Name Default Blank Each SIP Trunk configuration has a unique ITSP Domain name needed by SIP end points in order to register with the IP Office This is a string which may be directly resolved to an IP Address or may require DNS lookup to resolve the domain name to the Service provider s address If this field is left blank registration is against the LAN IP address Authentication Name Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP Depending on the settings on the Local URI tab associated with the SIP call it may also be used as the user part of the SIP URI Password Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP Number of Channels Default 10 Number of trunk channels between 1 and 24 Transport Protocol Default Both TCP amp UDP Both TCP and UDP SIP end points are supported This field can be used to restrict the IP Office to just TCP or UDP if required Send Port Default 5060 The port to use for TCP support Listen Port Default 5060 The port to use for U
126. 0 and 11 can also add edit and delete entries from the External directory c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 Locate the required entry 3 Press the Details soft key 4 Press the More soft key and then the Delete soft key PARTNER User Guide Page 52 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 7 Call Log 1408 1416 PARTNER User Guide Page 53 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 7 Call Log 1408 1416 This menu is accessed by pressing the key e Making a Call 54 e Viewing Call Details 55 gt e Deleting a Record 56 e Deleting All Records 56 e Add a Record to Your Contacts 56 7 1 Using the Call Log 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Pressing OK will make a call to the number stored with the currently displayed record 3 You can use the functions listed at the bottom of the display by pressing the soft key below the function name e Call 54 Make a call to the number stored in the currently displa
127. 03 0 9416 9416 1 1000067 0 E203 Extn203 V11002 CO Channel 100 2 0 O rrrrrrrrrrre wo 16 48 37 00 00 13 0 O r 1 1000064 0 E 207 Extn207 V11003 CO Channel 100 30 O2 HR Hr 16 48 58 00 00 13 0 0 9416 9416 0 1000066 0 V11001 CO Channel 100 1 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 I Dr pee er Cfd Extn203 Call Routed by Incoming Call Route Call from external number 403 rerouted by incoming call route ICR for incoming line group 701 back out to 404 2008 08 01 11 45 36 00 00 01 2 403 1 9404 0 1000007 0 79001 Line 1 0 T9010 Line 10 0 0 0 n 4 0 sr sr r 1ER ICR701 404 Two Outgoing External Calls Transferred Together This scenario shows an outgoing call which is then transferred to another outgoing call 2009 02 19 11 13 26 00 00 06 0 203 0 9403 9403 0 1000012 1 E203 Extn203 T9001 Line 1 al 048 2009 02 19 11 13 36 00 00 02 0 203 0 8404 8404 0 1000013 0 E203 Extn203 T9002 Line 2 0 0 0 n a rrrrrrr U AEP Extn203 2009 02 19 11 13 26 00 00 11 0 8404 I 404 0 1000012 0 T9002 Line 2 0 T9001 Line 1 0 0 0 n a O rrrrrrr LINE Xfd 0 1038 0 13 Analog PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 113 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 114 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Index BAK backup file extension 83 BIN files 90 NET2 12 A Abreviated dialling 67 Access denied message 102 Account code entries 2
128. 08 and 1416 phones can access their mailbox messages and settings using a series of menus displayed on the phone This is called Visual Voice To access visual voice press the MESSAGE button on the phone The controls available are e Listen Access your own voicemail mailbox When pressed the screen will show the number of New Old and Saved messages Select one of those options to start playback of messages in that category Use the d up arrow and arrow keys to move through the message Use the options below e Listen e Save Play the message Mark the message as a saved message e Pause e Call Pause the message playback Call the message sender if a caller ID is available e Delete e Copy Delete the message Copy the message to another mailbox When pressed a number of additional options are displayed e Message Record and send a voicemail message to another mailbox or mailboxes e Greeting Change the main greeting used for callers to your mailbox If no greeting has been recorded then the default system mailbox greeting is used e Email This option is only shown if you have been configured with an email address for voicemail email usage by the System Administrator This control allows you to see and change the current voicemail email mode being used for new messages received by your voicemail mailbox Use Change to change the selected mode Press Done when the required mode is displayed Possible modes are e Password Change the vo
129. 09 April 2010 Using Voicemail 5 1 Accessing Your Mailbox Your system administrator can also configure other methods of access including access to your mailbox from other phones e On 1408 and 1416 phones you can access your mailbox using Visual Voice 47 gt Accessing Your Mailbox 1 Press the Intercom 1 or Intercom 2 button and dial 777 2 If your mailbox has an access code 42 gt set you will be prompted to enter it Enter your access code 3 You will hear a prompt telling you how many messages you have If you have any new messages the voicemail system will start playing your new messages 4 You can use the controls indicated below to manage your mailbox and messages Login Enter mailbox and password Mailbox Play old messages 1 3 Edit Greeting Play saved messages 2 Listen to greeting 1 Edit greeting 3 Record new greeting 2 Delete current message 4 Save new greeting 3 Save Current message 5 Save new greeting as loop 4 Forwarding options 6 Return ta mailbox 6 Repeat last message Help 4 6 Forwarding skip current message 9 Fast forward Rewind Call back sender internal Direct all ta email U1 send email notification LW Turn email use off US Change mailbox access code U4 Record Name U5 Forward to email 1 Forward to extension s 4 Foward to extensian s with header message 3 follow each extension number with and then a final t
130. 1 1 28 0 82215 Extn215 V9051 VM Channel 1 0 0 Call Transferred to Voicemail In this example the Continuation field in the first record tells us that it wasn t the end of the call The matching Call ID identifies the second record as part of the same call The change in Party 1 details between the two records show that the call was transferred to voicemail 2008 06 28 09 30 57 00 00 13 7 01707392200 I 299999 299999 0 1000014160 1 E4750 John 27571 T9002 LINE 1 2 11 0 2008 06 28 09 30 57 00 00 21 0 01707392200 1 299999 299999 0 100001410 0 79502 94 Channel 2 T9002 LINE 1 2 0 0 External Call The Is Internal field being O shows this to be a external call The Direction field as shows that it was an incoming call The Ring Time was 7 seconds and the total Connected Time was 5 seconds 2008 08 01 15 14 19 00 00 05 7 01707299900 I 403 390664 0 1000013 0 E403 Extn403 T9001 Line 1 2 0 0O prrrrrrrrrrri Internal call The Is Internal field being 1 shows this to be a internal call The Ring Time was 4 seconds and the total Connected Time was 44 seconds 2008 06 26 10 27 44 00 00 44 4 4688 0 4207 4207 1 1000013898 0 E4688 Joe Bloggs E4207 John Smith 0 0 Outgoing Call The combination of the Direction field being outbound and the Is Internal field be O show that this was a outgoing external call The line and in this case channel used are indicated by the Party2 Name and being a digital channel the Ring Time before the call was an
131. 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support Trademarks Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the United States of America and other jurisdictions Unless otherwise provided in this document marks identified by and SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Documentation information For the most current versions of documentation go to the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support or the IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center The support telephone number is 1 800 628 2888 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 2 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 IP Office Manager ar 7 1 1 1 Installing MANAQel ccccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseees 8 1 2 System CONS AIMS essaia riS 9 2 Getting Started 2 OND
132. 10 e LB4464 U AVAYA IP Office PARTNER Version PARTNER Version User Guide 2010 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases Documentation Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Link Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this Documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End Use
133. 14 0 E201 Extn201 V11001 CO Channel 100 1 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 45 00 00 12 0 0 403 403 0 1000016 0 E403 Libby Franks V11004 CO Channel 100 4 0 0 Transfer In this example 2126 has called 2102 The record 1 for this has the Continuation set a 1 indicating that it has further records In the following record 3 with the same Call ID it can be seen that the Party 2 Device and Party 2 Name fields have changed indicating that the call is now connected to a different device in this example 2121 We can infer the blind transfer from the intermediate record 2 which shows a call of zero Connected Time between the original call destination 2102 and the final destination 2121 20087 07709 17 51 00 00 38 18 2126 0 2102 2102 1 1000019 1 E2126 Extn2126 E2102 Extn2102 19 0 2008 07 09 17 52 00 00 00 7 2102 0 2121 2121 1 1000020 0 E2102 Extn2102 E2121 Extn2121 0 0 2008 07 09 17 51 00 00 39 16 2126 0 2102 2102 1 1000019 0 E2126 Extn2126 E2121 Extn2121 0 0 In this second example extension 402 answers an external call and then transfers it to extension 403 Again the two legs of the external call have the same time date stamp and same call ID 2008 08 01 15 23 37 00 00 04 7 01707299900 I 4001 390664 0 1000019 1 E402 Extn402 T9001 Line 1 1 6 O prrrrrrrrrrrie 2008 08 01 15 23 46 00 00 00 3 402 0 403 403 1 1000020 0 E402 Extn402 E403 Extn403 0 Ope coer rere ere 2008 08 01 15 23 37 00 00 04 4 01707299900 I 4001 390664
134. 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Essential Edition PARTNER Version AVAYA Programming options GUI gt Simple GUI admin interface blending PARTNER ACS PC Admin with IP Office Manager Graphical interface to program feature buttons Copy Paste functionality for programming multiple buttons on same handset Copy features buttons from 1 user to multiple users Ability to print single multiple handset labels Quick programming using 9 primary configuration links System programming in less than 30 minutes 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Essential Edition PARTNER Version AVAYA Programming options TUI gt Alternative way to do Administration and Programming Similar to PARTNER ACS TUI programming consisting of system administration centralized programming and individual programming Same programming codes as PARTNER ACS Stations 10 and 11 can do system administration and centralized programming on PARTNER 18D PARTNER 34D 1408 or 1416 phones Individual programming can be done by any station on PARTNER 18D PARTNER 34D 1408 or 1416 phones Note Some advanced features such as SIP and T1 PRI can be administered only with GUI programming 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Essential Edition PARTNER Version AVAYA Migration vs New PARTNER Version 10 to 15 Migrate e PARTNER Experience gt K
135. 29 overrides any dialing restrictions that may also be applied to the users Account Code Extensions can be configured to require entry of a valid account code when they make an Entries 30 outgoing external call The Account Code Entries list contains the account codes that are accepted as being valid and the selected users who are required to enter one of these codes 2 5 1 Allowed Lists Each allowed list contains external telephone numbers that member of the list are allowed to dial regardless of any other call barring The user s allowed lists override any disallowed lists of which they are a member and the user s Outgoing Call Bar 33 gt and Outgoing Call Restrictions 67 gt settings There are 8 lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits O to 9 and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a single digit wildcard system List Management Allowed Lists Allowed List Number Telephone Numbers tn list Disallowed Lists Emergency Number Lists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries LL Bl ml Valid digits are 0 3 H and 7 Wildcard Assign Users to list Selected Users Add gt Add All gt gt lt Remove lt lt Remove All 2 5 2 Disallowed Lists Each disallowed list contains external telephone numbers that users who are members of the list are not allowed to dial Numbers in the disallowed lists of which a us
136. 3 Port analog 78 audio 78 BRI 78 Cable requirement 83 DC I P 78 digital 49 DS 57 78 DTE Settings 83 expansion 78 EXT O P 78 LAN 78 PF 78 Phone POT 101 78 82 Page 114 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Port PRI 78 RJ45 49 RS232 DTE 78 83 Safety Classification 109 USB 78 WAN 78 Power cord 16 outlet 24 supplies 16 supply 24 Power supply backup 24 uninterruptible 24 Preassigned features 14 PRI channels 55 Primary folder 93 94 Product support 9 Protective equipment 33 PSU 24 R Rack mounting 33 Rear connections 47 Rebooting the system 102 Reliable earthing 33 Remote administration 88 Remote password 88 Required tools 31 Requirements cable access 30 cable clearance 30 space 30 Restore 93 RFRFCC 21 RoHS 8 S Safety 29 SAP codes 24 SD card 18 89 90 91 administration 89 format 48 inserting 41 management 88 removal 48 Servicable equipment 9 Signal clock 94 Signoff 42 SIP trunk card 21 Slot availability 14 Slot numbering 49 SMDR 78 SOE Installation 97 Software level 23 Software upgrade 100 Space Requirements 30 SSA 75 97 Starting 41 Support 30 Support pillars 39 Supported phones 22 61 Surge protector 16 System administration 88 capacity 15 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Index change IP address 100 changes to 88 changing components 95 constraints 15 details of components 46 reboot 102 server 17 shutdown 101 status ap
137. 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial 6 followed by the target extension number 5 The current setting of the button will now be Call Pickup followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an call pickup button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either press Intercom 1 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Pickup and press Select 5 At the Endpoint prompt enter 6 followed by the target extension 6 The current setting of the button will now be Call Pickup followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu To use a Call pickup button 1 Lift your handset 2 Press the Call Pickup programmed button for the specified extension number You are connected to the call
138. 416 0 12009422 0 E207 E2 n207 709005 Line 5 1 0 0 12207 sr HH HH 0 Xfd Extn203 Mobile Twinned Call Answered Internally For this example user 203 has mobile twining enabled to the external number 9416 as twin Their mobile dial delay is set to 2 seconds The call is answered at the user s internal extension In this scenario the record for the external call part of twinning is output immediately the call is answered internally The Call Start for this record differs dues to the user s Mobile Dial Delay setting The External Targeting Cause indicates the external call was the result of user U mobile twinning MT settings If the call had been answered before the mobile dial delay expired no external call and therefore no record would be produced When the call is completed the second record is output x 4831 7 33 00 00 00 7 0 9418 9416 0 1000028 0 E203 E2 n203 79005 Line 5 1 0 0 rrrrrri r J MY Extn203 9416 16 17 58 00 00 07 9 207 0 203 203 1 1000027 0 E207 Extn207 E203 Extn203 0707 rrrrrrrrrrrrr PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 112 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Appendix SMDR SMDR Examples Mobile Twinned Call Answered at the Mobile Twin This is the same scenario as the example above except that the call is answered at the external mobile twinning destination Unlike the previous example the external call record has a non zero Call Time showing that
139. 42 1 2 Connect the LAN cable from the PC LAN port the LAN or LAN1 port on the IP Office control unit 3 Check that the orange LED lamp on the IP Office LAN port is on The green LED may also be flickering as it indicates traffic across the LAN connection 4 To test the connection before running Manager or System Status Application e Select Start Run and enter cmd e In the command window that appears enter ping 192 168 42 1 The results should show a number of ping replies from the IP Office This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office e f there are no ping replies enter ipconfig The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as required above If they do enter exit and check the cable connection Ringer volume may be too low Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding may be turned on Line Ringing may not be set to Immediate Telephone may be faulty switch telephones and try again If MLC 6 telephone is Unique Line Ringing 209 set to a pattern other than 1 Possible power outage unplug the modular telephone cord and replug The PARTNER Eurostyle phones generation 1 do not display some accented characters properly Is your system s clock correct Set system time and date Are you subscribed to Caller ID Is the line connected to a module that supports Caller ID Did someone activate Call Coverage If so their extension number will appear Is the telephone cord p
140. 5 1 Allowed LISts cccccccccesececeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeaes 28 2 5 2 Disallowed Lists cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 28 2 5 3 Emergency Number List ccccceeeesseeeeeeees 29 2 5 4 Account Code Entries cccceceeeeeeeeeseseeeeeees 30 2 6 Speed Dial Setpro EER 31 2 4 User SOWING S nenne era 33 2 8 Button PrograMmMing ccccsescecccseeeeeecseeeeseneeeeeseaeeess 34 2 8 1 Graphical Programming 22444 nee 36 2 8 2 Programming Features cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 2 8 3 System Programming Features 39 2 8 4 Line ASSIQGNMENL ccccseeceeceseeeeeceesseesseeeeeeeens 40 2 8 5 Printing Button Labels u 0044 nn 40 2 9 Manage HUNE Groups usa ee 42 2 10 Auto Attendant Setup 2200000s2nnennneneesnenennnnene 43 2 11 Aux liapz EgUlphient icc stoic seccgene a 45 211 1 Door PRONE 2 mar rare 45 2 11 2 MUsie ON Hold ea 46 2 11 3 SMD R edge 46 2 12 Contact Closure GrOUP uueeesnnnenssnennnnneeeeennnennennnnn 47 2 13 IrlIhKs unsre 48 2 13 1 ANal09 l hsar une a lock 48 2 192 PR TTURKSysere ee are 51 2 133 111 I hKsanas nalen 57 2 13 4 SIP Trunk Administration uuee 62 2 14 Additional Administration TaSskS ccccssseeeseeeeeeees 66 2 14 1 System License Managemert 66 2 14 2 User Advanced SettingS cccccccsccssseseeeeeees 67
141. 60W external power supply unit The PSU has an integral power cord for connection to the module s DC I P socket A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module Mounting The module is designed as a free standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office modules The module can be rack mounted in a 19 rack system using the optional IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 245mm 9 7 Height 71mm 2 8 Weight Unboxed 3 1Kg 6 94lbs Boxed 4 4Kg 9 7lbs Based on Phone 30 V2 IPO 500 Phone Connections A IF Office 500 RE Kt RE DZ If OTE EXPANSION REE 16 24W DE 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 24 DC 1 5 4 PHONE WE Ports eee DC I P DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module DTE 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only EXPANSION RJ 45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 59 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 PHONE front RJ45 sockets Used for connection of analog phones Intended for
142. 67 gt Settings Mobility Setup Remote Call Forwarding Covered under Users Setup 33 Twinning Mobile Twinning Users Setup 33 gt Music on hold Status Auxiliary 45 Equipment Name User Setup 33 Network time synchronization Advanced Parameters 70 Night Service Group Add remove extensions Group Management 27 gt Number of lines System Setup 26 Outgoing call restrictions User Setup 33 Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Button programming system feature Outside conferencing denial Advanced Parameters 70 gt Override Line Ringing Users Advanced 67 gt Settings User Setup Passwords Admin 24 Remote System Setup 26 Pickup Group Add remove extensions Group Management 27 gt PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 17 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Associated Task What I want to do Recall Timer duration Flash Pulse Width for Analog lines and Flash Hook Generation timer for T1 lines Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Trunks Setup 48 gt Schedule Each Line Trunks Advanced 5 Setup SIP Line type config Trunks Setup 48 SMDR reports Auxiliary 45 Equipment SMTP Advanced Parameters 70 gt Star Code delay Advanced Parameters 70 gt Switch Type Trunks PRI 51 gt System dial out password System System Setup 26 System Mode Common Area Can be changed from File 92 gt Menu System Name System Setup 26 System Speed D
143. 7 30 expiry 102 locked message 102 Administration additional tasks 66 analog trunks 48 compiling user lists 27 hide 23 page 15 PC 7 PRI channel 51 PRI trunks 51 show hide tasks 97 SIP trunk lines 62 system licenses 66 T1 trunks 57 tasks 22 tasks display 23 Advance view 97 Advanced options 88 Advanced parameters 53 55 56 59 60 64 67 Allowed calls 28 Allowed list 27 ALS Programming 34 Appearance ID 51 57 Application Monitor 11 Applications DVD 12 Assigning button features 36 handset 36 Auto attendant setup 43 Auto connect on startup 80 Auto reconnect 95 Auxiliary equipment setup 45 B Backup 72 Backup files on send 83 Broadcast IP address 81 Button programming 34 Buttons 34 C Cable RJ45 7 Call barring 86 89 coverage 67 diverts 46 features 37 splitting 46 Call by Call table 62 Caller ID 26 logging 26 Calling list 27 account code 30 allowed 28 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Index disallowed 28 emergency 29 Card base 84 commands 94 daughter 84 ETR6 92 memory 92 SD 22 72 84 88 90 92 100 SD formatting 94 SD recreate 94 select 100 shutdown 94 start 94 Change directory 81 mode 92 password 24 selecting 81 system components 73 system settings 26 TCP 78 working directory 81 Channel parameters 55 Channel setup 60 Close configuration 79 83 Close security settings 83 Common area 22 Configuration file 14 83 84
144. 8 O Operating systems 8 P Password administration 22 changing 22 default 21 remote access 22 system 22 Patch panel 24 PC requirements 8 Power application 20 Pre requirements 12 R Rack mounting 16 RAM 8 Recall 9 Remote access 22 RJ45 connector 13 S SAP code 13 Screen home 21 splash 20 22 SD card 13 18 21 SD card insertion 20 Servers 8 setup exe 8 Signoff 24 SIP trunk 9 Slot cover 19 Socket LAN 20 Software level 7 16 Splash screen 20 22 Start up 20 21 Station ports analog 9 Page 33 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Station ports digital 9 System checks 20 operating 8 telephone 24 T Technical bulletins 12 Telephone connection 12 install 24 stand 24 system 24 Temporary files 18 Tie wrap 24 Tools 12 19 Trunks SIP 9 U Unpacking 13 V Voicemail 9 18 W Welcome screen 21 Windows servers 8 Wrist strap 19 PARTNER Version Quick Install IP Office Essential Edition Page 34 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 35 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from pate
145. 9 is used for daughter card status trunk daughter cards The trunk daughter card then uses ports 9 to 12 on the e Red On Error Red Flash every base card for its trunk e Red Slow Flash Initializing 5 seconds connections Card okay Red Fast Flash e P500 Analog System Trunk Card shutdown Analog Trunk Daughter Card PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 50 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Base Cards e P500 PRI Trunk e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Trunk Daughter Card e Off No trunk present e Red Green Fast e Green on Trunk present Flash port 9 or e Green flashing Trunk in use Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor IPO 500 Extn Card Dgtl Sta 8 IP Office 500 Extension Card Digital Station 8 700417330 4 3 2 Analog Phone This card is used to add analog phone extension ports to the IP 500v2 control unit It is available in two variants providing either 2 or 8 analog extension ports e Supports Provides either 8 or 2 analog phone ports depending on card variant e Maximum per control unit 4 e 1P500 Daughter Card Support 1 Port Type Ports Features Port LEDs Analog Phrase IP500 ETR Port No status LEDs are used for ana
146. ARTNER Version Quick Install Manual e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator Tool Guide e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Programming and User Guide e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version ETR Telephone System Programming and User Guide e Individual User Guides for associated telephone instruments ETR 1400 3910 3920 IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the Avaya support website http support avaya com PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 7 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 1 1 How this book is structured This book contains seven chapters which provide information as follows Chapter 1 Introduction briefly details the installation procedure for Essential Edition PARTNER and provides standard Avaya information Chapter 2 System Overview describes the Essential Edition PARTNER system structure the system features modes of operation system capacities Chapter 3 Getting Started briefly describes where and how to mount equipment equipment checks and unpacking Chapter 4 Installing IP Office intended primarily for the technician expl
147. ARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 2 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Contents ITANA Charest din sacra een 88 Contents B18 Bil 06 3 2 VIEW MENU Eee ee 96 1 The Manager Application 8 2 1 Re EEE NEREEUENN 96 1 1 IHtOdUCLON Ener 7 322 TOO Terre e 96 tA rO BE ll a EEREBENE NED REDEN URLS RERRENRISORLDEUERE 8 3 2 3 Advance View 97 12122 COMO UNlk a 2er rien 9 3 2 4 Hide Admin Tasks 0000 0 97 1 2 Administration Software neesnnseeennsnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 11 925 TEIP SG Een end 97 1 3 Installing Manager u0044444eRRn nenne nnennne nennen 12 1 4 Preparing Manager 13 4 Managing Configuration Files 125 Starting Managers 14 4 1 Welcome Screen Options uussssssssnseeessnnenneneeenenn 100 1 6 Plome P age 2 Re 15 4 1 1 Offline Configuration uuuusneneneeeeeeneenn 100 1 7 How to use MaANnaGel cesccccccceesseeceeeeeeesseceeeeeaaeeess 16 4 1 2 Open Configuration ueessseseeeeeenneneneneeeeneennn 102 4 1 3 Read Configuration ccccccccccceeseeeseseseeeeeees 103 2 Administration Tasks 2 1 Using Administration Windows uuuneeeaeeeneeneenennnnnnn 23 5 Appendix SMDR 2 2 Admin Tasks DISplaya uses 23 9 1 SMDR Fields ana an ee 106 2 3 Remote Admin Password 22220022400000nn ee nnnne nennen 24 5 2 OMDR Exames eyun 109 2A SYSISIM SONGS essen 26 NJE sense entalten 115 25 Gallng ESS 2 ai 27 2
148. ARTNER Version should run the same level of core software Doing otherwise will lead to incorrect operation of the system PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Page 23 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Upgrading Upgrading is performed using the Upgrade Wizard tool within the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager application File Advanced Upgrade It displays the systems it can detect their existing software level and the levels it has available e Check IP Office Technical Bulletins Whenever upgrading check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletins for the various IP Office software releases involved before proceeding These may contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was completed Bulletins are available from http Support avaya com e Multi Stage Upgrades The upgrade path may require several intermediate upgrades Skipping an intermediate level may lead to incorrect system operation and configuration corruption Multi stage upgrades are only necessary for control units External expansion modules can be upgraded directly between any two levels supported by the module 2 13 Power Supplies Each control unit and expansion module has an internal power supply unit that requires a switched power outlet socket rated at 110 240V ac 50 60Hz Connection from that power outlet socket requires an appropriate locale specific power cord which is not supplied wit
149. Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 26 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Advanced Features Forwarding Calls 4 5 Call Coverage Call coverage is used to redirect all intercom transferred DID and outside calls on lines assigned to another extension When call coverage is in use covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings set by the system administrator e Intercom transferred DID and outside calls on lines assigned ownership can be covered e Group calls forwarded calls transfer return calls voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls Wake Up Service calls and calls to doorphone alert extensions are not covered e A single extension can cover multiple extensions however an extension programmed for call coverage can have only one covering extension Only one call coverage button can be programmed per extension e If you activate call coverage at your extension you still can intercept an outside call rerouted by coverage by pressing the outside line button that has the call appearance e You can program call coverage on a programmable button Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being covered When the green light is on your calls are being covered when the green light is off call coverage is not active e f call coverage and do not disturb are already on covered calls
150. Auto Attendant Setup This dialog is used to configure the auto attendant facilities provided by the phone system Auto Attendant Setup Greeting Times Configure Profiles Horning Name Maximum Inactivity Dial By Direct Number ll Afternoon Profile Afternoon Evening Evening Out of office hours Menu options Setup Auto Attendant Actions Action No Action Ho Action No Action No Action No Action Ho Action e Greeting Times Record greeting Destination The auto attendant can provide different greetings at different times of the day The greeting is always followed by the dialog options greeting These fields are used to set the time periods during which the different greetings are used If the time periods overlap the greeting used is the first one that is valid for the time period in the order morning afternoon or evening For call outside the configured time periods the out of office hours greeting is used e Configure Profiles These are the general settings for the auto attendant PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 43 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e Name Information only not editable e Maximum Inactivity Default 8 seconds Range 1 to 20 seconds This field sets how long after playing the prompts the auto attendant should wait for a valid key press If exceeded the caller is transferred to the operator extension 10 e Dial by Name
151. B Orange White White Green Tx A Blue White Tx B White Blue Green White White Brown Brown White OOE HIE e Supply PRI trunks cards are not supplied with these cables e Cable Color Red e Part number 700213440 e Standard Length 3m 9 10 4 9 11 RS232 DTE Port This port is found on the rear of the control unit and external expansion modules The DTE ports on external expansion modules are not used The RS232 DTE port on the control unit can be used for system maintenance and connection of serial terminal adaptors An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required to manage the serial data exchange Configure this for operation via a PC serial port as follows Bits per second 38 400 Parity None Flow Control None Data bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Settings Emulation TTY PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 83 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 DTE Cables These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance They can also be used for connection of RS232 serial terminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit This cable is a Straight through DB9 female to DB9 male serial cable a Il i i g IF Office OTE Port Ya D Type Plug Weters 6 57 Feet D Type Socket O Bo e AOON NU Receive data Transmit Data RTS Request To Se
152. C Administration IP Office Manager can be intimidating RAC card too problematic for GUI administration Licensing Minimal to no licensing Must be simple Reliability Dependability Quality Stable system with low maintenance Set it and forget it 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved I What is IP Office Essential Edition AVAYA PARTNER Version Familiar key system operation PARTNER ACS Desktop User Experience Program in less than 30 minutes Administration via PC GUI application Simplified Manager Telephone User Interface TUI gt Set and Forget installation with Out of the Box operation Key system functionality Line appearances Voice Mail coverage on all sets 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved 4 AVAYA This is Essential Edition PARTNER Version IP Office 500 V2 eK Pv Anaassse naian aaa aaa Alu Auunnann 1 EE tetedace EA FU A ST aaa _ cdrbddde Aunmuunn 1 EEE O aidian aaa EU a Saal aa Aunaassa COMBINATION CARD Max 2 per system PARTNER ETR 6 Max 3 per system Other Supported Cards Max 3 per system 6 ETR PHONES 2 PFT PORTS when ATM 4 daughter card is installed DS 8 Phone 2 Phone 8 6 DIGITAL PHONES 2 ANALOG PHONES 4 ANALOG TRUNKS 10 VCM CHANNELS Supported Expansions limit 1 per system Supported Daughter Cards PRI T1
153. C HFAI key create an auto dial other button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Program and either press Intercom 2 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Auto Dial Other and press Select 4 At the AD O prompt enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Function Press to insert Character Description Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer O R Send a hook switch flash signal 5 The current setting of the button will now be AD O followed by the stored number 6 To remove the current setting press Clear e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 29 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 4 7 Locking Your Extension You can use the lock feature to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from your extension while you are away from the extension To lock your extension 1 Press FEATURE 21 2 Dial a four digit code using the 0 to 9 numbers 3 Redial the four digit code To unlock your extension 1
154. Channel 100 2 T9002 Line 2 1 0 0 Conference Using Conference Button In this example an extension user answers a call and then brings in another user by using the Conference button on their phone Again we see records for the initial call the conference proposal call and then for the 3 parties in the conference that is created 2008 07 09 15 05 41 00 00 04 3 203 0 201 201 1 1000009 1 E203 Extn203 E201 Extn201 0 0 2008 07 09 15205 26 00 00 095 3 207 0 203 203 171000008 1 E207 Extn207 E203 Extnz203 10 0 2008 07 09 15 05 41 00 00 08 0 O r 1 1000009 0 E201 Extn201 V11001 CO Channel 100 1 0 0 2008 07 09 15 05 50 00 00 10 0 203 0 201 201 1 1000010 0 E203 Extn203 Vv11002 CO Channel 100 2 0 0 2008 07 09 15 05 26 00 00 10 0 207 0 203 203 1 1000008 0 E207 Extn207 V11003 CO Channel 100 3 0 0 Adding a Party to a Conference This example is a variant on that above Having started a conference extension 203 adds another party 2008 07 09 15 08 31 00 00 03 3 203 0 201 201 1 1000014 1 E203 Extn203 E201 Extn201 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 02 00 00 22 6 207 0 203 203 1 1000013 1 E207 Extn207 E203 Extn203 9 0 2008 07 09 15 08 45 00 00 02 4 203 0 403 403 0 1000016 1 E203 Extn203 E403 Libby Franks 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 02 00 00 24 0 207 0 203 203 1 1000013 0 E207 Extn207 V11003 CO Channel 100 3 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 39 00 00 17 0 203 0 201 201 1 1000015 0 E203 Extn203 V11002 CO Channel 100 2 8 0 2008 07 09 15 08 31 00 00 26 0 O r 1 10000
155. D on each module flashing red The process is completed when the LED changes to steady green The LEDs on the rear of the control unit go through the following sequence during a normal start up Note that the times are approximately only 10s Finished System SD m Optional SD If present On the front of the control unit LED1 on any IP500 base cards fitted is used as follows LED9 is also used for any trunk daughter cards fitted LED1 LED9 Checking the LEDs Control Unit LEDs LED Description Optional SD System SD Green on OK Flashing Green reading or writing Red card not inserted correctly or missing e Alternate red green Starting up e Red on No software e Green on Okay e Flashing Red Error Shutdown Base Card LEDs Base Card LEDs 1 to 8 Usage e LED1 is used for base card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card okay e Red Slow Flash Initializing e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IP500 Analog Phone No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions I P500 Digital Station e Green On Phone detected PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 28 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Troubleshooting Base Card LEDs 1 to 8 Usage IP500 VCM e LEDs 1 to 8 are unlabelled They are used to indicate voice compression channel usage Each LED lit represents 12 5 of the available voice compression channel capacity in use total card capacity rather than
156. DP support e SIP Trunk Channel Setup PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 62 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks Channel Set by the system Shown for information only Appearance Appearance ID numbers can be assigned to each channel supported in order to allow that channel or line to be associated with a Line Appearance button on phones that support button programming Direction Default Both Directions Sets the allowed direction of operation of the line Incoming Outgoing or Both Directions Display Name Default Use Authentication Name This field sets the Name value for SIP calls using this URI The value can either be entered manually or the options Use Authentication Name or Use Internal Data selected Local URI The user part of the SIP URI This specifies the contents of the From field when making a call sending an INVITE Password Password needed for connections to data services such as the Internet Anonymous Checkbox allows anonymous Internet access Coverage Destination lt lt gt gt e Call by Call Table Local URI The user part of the SIP URI Password Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP Display Name Default Use Authentication Name This field sets the Name value for SIP calls using this URI The value can either be entered manually or the options Use Authentication Name or Use Internal Data s
157. Device eet Name Internal Number E lt extension number gt lt name gt o O Voicemail _V lt 9500 channel number gt VM Channel lt channelnumber gt sis Conference V lt 1 gt lt conference number gt lt channel CO Channel lt conference number channel number gt number gt Line T lt 9000 line number gt Line lt line number gt lt channel if applicable gt OOO o E number gt U lt device class gt lt device number gt lt device channel gt 13 Party1Name The name of the device for an extension or agent this is the user name 14 Party2Device The other party for the SMDR record of this call segment See Partyl1Device above 15 Party2Name The other party for the SMDR record of this call segment See PartylName above PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 107 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 16 Hold Time The amount of time in seconds the call has been held during this call segment 17 Park Time The amount of time in seconds the call has been parked during this call segment 18 AuthValid This field is used for authorization codes This field shows 1 for valid authorization or O for invalid authorization 19 AuthCode This field shows either the authorization code used or n a if no authorization code was used 20 User Charged This and the following fields are used for ISDN Advice of Charge AoC The user to which the call charge has been assigned This is not necessarily the use
158. ER Version systems support a variety of Avaya digital and wireless phones plus analog phones 2 4 Control Unit The base item of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is the system server or control unit It stores the system configuration and controls system operation Essential Edition PARTNER Version uses the IP Office 500v2 R6 0 control unit or above A control unit can be customized by adding various internal cards such as trunk cards external expansion modules can be also be connected to add additional extension and trunk ports The IP Office 500v2 control unit has four front slots for IP Office 500 base cards It has an internal power supply unit and uses a mandatory dongle in the form of an SD Card plugged into a rear panel slot It includes a 2 port ethernet LAN switch layer 3 managed on the rear The following table summarizes the capacities of the control unit supported by Essential Edition PARTNER software PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 17 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Control Unit Digital Station Ports Up to 30 Control Unit Analog Phone Ports Up to 26 Control Unit ETR Phone Ports 18 Embedded Voicemail Card af Integral WAN Port Not used External Expansion Ports 1 Audio In MOH Port Ti External O P Switch Port Ti Conference Parties 10 pasinaon Exelon capacity U Digital Phones only 46 Analog Phones only 42 ETR Phones only 18
159. Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Appendices Safety Statements 6 3 Regulatory Instructions for Use 6 3 1 Canada This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment NOTICE The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 1 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five 6 3 2 FCC Notification This equipment is registered with the ACTA Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments in accordance with FCC Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following e Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack Connection to 1 544 MBps digital facilities must be through a USOC RJ 48C Connection to the Analog Trunk facilities must be through a USOC RJ 45S e Notificatio
160. HCP client could be used this is not recommended for performing more advanced functions such as firmware upgrades To test the connection before running Manager or System Status Application a Select Start Run and enter cmd b In the command window that appears enter ping 192 168 42 1 The results should show a number of ping replies from the Essential Edition PARTNER Version This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the control unit c If there are no ping replies enter ipconfig The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as required above d issue the command exit and check the cable connection 1 5 Starting Manager You can start the Manager application by double clicking the Manager icon in your desktop 24 Alternatively start the application manually 2 5 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager 2 f the PC has firewall software installed you may be prompted as to whether you want to allow this program to access the network Select Yes or OK 3 When the manager application starts it briefly displays the Avaya application splash screen and then presents the welcome screen ai Avaya IP Office R Manager E ER File Edit View Help WELCOME to IP Office Administration What would you like to do Create an Offline Configuration Open Configuration from System Read a Configuration from Eile Welcome Screen PARTNER Version Administration Tool User
161. Information only not editable e Number Information only not editable e Ring Mode Information only not editable The ring mode of a group sets the order in which members of the group are used e Sequential The available group members are alerted one at a time in Sequence starting from the lowest numbered pickup group extension number to the highest Ringing calls are picked up in oldest first order e Ring All All the available group members are alerted at the same time PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 42 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Manage Hunt Groups e Assign Users to Group This table is used to select which extension users are members of the group Changing the name of a hunt group has the following effects e Anew empty mailbox is created on voicemail with the new hunt group name e Entries in other groups Overflow lists will be updated e Out of Service and Night Service fallback references are updated Modifying the extension number of a hunt group updates the following e Group buttons e Overflow Out of Service Fallback and Night Service Fallback group entries e Incoming call route entries When a hunt group is deleted all references to the deleted group will be removed including e Entry in Incoming call routing table e Transfer target in internal auto attendant e Overflow Night Service or Fallback Service on other groups 2 10
162. Installation and Reference Manual Page 43 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 4 System Component Details PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 45 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 System Component Details This section contains detailed descriptions of each of the component parts of Essential Edition PARTNER Version 4 1 Control Unit The base item of the IP Office system is the system server or control unit It stores the system configuration and controls system operation The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system uses the IP Office 500v2 model R6 0 control unit A control unit can be customized by adding various internal cards such as trunk cards An external expansion module can be also be connected The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right They can be used in any order However if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled The unit must not be used with uncovered slots Fon Kann UT TU Maximum Up to 48 extension ports of which there may be a maximum of 18 ETR ports Extensions Conference 10 as standard with no silence suppression Parties Trunks Cards Any combination of IP Office 500trunk daughter cards and up to 2 IP400 trunk cards Voicemail Maximum 2 expandable to 6 subject to available licenses Channels Software Level e P Office core software level 6 0 minim
163. Office trunk card provides a fixed number of trunk ports For digital trunks each trunk provides a set number of digital channels In cases where the number of trunks connected to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version is lower or the number of channels provided is lower those unused trunks and channel must be disabled e h Failure to do this will cause problems with outgoing calls For example on a system with an ATM4 trunk card fitted but only two analog trunks actually connected failure to disable the other two trunks within the Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration will cause 50 of outgoing call attempts to fail Objective Remove unused trunks and channels from the telephone system configuration Refer to the IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Tool Manager User Guide 5 5 Changing Components Base cards and external expansions modules must only be removed and added to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system when that system is switched off In the sections below the term component can refer to a card fitted into the control unit or an external expansion module L Note that for extension ports by default both an extension entry and a user entry will exist in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration Extension entries can be deleted without deleting the corresponding user entry This allows retention of the user settings and association of the user with a different
164. P Office users since the last overnight backup or the last system shutdown 5 3 6 1 Backup the System Primary Folder System SD This process copies the contents of the backup folder on the System SD card over the primary folder Any files with matching file names will be replaced system fonmary backup yrmaill fdynamic temp Feature Key Backing up the primary folder to the backup folder using Manager 1 Using Manager main menu select File Advanced Embedded File Management 2 From the Select IP Office dialog tick the box beside the IP Office system you want to work with 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Backup System Files 5 The contents of the primary folder on the System SD card will be copied to the backup folder 5 3 6 2 Restore from the System Backup Folder System SD This process copies the contents of the backup folder on the System SD card over the primary folder Any files with matching file names will be replaced system fonmary backup yrmaill fdynamic temp Feature Key To make the restored files active the IP Office system then needs to be restarted using a reboot Restoring the system backup folder to the primary using Manager 1 Using Manager main menu select File Advanced Embedded File Management 2 From the Select IP Office dialog tick the box beside the IP Office system you want to work with 3 The file conte
165. P Office 500 ETR6 base card Any phones connected to these ports should be clearly labeled as power fail extensions in accordance with the appropriate national and local regulatory requirements PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 81 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 GE CE 2 EEE Rds Not used Pin 2 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor Not used 1 2 3 4 Ring 5 Tip 6 Pin 6 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor 7 Not used 8 Not used e Minimum Wire Size AWG 26 e Maximum Cable Length e AWG26 500m 1640 e AWG24 AWG22 1000m 3280 4 9 9 Phone POT Port These ports are analog extension ports On expansion modules they can be connected to out of building extensions If this is the case connection must be made via suitable protective devices IP Office Barrier Box at each end and via each building primary protection In addition the Phone module must be connected to a protective ground h PHONE ports on Essential Edition PARTNER Version control units must not be connected to out of building extensions mos i ji pannin R l45 1 Not used 2 Not used p aml 3 Not used D l 4 Ring 5 Tip 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 Not used e REN 2 e Off Hook Current 25mA e Ring Voltage 40V rms e Minimum Wire Size AWG 26 e Maximum Cable Length e AWG26 0 5km 1640 feet e AWG24 AWG22 1km 3280 feet Except on som
166. PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version Why is Avaya announcing EoS on PARTNER ACS IP Office Release 6 0 introduced the IP PARTNER Version which was designed to create the PARTNER experience for both Avaya Partners and customers alike IP PARTNER Version emulates key features of PARTNER ACS including Key and Lamp audible and visual feedback conference hold and transfer functions Additionally with the ETR6 Card PARTNER ETR telephones can be used with the system What s NEW Auto Attendant Voice Mail Multiple Automated Attendands and Sub Menus Up to 9 Automated Attendants and or sub menus are now available Different Selector Codes based on Time Profile Each Auto Attendant can have its own unique Morning Afternoon Evening Out of Hours greeting and different Selector Codes based on time profiles Direct Inward Dial DID to Auto Attendant Support DID calls can now be routed to and answered by their own Auto Attendant Emergency Greeting Each Auto Attendant supports an Emergency Greeting that can be remotely recorded activated or deactivated via Manager or Telephone e g weather closures emergencies etc Phantom Mailboxes All 48 mailboxes in the Embedded Messaging cna be used without the need for physical station ports Voice Mail User Enhancements Bypass Greeting you can press 1 to bypass the mailbox greeting End of Recording Options pressing at the end of your message will provide the
167. PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 90 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration SD Card Actions e License merge Fixed System Files only exist in two Dynamic system files only exist in one directories system primary and directory system dynamic and are system backup Some fixed system files usually dynamically named They have must be specifically named They have the the system file attribute set to reduce system and read only file attributes set to inadvertent deletion reduce inadvertent deletion modification Non system files can be any type including copies of any of the above it is the directory and name that determine the type of file 5 3 3 Booting from the SD Cards During power up Essential Edition PARTNER Version looks for valid System SD Option al SD firmware to load into memory in the following order system system 1 System SD card primary folder Tiiprimany primary 2 System SD card backup folder Pa Vbackup 3 Optional SD card primary folder imail 4 Optional SD card backup folder dynamic dynamic 5 BootP request to IP Office Manager I temp temp Feature Key The control unit can be forced to bypass the primary folder by pressing the Aux switch on the rear panel when applying power to the control unit 5 3 4 SD Card Removal Before a memory card is removed from an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system that is running t
168. Password Change Password New Password 4 Make required changes and click OK wy Remember you are changing the password for accessing the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system to which you are attached not the manager application Change System Password The system password is used before changes may be made to deactivate the night service or override dialing restrictions Once Essential Edition PARTNER Version is installed the responsibility for setting this password rests with the customer You should point this fact out and if required make the change using manager before you leave as follows Change using Manager 1 Click the hot link Change System Settings 2 In the System Parameters box change system password Field accepts digits only PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 23 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Customer s administrator using a telephone handset 1 Dial 403 2 Dial four chosen digits to set the password 3 7 Connecting the System If the site already has a patch panel for all outside lines and extensions you should be able to use the existing wiring to install the system hardware and connect telephones to the system yourself During control unit startup e Extensions and Users A user is automatically created for each physical extension port detected in the system Users are assigned extension numbers starting from 201 User names take the form Extn201 Extn202 e
169. Pick up the handset you are connected to the incoming call If more than one line is ringing you are connected to the line that has been ringing for the longest time e To answer a specific line press the button for that line e On 1400 Series phones the press gt gt to display additional options e To VM can be used to send the ringing call to voicemail immediately e Ignore can be used to quite the ringer To answer a Call ringing at another extension call pickup 1 Pick up the handset 2 Press an INTERCOM button and dial 6 followed by the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked PARTNER User Guide Page 17 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 3 3 Using Handsfree The ETR 6D ETR 18D ETR 34D telephones each have a speaker and microphone which you can turn on by pressing SPKR The 1408 and 1416 telephones also each have a speaker and microphone which you can turn on by pressing SPEAKER e In addition on the ETR 6D ETR 16D and ETR 34D telephones you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing MIC HFAI When the green light next to MIC HFAI is on the microphone is on e The 1403 telephones has a speaker but no microphone This allows it to hear page calls and hear the progress of a call when making a call However to handset must be used to speak on a call Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your Sp
170. Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor IPO 500v2 EXTN CARD ETR6 IP Office 500v2 EXTN CARD ETR6 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition 700476039 Page 53 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 3 4 ATM Combination Card This card is used to add a combination of ports to the IP 500v2 control unit e Supports e 6 Digital Station ports e 2 Analog Extension ports e 4 Analog Trunk ports e 10 VCM channels e Maximum per Control Unit 2 e 1P500 Daughter Card Support 1 The trunk daughter card is pre installed and cannot be replaced with another card type Port Type Ports Features Port LEDs Digital Station Phrase IP500 Analog e Green On Phone detected PortsProvides DS e LED1 is used for base card status ports for digital stations except 4406D 4412D and e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 4424D e Red Slow Flash Initializing ae Card okay e Red Fast Flash System shutdown Analog 7 to 8 Phrase IP500 ETR No status LEDs are used for analog phone extensions Extension PortSupports ICLID modes DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 REN 2 1 for external bell device Off Hook current 25mA Ring Voltage 40V Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing Capacitor For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing Capacitors During powe
171. R Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 101 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 4 1 2 Open Configuration Manager can load a previously saved configuration file on the PC The initial address ranges in which Manager searches for IP Office systems are set through the Manager preferences File Preferences Discovery 81 The security mechanism used for configuration transfer between Manager and an IP Office are set through the Secure Communications attribute of Manager preferences File Preferences Security 83 gt 1 Click kd in the main toolbar or select File Open Configuration from the menu bar 2 The Select IP Office window appears listing those IP Office systems that responded The list can be sorted by clicking on the Name column header Select IP Office Name IP Address Type version Release 6 0 C 00E00705219A 192 168 42 1 IPSOo v2 6 011014 TCP Discovery Progress ey Unit Brosdcast Address e If the system required is not found the address used for the search can be changed Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search e Known Units is not available unless configured e If Manager has been configured to Use DNS the Unit Broadcast Address field is replaced by a Enter Unit DNS Name or IP Address field See File Preferences Discovery 81 for more details 3 When the required system is displayed
172. R Version configuration Extension entries can be deleted without deleting the corresponding user entry This allows retention of the user settings and association of the user with a different extension by changing the extensions Base Extension number to match the user s Extension ID Like for Like Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type no configuration changes are necessary 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 4 Restart the IP Office system Higher Capacity Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type but higher capacity when restarted the IP Office will automatically create configuration entries for the new trunks or extensions users 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 73 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 4 Restart the IP Office system 5 Use Ma
173. RAE remote Access service eeu conferenced SSSCSCS S TP frranster proposal consultation cal SOS xea Transen a 3 29 External Targeter Id The associated name of the targeter indicated in the External Targeting Cause field For hunt groups and users this will be their name in the IP Office configuration For an Incoming Call Route this will be the Tag if set otherwise ICR 30 External Targeted Number This field is used for forwarded Incoming Call Route targeted and mobile twin calls to an external line It shows the external number called by the IP Office as a result of the off switch targeting where as other called fields give the original number dialled PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 108 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Appendix SMDR SMDR Examples 5 2 SMDR Examples The following are examples of IP Office SMDR records for common call scenarios Basic Examples Lost incoming Call In this record the Call duration is zero and the Continuation field is 0 indicating that the call was never connected The Ring Time shows that it rang for 9 seconds before ending 2008 06 28 09 28 41 00 00 00 9 8004206 1 4324 4324 0 1000014155 0 E4324 Joe Bloggs T9161 LINE 5 1 0 0 Call Answered by Voicemail In this example 215 has made a call to 211 However the Party2Device and Party2Name show that the call was answered by voicemail 2008 10 20 06 43 58 00 00210 21 215 0 211 21
174. RI UNI v oh Phone 2 None w 2 In the dialog that is displayed select the PARTNER Configuration box to specify a configuration for a PARTNER Version system 3 Locale and Extension Number Length fields are fixed values for Essential Edition PARTNER Version and are grayed out 4 Inthe Select Extension and Daughter Cards section select the cards that match those in the system to which the configuration will be loaded Only cards supported by systems running in Partner Version mode are shown I P500 Base Cards I P500 Daughter Cards Expansion Modules e Digital Station 8 Max 3 e ATM4 Uni e Digital Station 16 Phone 2 e PRI 1 Uni Max 1 e Phone 16 Phone 8 ETR6 Max 3 Combination Card ATM4 5 Use the Expansion Modules box to select the expansion module if there is one attached to the system to which the configuration will be loaded 6 When the hardware selection is as required click OK 7 The configuration is now created and loaded into Manager for editing 8 When completed e To save the file locally select File Save Configuration as e To send the configuration to a system select File Offline Send Config 3 1 6 2 Open File This command is used to fetch an offline configuration file not from the control unit from its location and load it into Manager memory The Open configuration file dialog enables you to browse your local network for a configuration file to load into Manager memory PAR
175. S or ETR ports base card fitted This is because in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version extensions 10 and 11 ports 1 and 2 must support digital supervisor telephones e Up to 2 Combination cards each provides 6 DS ports 2 POTS station ports 4 POTS line ports and supports up to 10 SIP lines e Up to 3 ETR6 cards each provides 6 ETR station ports e Up to 3 DS8 cards each provides 8 digital station ports e Up to 3 Phone 8 cards each provides 8 POTS station ports o Maximum of 3 because a combination card DS 8 or ETR 6 must be present in system e Up to 3 Phone 2 cards each provides up to 2 POTS station ports o Maximum of 3 because a combination card DS 8 or ETR 6 must be present in system An ATM4 daughter card can be added to any ETR6 card or DS card or Phone card increasing POTS line capacity 1 PRI T1 daughter card may be added to any ETR6 card or DS card or Phone card increasing digital line capacity One expansion module may be added to the main control unit providing additional growth capability The supported expansion modules are e DS16 Expansion Module adds 16 additional digital station ports e Phone 16 Expansion Module adds 16 additional analog station ports Based on these configurations an Essential Edition PARTNER Version may support up to 56 lines 1 PRI 3 ATM4 up to 10 SIP trunks and up to 48 stations Up to 18 ETR stations and or 46 digital ports 2 POTS Maximum growth capabilities are softwar
176. Saved messages To reply to a voice message 1 While you listen to a message press If a caller ID was received when the message was left a call will be placed on that number PARTNER User Guide Page 45 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 5 9 Voicemail Email You can have notification of new messages sent to your email address The notification can be a simple alert to tell you that you have a message or a copy of the voicemail message if required In order to use this feature your system administrator must configure your phone system to use email and enter your email address into the system configuration If this has not been done your will hear Email is not enabled on this mailbox whenever you try to use an email option Login oli Forward All to E mail o 2 Send Email Alerts 0 3 Turn Email Mode Off To switch on email notification You can set up your mailbox so that any messages received in future are forwarded to your email address The messages are not stored in your voicemail mailbox 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Select the required type of email notification e For a email alert press 02 e To have the message forwarded to your email press O1 To forward a message to email If you are listening to a message you can send the message to your email either whilst listening to it or immediately after it has been played 1 During or immediately after playing a message press 6
177. System Status Application Supports the System Monitor Application TAPI SMDR Supports DS16 Expansion Module adds 16 additional digital station ports and Phonel6 Expansion Module adds 16 additional analog station ports 10 party conferencing Supports loudspeaker connectivity via a combination card or one of the 2 built in POTS port on other cards Includes 3 instances of SIP and Mobility Call handling mode will change from key to PBX operation following features are pre assigned Last Number Redial Drop Recall CO hook flash Auto Line Selection L1 L2 etc Voice Mail Access Each extension has voice mailbox assigned with Automatic Voice Mail Coverage turned on Control unit slot availability maximum of 4 of the following cards Up to 2 Combination cards each provides 6 DS ports 2 POTS station ports 4 POTS line ports and 10 VCM channels Supports up to 10 SIP lines Up to 3 Essential Edition PARTNER Version ETR6 cards each provides 6 ETR station ports Up to 3 DS8 cards each provides 8 digital station ports Up to 3 Phone 8 cards each provides 8 POTS station ports Maximum of 3 since a Combination card DS 8 or ETR 6 must be present in system Up to 3 Phone 2 cards each provides up to 2 POTS station ports Maximum of 3 since a Combination card DS 8 or ETR 6 must be present in system An ATM4 daughter card can be added to any ETR6 card or DS card or Phone card increasing POTS line capacity up to
178. TNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 85 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 h This menu command is only available when Manager is not connected to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Open configuration file Look in O A 22 m 00E00705219A cfg 4 kal bin cfg My Recent Ej Sysktem5 cfg Documents O LYMGreeting _L MSound Memory ards J nl NL C PhoneImages Desktop My Documents ig WwirtePVPCH ost m a File name bly Network Files of type Cancel The example illustrated above shows three configuration files to choose from 3 1 6 3 Send Config Send Config This command is used to send an offline configuration to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system The first steps of the process depend on whether you are sending a configuration received from the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system or sending one opened offline created new h This menu command is only available when Manager is not connected to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Select File Offline Send Config from the menu bar PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 86 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu 1 The Send Configuration dialog is displayed send Configuration iz x IP Office Settings OOEOU 052194 Configuration Reboot Mode E Merge Immediate O When Free Ti
179. The 1403 IP telephone puts convenient features and capabilities at your fingertips including a Conference Transfer Hold and Redial button and a menu of options and settings to customize your phone Not all features described in this user guide may be available on your telephone If you find that a feature is not available contact your system administrator Interc Intere Line A ct et COMPORENCE TRANSFER 2 i MEDAL Dior Name Description Message Waiting An illuminated red light in the upper right corner of your phone indicates you have voicemail Indicator messages waiting If Visual Alerting is enabled this light flashes when you receive an incoming call Avaya Menu Press the A button to access the Avaya menu Press the A button twice to exit the Avaya menu The Avaya menu provides options that allow you to customize phone settings select the display language view network information and log out Press Redial to dial the last number you dialed Hold Press Hold to put the active call on hold Press Conference to add another party to an existing call PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 62 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Telephones Name Description Press Transfer to transfer a call to another number Press Drop to drop the active call While on a conference call press Drop to drop the last person added to the conference call Volume Pr
180. The administration password can only be changed by an administrator 2 System password This password is a four digit password that must be entered at a handset to make changes to local settings such as call barring night service and other dialling restrictions h WARNING Password Change Required New Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems use default security settings These settings must be changed to make the system secure As a minimum you must change the default Remote Administrator Password Failure to do so will render the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system potentially unsecured 1 Start Manager PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 22 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Installation Changing Password Ua Avaya IP Office Rb Manager File Edit View Help Welcome to IP Office Essential Y hat would you like to do Please rev Change Remote Administration Password Hardwar Control Change system Settings Interna Create Calling Lists Expan u Feature Administer Speed Dial Berit Change Remote Administrator Password 2 From the Manager home page select Change Remote Administration Password A log in dialog is displayed Configuration Service User Login IP Office QOEOOFOS219 4 IP 500 WE Service User Name administrator 3 Provide login detail and enter Administrator case sensitive as your default password The change dialog is displayed Change
181. Type of Analog trunk is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 48 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks Trunks Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Card Module Number of Channels Analog Trunk Analog Trunk Analog Trunk Analog Trunk Advanced setup Analogue Trunk Setup Line 4ppearance ID Hold Disconnect Time ROD ul Coverage Destination None Ring Pattern 1 ka Clicking on Advanced Setup 4 when an Analog Trunk line type is selected in the list accesses a dialog of additional settings e Analog Trunk Setup e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned Range 2 to 9 digits Used for configuring Line Appearances with button programming The line appearance ID must be unique and not match any extension number e Hold Disconnect Time Default 500ms Also know as Disconnect Clear or Reliable Disconnect This is a method used by the analog line provider to Signal that the call has ended e Coverage Destination Default None If set to None calls on the channel only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the channels Appearance ID Alternatively a specific extension hunt group calling group or the auto attendant can be selected to also receive call alerting for incoming calls on the channel
182. U key is used to access a range of phone settings for your 1400 Series phone LBrighiness TContrast l tPersonal Ringing l l TButon Clicks E SS ee a TError Tones D Screen Sounds gegangen ee Fall Settings A Menu Screen sounds LBrighiness tAdvanced Select Exit L a a Ee AE Menu Top EE ee Screen Sounds ass ass 1 Select Exit Visual Alerting On TAudible Alerting On EEE ee EN ear eare en On tAudio Path Speaker Menu Call Settings 1 isual Alerting Select tSelf Test FTAudio tLanguage A Menu Advanced Er Se Select Options that are greyed out in the diagram above are not accessible or used 8 1 A Menu Auto Exit 4 Menu Erase Contacts Erase Cancel JHandset AGC Off THeadset AGC On TSpeaker AGC On tSpeaker Open or tHeadset Xmit NR On FHeadset Rev Loud OF THeadset CC CMT FHandset mit MR Of A Menu Audio Gain Handset AGC Ondo tf TL English u Tt Frangais tEspanol Menu Language English a Select The Show Phone Screen option only applies to the A menu screens accessed when you press the key If the option is on if you receive a call while in the A menu the phone will automatically exit the menus and display the call details 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the opt
183. VMS Cover e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 44 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Using Voicemail Voicemail Coverage On Off 5 7 Forwarding a Message You can forward a message to a different mailbox or to several mailboxes at the same time When you forward a message you can record your own comment to the start of the message Login New messages playe DINE Forward message E e hac no H H Send 1 Old messages 3 Prepend message lt tone gt record comment Saved messages To forward a message 1 When you are listening to a message press 6 e To forward the message without adding a comment press 2 e To forward the message after adding a comment at the start press 3 Record your comment after the tone Record your comment and press to finish recording 2 Enter the extension number to which you want to forward the message and press e If you want to send the message to more than one mailbox enter each mailbox extension number separated by a 3 Press to finish addressing and forward the message 5 8 Calling a Message Sender You can call the person who left a message in your mailbox Both internal and external callers can be called back For external callers you can only reply if their caller ID was available when the message was left Login Hew messages played Return call 1 Old messages
184. a copy of a configuration is sent to an IP Office system a backup copy is saved in Manager s working directory 81 The file is saved using the system name date and a version number followed by the Backup File Extension as set below This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Backup File Extension Default BAK Sets the file extension to use for backup copies of system configurations generated by the Backup Files on Send option above e Number of Backup Files to keep Default 10 This option allows the number of backup files kept for each system to be limited If set to a value other then Unlimited when that limit would be exceeded the file with the oldest backup file is time and date stamp is deleted PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 83 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e Enable Application Idle Timer 5 minutes Default Off When enabled no keyboard or mouse activity for 5 minutes will cause the Manager to grey out the application and re request the current service user password This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Secure Communications Default Off When selected any service communication from Manager to IP Office uses the TLS protocol Th
185. a may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues System Status Application has been added to provide more easily interpreted information than is provided by Monitor e Two versions of Monitor are included in the IP Office Admin applications suite one for current IP Office systems and one for pre R4 0 IP Office systems Care Should be taken to ensure that the correct version is used when monitoring DVD IP Office Applications DVD Languages English only License x No license required PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements RAM OMB Pentium Pm eomz zamo Amons 650m7 Operating System Support Server os TO Gientos PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 11 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Component Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office System Monitor Monitor sysmonitor exe UDP 50794 The Manager application software is on the IP Office Applications DVD which contains a number of applications for IP Office installers and maintainers Requirements e IP Office Applications DVD Alternatively the IP Office Administrator Applications suite can be downloaded from Avaya s support website http Support avaya com e Windows PC This should preferably be a laptop to the specification below These are the minimum requirements for IP Office Manager If other applications are to be installed on the PC then their individual requirements should also be meet
186. aa td The 1416 phone supports button modules which provided the phone with additional programmable buttons The number of button modules supported per phone and per system are as follow e DBM32 1416 Up to 32 DBM32s supported 32 buttons each up to 1024 buttons The maximum combined number of buttons per system is 512 regardless of whether the buttons are programmed or not This add on provides an additional 32 twin LED programmable buttons for 1416 phones The BM32 does not require its own power supply connection instead it draws power from the phone to which it is connected Up to a maximum of 16 BM32 units are supported on the whole IP Office system BM32 BUTTON MODULE 1600 SERIES BM32 CABLE REPLACEMENT 1600 SERIES BM32 BOND BRIDGE REPLACEMENT 1616 BM32 PLASTIC LABEL COVERS 20 REPLACEMENT 1600 SERIES BM32 FLIP STAND REPLACEMENT Paper Labels 1616 BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS 8 5 x 11 1616 BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS A4 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Only two BM32 units can be connected in a chain from a single 1416 Up to three 1416 telephones with BM32s are supported i e 6 BM32s To support a BM32 the phone must be powered by an individual 1600 Series Power Adapter The BM32 buttons cannot be used for appearance functions such as call and line appearances Item Part number
187. able buttons at the bottom Feature Dial Summary GE a 6 Answer the A waiting call ringing at an extension lt Extension Number gt Group Pickup Intercom 66 Answer the longest waiting call ringing any extension that is lt Pickup Group gt a member of the pickup group 1 to 4 selected Direct Line Pickup Intercom 8 Seize the specified line if it is idle and then make a call Idle Line lt Line Number gt using that line Direct Line Pickup Intercom 68 Answer or seize the call on the specified line Active Line lt Line Number gt Loudspeaker Paging Intercom 70 Page the loudspeaker device attached to the system Simultaneous Paging Intercom 70 Page both the loudspeaker device attached to the system and the extensions in calling group 71 Group Calling Intercom 7 Call the available extensions in one of the calling groups 1 Ring lt Calling Group gt to 4 Group Calling Intercom 7 Page the available extensions in one of the calling groups 1 Page lt Calling Group gt to 4 Group Hunting Intercom 77 Call the available extensions in one of the hunt groups 1 to Ring lt Hunt Group gt 6 Group Hunting Intercom 77 Page the first available extension in one of the hunt groups Voice Signal lt Hunt Group gt 1 to 6 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 22 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features Feature and Intercom Codes Using Feature Codes There are a wide range of
188. aboration Automated Attendant Customize caller greetings so key clients receive a personal message and are routed directly to the most appropriate person or team Dial By Name Callers can easily identify who they want to connect with by simply spelling that person s name on their phone keypad Choose your connection Essential Edition PARTNER Version supports analog lines PRI T1 and newer IP base technologies such as SIP Session Initiation Protocol trunking which can provide significant cost savings Benefits e Better customer service Through touch tone prompts quickly route customers to the right department for fast personalized customer experiences e Lower costs Select the connection technology that best suits your business including Internet Protocol based solutions such as SIP trunking that can save as much as 50 off monthly calling fees results vary by area and service provider e Investment protection invest in IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version now and know that you ll have a communications solution that will grow with you in capacities and capabilities as your business takes off Specifications Format Secure Digital SD Care System Requirements e IP Office 500 system User Requirements e Supports 48 telephones Analog 1400 Series Digital PARTNER ETR multi line wireless Feature Detail e 56 Trunk capacity Analog T1 PRI SIP Key system oper
189. access to and maintenance of any other equipment in the area PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 29 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e Where ventilation holes are present on any of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version units those holes should not be covered or blocked e The surface must be flat horizontal for free standing or rack mounted installations i Wall Mounting In additional to the requirements above the following are applicable to Essential Edition PARTNER Version units that support wall mounting 1 Units must only be mounted onto permanent wall surfaces 2 The surface must be vertical and flat 3 Orientation of the unit must be as shown in the section on IP Office 500 Wall Mounting 4 The appropriate Avaya wall mounting kits must be used aN IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool 2 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 3 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 4 Use only the power cord and batteries indic
190. addition most UPSs also provide an element of power conditioning reducing spikes and surges The capacity of UPS systems and the total equipment load the UPS is expected to support are usually quoted in VA Where equipment load is quoted in Watts multiply by 1 4 to get the VA load The calculation of how much UPS capacity is required depends on several choices PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 24 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Overview Power Supplies e What equipment to place on the UPS Remember to include server PCs such as the voicemail It is recommended that the total load on a new UPS is never greater than 75 capacity thus allowing for future equipment e How many minutes of UPS support is required Actual UPS runtime is variable it depends on what percentage of the UPSs capacity the total equipment load represents For example a LOOOVA capacity UPS may only support a 1000VA 100 load for 5 minutes This relationship is not linear the same UPS would support a 500VA 50 load for 16 minutes Therefore the lower the percentage of capacity used the increasingly longer the UPS runtime typically up to 8 hours maximum Remember also that for most UPSs the ratio of discharge to full recharge time is 1 10 e How many output sockets does the UPS provide Multiple UPS units may be required to ensure that every item of supported equipment has its own supply socket The web s
191. age Rewind 5 secs Advance N secs Return call Exit voicemail When you listen to any of your messages you have the following options e Press 4 to delete the message e Press 5 to save the message e Press 6 to forward the message See Forwarding a Message 45 e Press 7 to repeat the last message e Press 8 to exit voicemail e Press 9 to skip to the next message e Press to rewind the message a few seconds e Press to advance the message a few seconds e Press to return the call See Replying to Messages 45 To listen to an old message 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Press 1 to listen to your old messages To save a message 1 Press 5 when listening to a new or old message PARTNER User Guide Page 40 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Using Voicemail Listening to Your Messages 5 3 Record Your Name You can record your name if required Your name recording is then used for various features such as telling callers which mailbox they have reached rather than just stating the extension number Login 0 5 Record Name 1 Hear Change lt tone gt speak 3 Tare To record or change your greeting 1 Login 3 to your mailbox 2 Press 05 to select the option to record your name 3 Press 1 to hear your current name recording 4 Press 2 to record your name 5 When you are prompted speak your name The maximum length that can be recorded is 5 seconds 6 Press 2 w
192. age 1 Press 5 when listening to a new or old message PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 40 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Using Voicemail Listening to Your Messages 5 3 Record Your Name You can record your name if required Your name recording is then used for various features such as telling callers which mailbox they have reached rather than just stating the extension number Login 0 5 Record Name 1 Hear Change lt tone speak 3 Tare To record or change your greeting 1 Login 3 to your mailbox 2 Press 05 to select the option to record your name 3 Press 1 to hear your current name recording 4 Press 2 to record your name 5 When you are prompted speak your name The maximum length that can be recorded is 5 seconds 6 Press 2 when you have finished recording your name 7 Press 1 to listen to your new name recording After you have listened you can e Press 3 to save the new recording e Press 2 to record the new name again PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 41 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 5 4 Changing Your Access Code You can set an access code for your mailbox If you set an access code it will be requested whenever you access the mailbox to collect messages When changing your access code e Enter at least four digits If you enter less than four digits you will be prompted to enter a longer code e Do not set an obvious code for
193. ain Partner Version Web based training makes it easy to certify By completing Sales training your authorized to sell both versions Makes it easy to migrate to IP Office as your company grows Note Sales training 3 Hours Implement training 8 hours or less AN ANNI Narren Nr Ya m ER EEE co 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved 16 J AVAYA gt PARTNER ACS is evolving into a Greater variety of telephones next generation system 9 ant Sy _ PARTNER ETR sets Newer common control unit o New 14xx digital telephones Integration of common IP Office components 3920 3910 Wireless ATM 4 PRI T1 Analog devices e DS8 DS16 Investment Protection e Phone 2 Phone 8 Phone 16 gt Migrate all telephones Built in support for SIP trunks Mobile Twinning Common IP Office hardware eliminates need to replace all hardware The PARTNER Experience continues e Same key system look and feel as PARTNER has always provided e The desktop experience remains PARTNER 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved 17 AVAYA INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATIONS Questions and Discussion 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved 18 Planned IP Office Release 6 Subject to change AVAYA IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Simplified Communications for Very Small Businesses Overview avaya com Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version is the ideal soluti
194. ain in dB e Rx Gain Default OdB The receive gain in dB e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when unanswered calls should be redirected to the voicemail system The delay for the redirection is set by the VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night values for the channel The options are Always Day Only Night Only or Never e Timers for selected channel Only adjust these values under guidance from the line provider PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 61 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 13 4 SIP Trunk Administration This window is used to add SIP trunks to the phone system configuration Trunks SIP Trunk Administration SIP Trunk Setup Descriptive Authentication Ho OF Transport ns Domain Name ee Password hare cdl Send Fort Listen Fort Mews News gt News 10 UDP R060 5060 Note Domain Name is a mandatory field for Sip Trunk Configurations Advanced Setup Coverage Destination 11 Bothway lt Not yet configured gt None a Dz Bothway lt Not yet configured gt None w 13 Bothway lt Not
195. ains the physical installation of the control unit and the telephones Chapter 5 Administration explains how the system configuration can be altered and how software and hardware can be upgraded as new modules and releases become available Chapter 6 System Component Details descriptions of system components identified in Chapter 2 System Overview Chapter 7 Troubleshooting how to handle problems occurring during installation and operation Describes possible problems with the telephone system and the solutions to these problems Appendix supplementary information Index Document Histor Draft 1 Initial issue V Vella 12 Nov 2009 Draft 2 ER comments V Vella 20 Nov 2009 Draft 3 Nomenclature correction and edit V Vella Po Draft 4 First review draft V Vella 12 Jan 2010 Draft 5 Continued editing and review comments V Vella 22 Jan 2010 Issued for final review V Vella 3 Feb 2010 Document Conventions The following font attributes are used in this document e Bold Used to emphasize identify commands or highlight menu selections e Italic Used to identify dialog fields windows or documents e Courier Used for code listings file names and command line content 1 2 ROHS ROHS is a European Union directive for the Removal of Certain Hazardous Substances from Electrical and Electronic Equipment Similar legislation has been or is being introduced in a number of other countries Avaya has decided to make its global
196. al to the building connection must be via a towerMAX SCL 8 Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx http www itwlinx com Torr on peente Switch 2 1 Switch 1 1 3 L O IR 35mm Stereo 2 Switch 2 Jack Plug 3 O Volts Ground Chassis Switch 1 e Switching Capacity 0 7A PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 80 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Physical Ports e Maximum Voltage 55V d c e On state resistance 0 7 ohms e Short circuit current 1A e Reverse circuit current capacity 1 4A e Ensure that pins 1 and 2 are always at a positive voltage with respect to pin 3 3 5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre wired sealed modules It may be necessary to use a multi meter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug Typically 3 common to both relays is the cable screen 4 9 7 LAN Port The IP Office control unit has 2 RJ 45 Ethernet ports marked as LAN and WAN These form a full duplex managed layer 3 switch Within the IP Office configuration the physical LAN port is LAN1 the physical WAN port is designated LAN2 but should not be used The LAN port LEDs indicate as follows e Green On connected Flashing Activity e Yellow On 100Mbps Off 10Mbps LAN Cables These are CAT5 UTP
197. all e Internal calls The extension group or short code called e Inbound calls The DDI dialed by the caller if available e Outbound calls The dialed digits e Voice Mail Calls to a user s own voicemail mailbox 7 Dialled Number For internal calls and outbound calls this is identical to the Called Number above For inbound calls this is the DDI of the incoming caller 8 Account The last account code attached to the call Note IP Office account codes may contain alphanumeric characters 9 1s Internal O or 1 denoting whether both parties on the call are internal or external 1 being an internal call Calls to SCN destinations are indicated as internal Direction Is Internal Call Type t 9 Incoming external call Incoming external call _ 0 1 internal call O O Outgoing external call 10 Call ID This is a number starting from 1 000 000 and incremented by 1 for each unique call If the call has generates several SMDR records each record will have the same Call ID Note that the Call ID used is restarted from 1 000 000 is the IP Office is restarted 11 Continuation 1 if there is a further record for this call id O otherwise 12 Party1Device The device 1 number This is usually the call initiator though in some scenarios such as conferences this may vary If an extension hunt group is involved in the call its details will have priority over a trunk this includes remote SCN destinations Type Party
198. all Barring These settings can be used when the reboot mode When Free is selected They bar the sending or receiving of any new calls during reboot 4 Click OK PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 102 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration Additional Processes PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 103 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 6 Appendices PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 105 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 6 Appendices This section contains supplementary information 6 1 Troubleshooting Problem Check this Laptop does not seem to communicate with the control unit Telephone doesn t ring Display shows only 16 characters per line Some Accented letters do not display properly Display time and date are not correct Caller ID doesn t work Telephone Doesn t Work Intercom Autodialer doesn t work Can t record a call Standard phone message waiting light doesn t light PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition 1 The default address for an IP Office control unit LAN port is 192 168 42 1 255 255 255 0 If required Should not be necessary change the TCP IP properties for the PC LAN port to the following Fixed IP address 192 168 42 203 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168
199. all coverage manually 1 Press FEATURE 20 2 Dial your extension number again To use a Call coverage button 1 Press the programmed button When on if programmed on a button with a light the button s green light will be on PARTNER User Guide Page 27 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 To create a call coverage button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 20 5 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 6 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls 7 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Coverage O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a call coverage button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed
200. ammed See Hunt Group Voicemail on page 36 A range of settings and controls are accessible through the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager Application to configure the voicemail operation 4 8 2 System Status Application SSA This tool provides a wide range of information about the current status of an Essential Edition PARTNER system It includes available resources and components within the system This includes details of current call in progress Details of the number of alarms are recorded and the time date of the most recent alarms When required for diagnostics escalation SSA is able to take a snap shot image of the IP Office system status including a copy of its current configuration Use of SSA requires an IP Office service user name and password that has been configured for System Status access in the IP Office security settings DVD lt APPSDVD gt License x No license required SSA is pre installed on the system Avaya SD memory card and can be run by selecting File Advanced System Status from the main menu MI P Office R Syatem Statue AVAYA IP Office System Status Hb Er abat Unbne Offlin Logon Contes nit IP Address w Password Auto recnnnert Respond to the password request Further SSA information is available in this document 4 8 3 Monitor Monitor also know as System Monitor is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office system in great detail As a consequ
201. an external call 1 Pick up the handset and press an idle line button The green light next to the button is on steady and you will hear the dial tone 2 Enter the dial out code which is usually 9 then dial the telephone number The dialled number will appear on the display Using the last number redial 1400 Series phones users can use the fixed REDIAL button on their phone to view details of previous calls and redial those number 1 Lift the handset 2 Press FEATURE 05 The digits are displayed as they are dialed To create a last number redial button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 05 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Last Number Redial e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle PARTNER User Guide Page 16 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Basic Call Handling Making Calls 3 2 Answering Calls You can answer telephone calls that are ringing your extension or at another extension If you regularly pick up calls for a specific extension you can program a call pickup 33 gt button for that specified extension To answer a Call ringing at your own extension 1
202. and TFTP and requires a BOOTP entry for the IP Office system to exist on the Manager PC This method should not be used unless absolutely necessary Start Sufficient ae l Offline Ta Cancel memory p Upgrade Upgrade Yes es Send BINs Reboot to Reboot to IP Office OPA ime Mode No No un Ho Proceed with Sufficient Urwalidsbed Upgrade memory gt Upgrade Yes es Yes Er aze current Flas Transfer BINs mta Flash Delete BIN Reboot Request BIH s d Cancel Reboot be Upgrade Process PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 99 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 5 7 2 Upgrading the Core Software E Objective Upgrade the control unit to IP Office software J Information Required e O Remote Administrator Password For a new or defaulted system this is password g Tools Required e O Manager PC The Upgrade Wizard tool is part of the Manager application h WARNINGS e Check IP Office Technical Bulletins Check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletin for the IP Office software release before proceeding any further It may contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was completed Bulletins are available from http support avaya com e Multiple Managers If more than one copy of Manager is running it is possible for the Essential Edition PARTNER Version to request BIN files from a different Manager than the one that started the
203. and editing an IP Office system configuration It is a tool meant primarily for system installers and maintainers Manager runs on a Windows PC and connects to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit via the Ethernet LAN connection Office manager can be used to prepare user lists permissions group memberships and other administration tasks on the telephone system Manager has its own Administrator User Manual containing comprehensive user instructions IP Office Manager Mi IP Office 500v2 Control Unit running IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version g ne LAN Cable h CAUTION Password Change Required New IP Office systems use default security settings These settings must be changed to make the system secure As a minimum you should change the default Remote Administrator Password Failure to do so will render the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system potentially insecure h IMPORTANT Manager is an off line editor It receives a copy ofthe current configuration settings for the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system from the control unit SD Card Changes may be made to that copy and it is then sent back to the SD Card for those changes to become active This means that changes to the active configuration in the system that occur between Manager receiving and sending back the copy may be overwritten For example this may affect changes made by users through their phone or v
204. and on line course assessments The site requires users to setup a user name and password in order to track their personal training record PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 10 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Introduction Training PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 11 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 2 System Overview PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 13 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 2 System Overview This section looks at the components that collectively form the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system This includes aspects such as cabling and the need for additional non Avaya IP Office equipment L The section provides only a general description of individual units For greater detail refer to the System Components section 2 1 Partner Features The following basic features are provided by Essential Edition PARTNER Version Prompts and feedback displays on both ETR and 1400 sets emulate the PARTNER ACS R8 system Integral SD card contains system files and backup files Automatic backup every 24 hours Up to 48 extensions Avaya ETR Telephone support Avaya 1400 Digital Telephone support Key System Functionality Embedded Voicemail SIP Trunking up to 10 trunks Supports the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager application Supports the
205. and updated core software bin files e Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Access to an on line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base Currently this link is only available to Avaya Business Partners while running an ARA account Avaya Remote Access connection 3 2 4 Space Requirements IP Office 500v2 control unit and modules are designed to be installed either in a free standing stack or into a 19 rack system Rack installation requires a rack mounting kit for each control unit and expansion module Cable Clearance Clearance must be provided at the front and rear of all modules for cable access connections and insertion removal of the SD card PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 30 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Getting Started e Allow a minimum clearance of 90mm 3 5 inches e Additional Clearance Care should be taken to ensure that the positioning of the modules does not interrupt air flow and other factors that may affect environmental requirements This is especially important on IP Office 500 control units which have ventilation slots at the side e Cable Access Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls ceilings floors and similar openings Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord including proper routing of
206. any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to Lucent Technologies have been transferred or licensed to Avaya All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Any comments or suggestions regarding this document should be sent to wgctechpubs avaya com 2010 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Avaya Unit 1 Sterling Court 15 21 Mundells Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1LZ England Tel 44 0 1707 392200 Fax 44 0 1707 376933 Web http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase PARTNER User Guide Page 66 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 AVAYA IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Issue 1c 09 April 2010 2010 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notices While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of p
207. are routed immediately to the covering extension without ringing the covered extension Similarly if Call Coverage is on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb 34 gt to send that call immediately for coverage e If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover 44 gt active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings e f the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb 34 gt active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage e If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up e For transferred calls if the covering extension does not answer the call goes to the transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer Return Rings e If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence To send calls for coverage manually 1 Press FEATURE 20 2 Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove c
208. at should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension Pattern Ringing ls ring 2s Off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 1 75s off 0 4s ring 0 8s Off 2s ring 2s Off 0 945s ring 4 5s Off 0 25s ring 0 24 off 0 25 ring 2 25 Off ee ee 2s ring 4s Off PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 52 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks Pattern Ringing 3 ls ring 3s Off e DID Mapping Table This table is used to set the destination for incoming calls based on the DID and ICLID number information received with the call This will override the Coverage Destination settings of the channel on which the call was received Calls routing by DDI mapping is not affected by the phone system being put into the night service state e DID Number If the incoming DID of a call on the T1 trunk matches the DID set here it will be routed to this destination e Incoming CLI If the incoming caller number on the T1 trunk matches the ICLID set here it will be routed to this destination e Destination When this field is selected the drop down list allows selection of the extension or group to which calls matching the DID Number or Incoming CLI settings should be routed The destination can also be set to Auto Attendant e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used fo
209. ated Ringing active by default Users Advanced 67 Settings System List Management 27 gt Users Advanced 67 gt Settings restriction a Signaling Type Always defaulted to DTMF Trunks Setup 48 ialing Assigned extensions for Forced Account Codes Users Advanced 67 Settings Automatic daylight saving System Setup 26 Automatic VMS Cover Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Backing up Additional 72 gt Admin Tasks Button Programming Phone Picture Users Button 34 gt Programming Call Coverage Duration Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Call waiting extension On by default Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Calling Group Add remove extensions Group Management 27 Cannot be intruded Privacy Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Change a password Remote Admin password 24 System Setup 26 Channel Allocation Unit Trunks T1 PRI 60 Clock Quality Trunks T1 Advanced 59 Setup Contact Closure Auxiliary 45 Equipment Copy and Print User Setup Button 34 gt Programming CPU Operation Trunks T1 PRI 60 gt Daylight saving time System Setup 26 Default Gateway System Setup 26 Delay Day Night Each Line Trunks Advanced 59 Setup Disallowed list membership Users List Assignment 28 Disallowed List Assigned extensions Telephone numbers System List Management 28 Distinctive ring Users Advanced 67 Settings PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 16 IP Of
210. ated in this manual Do not dispose of batteries in a fire They may explode Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions 3 2 3 Read the Documentation Ensure that you have read this manual in full before starting installation Also include the installation documentation for any other equipment and applications being installed as part of the IP Office system e h IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you intend to install on the Essential Edition PARTNER Version This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been included in this manual IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the web sites listed below Other IP Office Installation Manuals The following components of IP Office are outside the range of a basic IP Office installation They are covered by separate installation and configuration documentation If those components are to be part of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system installation that documentation should be obtained read and understood prior to the installation Information Web Sites IP Office documentation is available from the following web sites e Avaya Support http support avaya com Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office Copies of the IP Office CD images are available from this site
211. ation 64 party conferencing capacity Maximum of 6 concurrent voice messaging calls Approximately 15 hours of storage Automated Attendant Multiple language support Message control Save Delete Forward Repeat Rewind Fast Forward and Skip Message All messages time amp date stamped Breakout to reception Voicemail to email presentation Visual Voicemail Related Products IP Office Preferred Edition IP Office Advanced Edition About Avaya Avaya is a global leader in enterprise communications systems The company provides unified communications contact centers and related services directly AVAYA and through its channel partners to leading businesses and organizations around the world Enterprises of all sizes depend on Avaya for state of the art INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATIONS communications that improve efficiency collaboration customer service and competitiveness For more information please visit www avaya com 2010 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Avaya and the Avaya Logo are trademarks of Avaya Inc and are registered in the United States and other countries All trademarks identified by TM or SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc avaya com All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Avaya may also have trademark rights in other terms used herein References to Avaya include the Nortel Enterprise business which was acquired as of December 18 2009 03
212. ault 2 10 seconds Programmable buttons set to Call Coverage can be used to switch call coverage on or off for a user When on calls that ring unanswered for this number of rings are redirected to alert on a covering extension Ensure that this setting is set lower than the users VMS Cover Ring if using Automatic VMS Cover e Call Waiting Extension Default Not Assigned If Assigned on an analog extension when the user is on a call an additional call will cause a tone to be heard as part of the existing call PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 68 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Additional Administration Tasks e Automatic VMS Cover Default Not Assigned If Assigned voicemail is used to answer calls to the user that have rung for the VMS Cover Ring time e VMS Cover Ring Default 3 15 seconds Range 1 to 9 If Automatic VMS Cover is assigned this value sets how long a call alerts the user extension before going to voicemail e Intercom Dial Tone Default Regular This setting allows selection of which dial tone is used for intercom internal calls Regular matches the dial tone used by Avaya Partner phone systems Machine matches the dial tone used by Avaya Essential Edition PARTNER Version phone systems e Distinctive Ringing Default Active If active the phone will use if supported different ring patterns to indicate internal external and recal
213. ay Help i Many fields display a drop down menu of options for that field displayed by a right click when the mouse pointer is placed in the field e After editing the setting in an Admin window click Apply to save the changes or click Cancel to abandon the changes If you attempt to move away you are prompted whether you want to save the changes When you are setting up Trunk Channels a Back option returns you to the previous dialog so that you can select another trunk line e A next to settings indicates that it is the default value e If the value entered is incorrect in some way a warning or alarm icon may be displayed next to it If you place your cursor over the icon e x Error This icon indicates that the current value of a setting is not supported or conflicts with another and is a likely to cause incorrect operation of the system a Warning This icon indicates that the current value of a setting is not typical and may indicate faulty configuration e WD Information This icon indicates some special information about a setting By default tool tips are displayed whenever the mouse pointer hovers over a dynamic control feature These tips can be switched OFF by activating or de activating Tool Tips in the View menu options The status bar at the bottom of the screen can display system messages or instructions A IMPORTANTI As you use Manager to make changes to the lt SHORTNAME gt setup you are prompted
214. aya trained technician using a laptop PC with IP Office Manager R6 0 software installed When this quick installation is completed systems running with analog trunks should place and receive calls with no further programming or setup e The IP Office Essential Edition system is a converged voice and data communications system It should therefore only be installed by persons with telephony and IP data network experience e Installers must be trained on IP Office systems Through its Avaya University AU Avaya provides a range of training courses including specific IP Office implementation and installation training It also provides certification schemes for installers to achieve various levels of IP Office accreditation e Itis the installer s responsibility to ensure that all installation work is done in accordance with local and national regulations and requirements It is also their responsibility to accurately establish the customer s requirements before installation and to ensure that the installation meets those requirements e You should read and understand this documentation before installation You should also obtain and read the Avaya Technical Bulletins relevant to recent IP Office software and hardware releases to ensure that you are familiar with any changes to the equipment and software Associated documents are e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual e IP Office Essential Edition
215. be used in the form of IP Office Phone Barrier Boxes and protective earth connections e The correct IP Office specific barrier boxes must be used These modules have been designed specifically for the signalling voltages used by the IP Office system e Only the IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 should be used e No other type of analog phone barrier box should be used e Where more than 3 barrier boxes are required in a building they must be rack mounted using a Barrier Box rack mounting kit e A maximum of 16 barrier boxes can be used with any Phone module e CAUTION PHONE POT ports on the front of control units must not be used for extensions that are external to the main building PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 72 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Out of Building Telephone Installations COPY Main Building Secondary Building Control unit p ef Je a u a Barrier Box Barrier Box ye amp Approved Ground Point Primary Protection Boxes Earthed Ducted Cabling Main Building BarrierBox Secondary Building e RJ11 Connect to PHONE POT port on the amp e RJ11 Connect to analog phone Phone module using ae supplied with the ies so Cable not supplied barrier box Phone Module a Approved Ground Points e RJ45 From main building via e RJ45 Connect to the secon
216. behavior The commands available through the Manager menu bar change according to the mode in which Manager is running Commands may also be grayed out if not useable The following sections outline the functions of each command The Edit and Help menus are not included Fete Mew ens Open Configuration 102 Toolbars 96 gt Close Configuration 79 Embedded File Management 92 Tool Tip 96 gt Save Configuration 79 Format IP Office SD Card 94 gt Advance View 97 gt Save Configuration As 79 IP Office A Law Hide Admin Tasks Preferences 80 IP Office U Law 97 IP Office Partner Edition TFTP Log 97 Offline Recreate IP Office SD Card 94 Create New Config 84 IP Office A Law Open File 85 gt IP Office U Law Send Config IP Office Partner Edition Receive Config Browse Memory Card Command 94 gt Advanced Shutdown Erase Configuration Default Start Up pa N System Status 95 Reboot 89 Exit 96 System Shutdown Upgrade 90 Change Mode 3 1 File Menu The File menu contains manager configuration options and many management options that are not available through the Manager GUIs 3 1 1 Open Configuration h This menu command is only available when Manager is not connected to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system This command displays the Select IP Office dialog used to receive an IP Office systems configuration settings See Op
217. btype Cards Module Number of Channels T 1 1 7 3 Analogue Trunk T T 4 Analogue Trunk 1 1 en 5 PRI 24 Universal T1 24 Advanced Setup Analogue Trunk Setup Line Appearance ID Hold Disconnect Time Son w Coverage Destination e Installed Trunks This table displays information about the trunk cards installed in the phone system Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the list e Line Number Information only not editable e Line Type This value indicates the type of trunk not editable e Line Subtype PRI trunks can be configured as either PRI 51 gt or T1 57 gt to match the line provider e Card Module Indicates the card slot or expansion module being used for the trunk device providing the line 1 to 4 match the slots on the front of the phone system from left to right Expansion modules are numbered from 6 upwards e Number of Channels PRI trunks can provide multiple channels depending on the selected Line Subtype e Advanced Setup This hot link option calls up a further window that is used to display and edit additional settings for the selected trunk and its trunk channels Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the Installed Trunks list Those settings differ depending on the Line Type and its selected Line Subtype e Analog Trunk 48 RI 24 Universal PRI 51 e PRI 24 Universal T1 57 2 13 1 Analog Trunks If a trunk with the Line
218. buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 65 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 ETR34 Telephone Features Feature Number of programmable buttons with lights Number of programmable buttons without lights a ee LE BEL 4 6 8 ETR18 This phone is only supported by an ETR6 card in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system All Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phone are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone AUX socket The ETR PARTNER Version telephones have fixed buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 66 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Telephones ETR18 Telephone Features Feature Number of programmable buttons with lights Number of programmable buttons without lights a EL BEE 4 6 9 ETR6 This phone is only supported by an
219. c The control unit includes LAN ports slots for additional internal cards and in some cases integral digital and analog phone ports Lin e SD Card The IP Office 500v2 control unit uses the Avaya SD flash memory card which has Essential Edition PARTNER Version software and Embedded Voicemail already installed Each Avaya SD card has a unique serial number e IP Office 500 Base Cards The control unit has slots for up to four base cards These can be used to add analog and digital extension ports e IP Office 500 Digital Station Base Card e IP Office 500 ATM Combination Card e IP Office 500v2 ETR6 Base Card e IP Office 500 Analog Phone Base Card e IP Office 500 VCM Base Card e IP Office 500 4 Port Expansion Base Card e IP Office 500 Trunk Daughter Cards Some base cards can be fitted with a IP Office 500 daughter card in order to support various types of trunk connections e IP Office 500 Analog Trunk Card e IP Office 500 T1 Trunk Card e IP Office 500 PRI Trunk Card e IP Office 500 SIP Trunk Card e IP Office 500 Combination Cards These card are pre paired base and daughter cards They provide 6 digital station ports 2 analog phone ports and 4 analog trunks e IP Office 500 External Expansion Modules Additional analog and digital extension ports can be added using an IP Office 500 external expansion module e Only one Digital Station 16 or one Phone 16 module may be used with Essential Edition PARTNER Ver
220. c All non Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Page 2 Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Contents 1 ETR Telephones 1 1 EX COLES ULLOM S tadashi hein Acetate Nhat dare Aes clea iarnata aan 9 1 2 Ringing le ALLO NN szene 9 TS Dal TONOS sn 9 ks Lont Patterns sans 10 1 5 Adjusting the Telephone Display uen 10 2 1400 Series Phones 3 Basic Call Handling Soli MAKINGsCallS sion a eae ri 16 3 2 Answerng calsaan ass EE 17 320 Using Handsireesza s sea 18 3 4 Hands Free Answer on Intercom s4 4444n een 18 3 5 Adjusting the VOIUMG ccscccccsssececsescesseseeseeseeseuss 19 3 6 Holding CalllS ccccccccecceceseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeees 19 Or Transfering Balsan 2 N 19 3 6 Conferencing Ealls ann une 20 OO JOINING Calls sans seen 20 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Feature and Intercom Codes 2222400s242s seen 22 4 2 Naming Your Extension ccccceccsssseesseeeseseeeseeees 24 4 3 Absent Text MeSSaQ6S
221. cables for connection of various IP devices within the IP Office system 1 1E IA BEE RJ45 RJ45 1 a LANLAMN Crossover Cable 3 Meters 3 54 Feet LAN Interconnect Cable 1 Meter 3 25 Feet LAN MDI Crossover Standard Crossover I nterconnect R45 1 Rx A TX A White Orange 1 3 R45 2 Rx B Tx B Orange White 2 6 rl 3 mT Xx A Rx A White Green 3 1 vr ee 4 Not used Not used Blue White 4 4 u 5 Not used Not used White Blue 5 5 6 1x B Rx B Green White 6 2 7 Not used Not used White Brown 7 7 8 Not used Not used Brown White 8 8 e Part number e LAN Cable GREY 700213481 Standard straight LAN cable e LAN Crossover Cable Black 700213473 LAN crossover cable 4 9 8 PF Port These ports are analog extension ports that can be used in conjunction with analog loop start trunks during power failure to the IP Office system There are a number of options to connect analog extension ports to analog trunks during power failure In all cases these only work with loop start analog trunks Any phones connected to these ports should be clearly labeled as power fail extensions in accordance with the appropriate national and local regulatory requirements When an IP Office 500Analog Phone 8 base card is fitted with an IP Office 500Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure extension port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12 The same applies to the IP Office 500ATM Combination card and the I
222. card contains the following folders e primary System SD Contains the firmware files for the IP Office 500v2 control unit external expansion modules and system supported phones The folder can also contain music on hold files and license key files This is the l main set of files used by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system when booting up Also primary contains the stored copy of the current configuration backup vmail paf Tp Contains a copy of the primary folder at some previous point This copy is updated automatically every day soon after midnight when the system is idle A backup copy of the primary contents to idynamic temp this folder can be invoked manually 72 gt using Manager or SSA or as part of the IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version software upgrade 9 using Manager e Ivmail Contains the prompts used by embedded voicemail and the mailbox messages e dynamic Contains files used by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system and retained through a reboot of the system e temp Contains temporary files used by the IP Office and not retained through a reboot of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system The Optional SD card can contain a similar set of folders These are used as an additional backup or they can be used as the source for upgrading the contents of the System SD card Administration activities concerning the SD card are detailed in Menu Bar Commands File 8
223. ce Manual Page 38 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Install Overview The basic installation procedure described in the following sections is as follows 1 Equip the control unit with base cards pre fitted where necessary with daughter cards 2 Insert the supplied SD card 3 Connect a laptop PC that has IP Office Manager 6 or above to the control unit Item 5 in tools 4 Switch ON the control unit Essential Edition PARTNER Version automatically sniffs the connected system and contacts the laptop To do this The control unit initializing firmware sends its configuration i n i files to the SD card where they are checked against the current versions on the card The control unit performs a boot up sequence that varies according to what is detected during the discovery phase 5 Switch ON the laptop Office Manager on the PC displays the administration home screen which identifies basic system components and system settings 6 Plug in telephone handsets 7 Use Manager to complete system configuration 3 4 Card Installation This section describes in order the procedures to equip an IP 500v2 control unit for use with Essential Edition PARTNER Version A Warnings e Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards e During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected IP500 Trunk Daughter Car
224. ce feature allows you to conference other parties including yourself into a call The system supports multiple conferences of up to 64 parties in total including up to 2 external analog trunk in each conference To create a conference call 1 While active on a call press the CONF or CONFERENCE button The first party is now on hold 2 When you hear the inside dial tone dial the telephone number of the second party 3 When the call is answered press the CONF or CONFERENCE button again to add the second party to the call 4 You can now speak to the first and second parties An alternating Red Green Flash appears at any extension connected during a conference call 5 Repeat step 2 to add more parties To use hold during a conference call If you need to answer or make another call during a conference call you can use the Hold feature When you put a conference call on hold the other parties can still talk to each other 1 Press the HOLD button 2 The Green light next to the intercom or line button will wink to show that the call is on hold 3 To re join the conference call press the button next to the Green light You will rejoin the conference An alternating Red Green Flash appears next to your intercom or line button to indicate that you are in a conference call 3 9 Joining Calls Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension You cannot Join an intercom call o
225. ceeseeseeeeeeeeeees 98 Page 3 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 5 7 2 Upgrading the Core Software 100 5 7 3 Changing the IP Address Settings 100 5 7 4 System SNUtKOWN cccssssssseceeceeeeeseeeessseeees 101 5 7 5 Rebooting the SyStem cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeees 102 6 Appendices 6 1 Troupl amp eshooling ir een 106 6 2 Safety Statements niiina 108 6 2 1 Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols 108 6 2 2 Trunk Interface Modules 109 6 2 3 Further Information and Product Updates 109 6 2 4 Compliance with FCC Rules 109 6 2 5 Port Safety Olassification 109 6 2 6 EMC Directive uesenseeessssseneennenneeenenennennenn 110 6 3 Regulatory Instructions for US6 ccccceceeeeeeeeeees 111 6o AVIA Clic un nennen 111 6 3 2 FCC NOUiCatiOn ins scatacsenicecesaraxsorsapeiaveiuetdeers 111 DOEK sisi rete a ee atin ie 113 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Page 4 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 1 Introduction PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 5 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Introduction 1 Introduction Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version is a telephone system designed for single site businesses typically with 5 to 25 extensions that need a sma
226. ch as _ gt and The entry in this field should not start with a space or number h WARNING Changing Names Mailboxes are created based on each user s unique name within the Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration Changing a user name will associate that user with a new mailbox If it is necessary to change a user name ensure that they have played and deleted all their messages first If a user name is changed without clearing the original mailbox it will be necessary to create a short code based on the old user name in order to access the old mailbox e Language Default US English The language entered here will affect the language of prompts displayed on the user s extension and the prompts played to the user when they access their voicemail mailbox The available options are US English Canadian French or Latin Spanish e Ex Directory Default Off If selected the user is not included in the directory of users displayed on phones e Outgoing Call Bar Default Off If selected the extension user cannot make any outgoing external calls except to numbers in the Emergency Number List 29 and numbers in any Allowed Lists 28 of which they are a member e Twinning Default Off If a user extension is twinned calls to the extension also ring at the twinned number entered in Twinned Number field Twinning is a licensed feature and this option can only be enabled for the number of users for which the pho
227. check the box next to that system and click OK 4 The name and password request is displayed Enter the required details and click OK Note If the configuration is not loaded a possible cause pop up is displayed e Access Denied This is displayed as the cause if the service user name password were incorrect or the service user has insufficient rights to read the configuration The Retry option can be used to log in again but multiple rejections in a 10 minute period may trigger events such as locking the user account set by the Password Reject Limit and Password Reject Action options in the IP Offices security settings e Failed to communicate with IP Office This is displayed as the cause if the network link fails or the secure communication mode is incorrect for example Manager is set to unsecured but the Essential Edition PARTNER Version is set to secure only e Account Locked The account of the Service User name and password being used is locked This can be caused by a number of actions for example too many incorrect password attempts passing a fixed expiry date etc The account lock may be temporary 10 minutes or permanent until manually unlocked An account can be enabled again through the IP Office s security settings Following a successful log in additional messages may also appear before the configuration is loaded such as e Your service user account will expire in X days This message indicates that an Account Expiry da
228. cial ShortCode Number Special News No Operator Call By Call ShortCode Service Hone e TNS Transit Network Selector Code The pattern for the alternate long distance carrier For example The pattern 10XXX is added to this tab If 10288 is dialed 10 is removed and 288 is placed in the TNS and NSF information e Special e Short Codes Default Blank Range Up to 31 characters Dial Plan 53 code used to dial out System short codes can be dialed by all IP Office users However the system short code is ignored if the user dialing matches a user short code or user restriction short code For example short codes are grouped based on short code feature type such as all forwarding short codes together e Number The number translated from the short code i e decoded number in full e Special Any conditions that apply Select from drop down menu e Plan The associated Dial Plan e Call By Call e Service selects the type of service provided by the channel from Call by Call SDN inc GSDN MegaCom800 MegaComWats Accunet NLDS 1800 ETN Private Line AT amp T Multiquest For other providers the service options are None or No Service 2 13 3 T1 Trunks If a trunk with the Line Subtype of T1 is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks Clicking on Advanced Setup 59 accesses a dialog of additional settings for the trunk and settings for the trunk s individual chann
229. ckup Aymaill Viral fdynamic fdynamic temp Memb 3 1 7 9 Memory Card Command Enables you to shut down or restart an SD card USe when removing a card from the control unit For either command it displays a warning does discovery dialogue asks for password PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 94 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu 3 1 7 10 System Status Essential Edition PARTNER Version System Status is an application that can be used to monitor and report on the status of the system This is a separate application from Manager that is installed on the SD Card it can be started using the File Advanced System Status link within Manager Use of the application requires a service user name and password M9 IP Office R System Status EIER AVAVA IP Office System Status Heip Fri Al md Online offline Logon Control Unit LP Address Servi es Base TCP Port El Auto reconnect 1 Provide the password 2 Click Logon 3 System Status provides details of the IP Office system to which you are connected PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 95 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 49 IP Office R System Status OOFO00 7057198 192 168 42 1 IP500 V 4 0 11019 AVAYA IP Office System Status Heb Srsuoshot Log Ext About DE E Memory Cards System SD Control ing QPS00 Vv
230. ckup copy of the primary vmall contents to this folder can be invoked manually using Manager or SSA or as part of the IP Office software upgrade using Manager ayrnamic temp Ivmail Contains the prompts used by embedded voicemail and the mailbox messages Feature Key dynamic Contains files used by the IP Office and retained through a reboot of the IP Office system e temp Contains temporary files used by the IP Office and not retained through a reboot of the IP Office system The Optional SD card can contain a similar set of folders These are used as an additional backup or they can be used as the source for upgrading the contents of the System SD card Files present on an SD system card can be classified into three differing types 1 Fixed System files files essential for system operation that are fixed in name and or location 2 Dynamic System files files essential for system operation that are dynamic in nature e g voice messages Sysmon and SMDR buffer logs 3 Non system files all others Fixed system files comprise Dynamic system files comprise e P Office 500 firmware binary e Embedded voicemail recordings e Expansion binaries e Sysmon logs e All current DCP phone binaries e SMDR buffer logs e All current IP phone binaries e ADMM base station binary e Embedded voicemail prompts e Embedded AA clips e System configuration e DHCP allocation e Call logs e Music On Hold Not yet implemented
231. co Select the PSTN service provider AT amp T Sprint WorldCom or Local Telco When set to AT amp T an additional AT amp T Provider Setup 56 dialog can be accessed from the dialog e Test Number Used to remember the external telephone number of this line to assist with loop back testing For information only e Clock Quality Default Network This option sets whether the IP Office should try to take its clock source for call synchronization and signalling from this line Preference should always be given to using the clock source from a central office exchange if available by setting at least one exchange line to Network e If multiple lines are set as Network the order in which those lines are used is described in the IP Office Installation Manual If additional lines are available Fallback can be used to specify a clock source to use should the Network source not be available e Lines from which the clock source should not be taken should be set as Unsuitable e If no clock source is available the phone system uses its own internal 8KHz clock source e Framing Default ESF Selects the type of signal framing used ESF or D4 e CRC Checking Default On Turns CRC on or off e Zero Suppression Default B8ZS Selects the method of zero suppression used B8ZS or AMI ZCS e CSU Operation Tick this field to enable the T1 line to respond to loop back requests from the line e Line Signaling Default CPE The field can be
232. conds period of silence will disconnect you from voicemail 5 Press 2 when you have finished recording your greeting 6 Press 1 to listen to your new greeting After you have listened to your greeting you can e Press 3 to save the new greeting Your new greeting will be used e Press 2 to re record the new greeting e Press 4 to save the new greeting for playing on a continuous loop This option can be used to continually play the greeting to a caller the caller will not be able to leave a message Note that once this option is selected the greeting cannot be changed back to a normal greeting except by recording a new greeting PARTNER User Guide Page 43 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 5 6 Voicemail Coverage On Off You can chose to have calls to your extension be rerouted to your voicemail mailbox if you do not answer the call within a set number of rings the default being 3 rings This is called VMC Cover The number of rings used for your extension is set by your system administrator e If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings e If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb 34 gt active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailb
233. count Code 32 Account Code Entry 22 Active Line Pickup 22 Add Contact 52 56 Adjust Ringer Volume 9 All CallLog 52 54 55 56 Contacts 50 51 A Menu 58 Answer a Call 17 Answer on Intercom 18 Answered 52 54 55 56 Athome 25 At lunch until 25 Audible Alerting 59 Audio Path 61 AutCB 16 Auto Dial 29 Away from desk 25 B Back soon 25 Back tomorrow 25 Be right back 25 Bridge 20 C Call Bridge 20 Coverage 27 Forward 22 26 from Call Log 54 from Contacts 51 Ignore 17 Join 20 Park 33 Pickup 17 33 ToVM 17 Call Coverage 22 CALL LOG 52 54 55 56 Call from 54 Details 55 Menu 54 Call Pickup 22 Call Settings Audible alerting on off 59 Audio Path 61 Visual alerting on off 59 Call Transfer Supervised 19 Call Transfer Unsupervised 19 Caller Details 55 Caller ID Inspect 22 Name Display 22 Caller volume 19 Cell Phone Connect 22 26 Changing Mailbox Access Code 42 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Index Your Greeting Message 43 Code Account 32 Lock 30 Conference Hold 20 Start 20 Conference Button 9 Conference Drop 22 Contact Add 52 56 Edit 51 52 Contact Closure 22 CONTACTS 50 51 52 Make call 51 Count 55 Coverage Call 27 Voicemail 44 D Default Mailbox Access 39 Delete Message 40 Details CallLog 55 Dial Tones 9 Direct Line Pickup 22 Directory Add 52 56 Edit 51 52 Make call 51 Do Not Disturb 22 25 34 Don t disturb until 25 Drop 22 E Edit
234. cted the line and extension cords you are ready to install the telephones Installing the telephones includes assembling testing and connecting the telephone As desired you also can connect an Intercom Autodialer to certain telephones Assembling PARTNER Version Telephones All PARTNER telephones are shipped with a stand for either desk mounting or wall mounting the telephone For other telephones see the instructions that are provided with the telephone Gather the line and extension cords hanging from the control unit and twist tie or wire wrap them Testing the modules 1 Test the base card modules by doing the following a Plug a system telephone into the first port on each module b Press the line button on the telephone for each outside line and listen for a dial tone Connecting handsets 2 For telephone systems that are based on a patch intermediate connection system a Connect line cords to the line jacks on the modules b Connect the free end of each line cord to the appropriate telephone network interface jack 3 Fill each module before moving to the next module to the right L As each handset is connected any necessary software it contains is automatically checked and updated as necessary 3 Final Actions You may be required to compile calling lists build groups and allocate permissions etc before leaving the customer premises This depends on arrangements made between your local office and the customer If require
235. ctions to the number of supported cards of some types When such a limit 9 gt is exceeded the right most card of that type will not function Ensure that you use the labels supplied to identify the card fitted into the control unit h Warnings Correct anti static protection steps should be taken while handling circuit boards Cards must never be added or removed from the control unit while it has power connected e Tools Required 5mm Flat blade screwdriver Anti static wrist strap and ground point Installing Base Card 1 Check that there is no power to the control unit 2 Using a flat bladed screwdriver remove the cover from the slot on the front of the control unit that will be used for each card being installed This cover is no longer required but should be retained until installation has been completed PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 19 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 Starting at the left hand slot insert cards Allowing the card to rest against the bottom of the slot begin sliding it into the control unit When half inserted check that the card rails have engaged with the slot edges by trying to gently rotate it If the card rotates remove it and begin inserting it again 4 The card should slide in freely until almost fully inserted At this point apply pressure at the base of the front of the card to complete insertion of the connector 5 Using a flat bladed screwdriver s
236. cy 04 e Use Tel URI Default Off Use Tel URI format for example TEL 1 425 555 4567 rather than SIP URI format for example name example com This affects the From field of outgoing calls The To field for outgoing calls will always use the format specified by the short codes used for outgoing call routing e VOIP Parameters e Compression Mode Default Automatic Selection This defines the type of compression which is to be used for calls on this line e Call Initiation Timeout determine how long to wait for successful connection before treating the line as busy and following ARS alternate routing e DTMF Support selects Dual Tone Multi Frequency mode e Registration Expiry This setting defines how often registration with the SIP ITSP is required following any previous registration e VOIP Silence Suppression Default Off When selected this option will detect periods of silence on any call over the line and will not send any data during those silent periods This feature is not used on IP lines using G711 between IP Office systems e Reinvite Supported Check box to allow Reinvite e Use Offered Codec audio codec format PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 64 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks Channel Setup e Channel Channel number cannot be edited e Appearance Each channel can be accessed through pressing a Line Appearance to make calls Answer ca
237. d use Manager to create any lists Changes to the basic Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration setting up trunks adding licenses etc are detailed in the Avaya IP Office lt SHORTNAME gt Administrator Tool User Guide identified in the Introduction h As you use Manager to make changes to the lt SHORTNAME gt setup you are prompted to save or discard changes you have made before leaving any administration window to go on to another task However you should remember that you are accumulating these changes in a COPY of the control unit configuration file which must be saved back to the SD card before changes are effective Similarly system changes such as plugging in handsets during this time are recognized by the lt SHORTNAME gt system control unit but are undetected by Manager which is working with a copy of the configuration file Avaya recommend that whilst using Manager you save the configuration file at frequent intervals to ensure the working copy and Manager copy of the configuration file remain as compatible as possible Do not leave the Manager application open for long periods and particularly when it is not being used Check system operation and gather all packing materials for disposal If appropriate obtain sign off signature PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 42 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Final Actions PARTNER Version
238. d Actions PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 48 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 h SD Card Removal System Component Details SD Card SD cards should never be removed while being used Though the SD card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an SD card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard The IP Office Manager provides methods to shutdown and restart an individual card or to shutdown the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system in order to allow removal of an SD card Ifthe System SD card is removed licensed features will continue operating for up to 2 hours 4 3 Base Cards IP Office 500 Analog Phone Base Card IP Office 500 ATM Combination Card IP Office ETR6 Base Card The IP Office 500v2 control unit has 4 slots to accomodate base cards Each base cards includes an integral front panel with ports for cable connections The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right Normally they can be used in any order however if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded the card in the highest slot will be disabled This card has 12 RJ45 ports The card is available in two variants providing 2 or 8 analog extension ports for the connection of analog phones The card can be fitted with an IP Office 500 daughter card which then uses the additional 4 RJ 45 ports for connections e This card accepts one IP Office 500 daughter card o
239. d Preparation IP500 trunk daughter cards should be fitted to any base card requiring them wt Parts and Equipment Required 1 IP500 base cards 2 IP500 Trunk cards if required 3 Stand Off Pillars these are supplied with the trunk daughter card g Tools Required 1 5mm Flat blade screwdriver 2 Anti static wrist strap and ground point z z0 Procedure Check that correct cards have been supplied 1 2 Ensure that you are wearing an anti static wrist strap connected to a Suitable ground point 3 On the base card identify the position of 3 holes for the plastic pillars for the daughter card These are along the same edge as the card connector 4 Fit the stand off pillars to the base card 5 If there is a clip on metal shield over the connector block on the base card remove it 6 Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located push the daughter trunk card down onto its connector block and the stand off pillars 7 Check that the card connector has snapped into position 8 Using the washers and screws provided secure the metal stand off pillars to the base card PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 39 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 9 A set of labels are supplied with the trunk daughter card Fit the appropriate label to the front of the base card 10 Prepare any other base cards Then proceed to inserting the base cards Base Card Instal
240. d and parked time A lost or failed call will have a duration of 00 00 00 The total duration of a record is calculated as Connected Time Ring Time Hold Time Park Time PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 106 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Appendix SMDR SMDR Fields 3 Ring Time Duration of the ring part of the call in seconds e For inbound calls this represents the interval between the call arriving at the switch and it being answered not the time it rang at an individual extension e For outbound calls this indicates the interval between the call being initiated and being answered at the remote end if supported by the trunk type Analog trunks are not able to detect remote answer and therefore cannot provide a ring duration for outbound calls 4 Caller The callers number If the call was originated at an extension this will be that extension number If the call originated externally this will be the CLI of the caller if available otherwise blank 5 Direction Direction of the call I for Inbound O for outbound Internal calls are represented as O for outbound This field can be used in conjunction with Is_ Internal below to determine if the call is internal external outbound or external inbound 6 Called Number This is the number called by the IP Office For a call that is transferred this field shows the original called number not the number of the party who transferred the c
241. d from there but you may need to install Manager and Monitor In order to install an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system you must be familiar with using the following IP Office applications They must be available on your installation PC Application Description IP Office Manager is used to access all parts of the IP Office Essential Edition configuration Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by an IP Office system The IP Office System Status application SSA is a reporting tool that provides a wide range of information about the current status of an IP Office system Its can report the available resources and components within the system and details of calls in progress Details of the number of alarms are recorded and the time date of the most recent alarms When required for diagnostics escalation SSA is able to take a snap shot image of the IP Office system status including a copy of its current configuration Use of SSA requires an IP Office service user name and password that has been configured for System Status access in the IP Office security settings Monitor also know as System Monitor is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office Essential Edition system in great detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge However all IP Office installers and maintainers must understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avay
242. d on the rear of IP 500v2 control units and external expansion modules It is used for connecting the external expansion modules to the parent control unit The connection between these ports should only be done using an Avaya Expansion Interconnect Cable No other cable type should be used Expansion Interconnect Cable The Expansion Interconnect cable is used to link expansion ports between the control unit and external expansion module Ras R45 e Supply One cable is normally supplied with each external expansion module e Part number 1m 3 3 Blue cable 700213457 2m 6 6 Yellow cable 700472871 4 9 6 EXT O P Port The Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit is equipped with a EXT O P port The port is marked as EXT O P and is located on the back of the control unit adjacent to the power supply input socket and uses a standard 3 5mm stereo jack plug for connection The port can be used to control up to two external devices such as door entry relay switches The usual application for these switches is to activate relays on door entry systems However as long as the criteria for maximum current voltage and if necessary protection are met the switches can be used for other applications The IP Office is able to open high resistance close low resistance or pulse close for 5 seconds and then open the two switches within the port e CAUTION In installations where this port is connected to a device extern
243. d slot via TU commands without distrupting the entire system Display System IP Address A new Feature Code F591 displays the IP address assigned to the system Display SD Card Feature Key A new Feature Code F592 displays the SD Card Feature Key ID number Remote Access to the built in modem x76 You can remotely access the built in modem of the PARTNER Version by a DID number and by Auto Attendant selector Badger Communications Durand WI 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version Can IP PARTNER Version be upgraded to full IP Office functionality Yes A parameter in Manager will change modes Note that the ETR cards and ETR phones are only supported in IP PARTNER Version mode What are some of the key reliability features of IP Office Avaya IP Office is a highly reliable communications platform with a number of related features including X Solid state components with no moving parts there are no hard drives or fans that can fail X There are no cooling fans required in the IP Office chassis which significantly reduces any potential points of failure On other systems when fans fail components overheat and may become so damaged that they have to be replaced N The resiliency capability of IP Office Release 5 0 with Multi Site Networking adds tremendous reliability as well In the unlikely event that one IP Office in the network fails IP phones from t
244. dary building primary protection in both buildings barrier box via primary protection in both buildings e Center Screw Connect to main building protective ground Use L8AWG minimum wire with a green and yellow sleeve e Center Screw Connect to main building protective ground or ground terminal of Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit Use 18AWG minimum wire with a green and yellow sleeve e Right Hand Screw Not used e Right Hand Screw Connect to ground point on Phone module using ground cable supplied with barrier box Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes must be kept apart that is not routed in the same bundle IP Office Barrier Boxes IP Office 500 Phone Barrier Box 81V 700293897 Use with Phone V1 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and a functional earth lead IP Office 500 Phone Barrier Box V2 101V 700385495 Use with Phone V2 module Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and a functional earth lead Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit 700293905 4 7 3 Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes Where more than 3 Phone Barrier Boxes are used they must be rack mounted The Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit Part number 700293905 supports up to 8 Phone Barrier Boxes 1 Unscrew the two screws arranged diagonally at the front of each barrier box and use these same screws to reattach the barrier box to the rack mounting strip 2 Each barrier box is supplied with a solid green ground wire connected to i
245. digital station phones supported by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Though the RJ 11 to RJ 11 cables supplied with most DS phones can be plugged directly into RJ 45 ports including those on Essential Edition PARTNER Version modules this is not recommend as the connection lock is not positive and may become disconnected DS ports on Digital Station V2 expansion modules can be connected to out of building extensions If this is the case connection must be made via suitable protective devices at each end and via each building primary protection In addition the Digital Station module must be connected to a protective ground DS ports on IP 500v2 control units must not be connected to out of building extensions Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ 45 to RJ 11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ 45 port to a DS phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions DIE E Eh r l4S 4 Not used PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 79 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Not used Not used Signal 1 Signal 2 Not used VN OO Ul kh W N a uh WN PM Not used 8 Not used Part number 700047871 4 9 4 ETR Port ETR Enhanced Tip and Ring ports are provided by the ETR6 base card They can be used for the connection of DTMF analog phone devices and Avaya ETR phones 4 9 5 Expansion Port This type of port is foun
246. e Use the drop down list to select the extension to which the door phone is connected The extension Equipment Type User Setu Advanced Settings 67 gt is set to Door Phone 1 or Door Phone 2 as appropriate e Extensions to be alerted Default None This table is used to select which extensions are alerted and can answer when the door phone is used 2 11 2 Music on Hold h Note Music on hold feature is not yet implemented The phone system supports an external music on hold source This is played to callers when they are put on hold The source of the music is connected to the phone system by the system maintainer The phone systems music on hold source can also be used for callers being transferred instead of using ringing tone This depends on the Ring on Transfer 70 gt setting Auxiliary Equipment Music On Hold Setup Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 Status Contact Closure Group 1 Contact Closure Group 2 Music On Hold oMDR e Status Default Active If active the phone system will use the external music source connected to the phone system If not selected the phone system provides a double beep tone repeated every 5 seconds 2 11 3 SMDR The phone system can log call details at the end of each call These records referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR can be output and sent to a specified IP address where they can be collected and processed by 3rd party call logging software PARTNER Version
247. e Answered Outgoing or Missed e Count How many time a call of the same type name and number has occurred Only the details of the most recent call are kept in your call log However the count will indicate if the caller has rung or has been rung several times 4 While you are in the details of a call record the soft key functions available are e Call Call the number shown in the call record You can also do this by pressing the OK button e Contact Add the name and number to your personal directory You can edit the details before they are added e Back Go back to the normal call screen to select another call record PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 55 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 7 4 Deleting a Record You can delete the currently displayed call record 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Delete soft key to delete the currently displayed call log record 7 5 Deleting All Records You can delete all call records from your call log 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arro
248. e 32 character string based on the feature being licensed and the serial number of the SD card plugged into the system control unit It is recommended that you use the Import control to import licenses Alternatively the license keys can be cut and pasted into the Key field Entering licenses manually is liable to errors caused by mis keying of the correct 32 character string PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 97 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 system License Management License Management Type Status Quantity Expiry Date Insel Invalid 0 o 00 This dialog is reached by selecting System License Management from the Manager Admin Tasks pane It is used to enter licenses required for additional telephone system features For example licenses are used to enable additional voicemail ports or the twinning feature e Import Import licenses from a CSV file Each line of the file should contain a license name and the 32 character license key each separated by a comma e Export Export the licenses to a CSV file Only if exportable licenses are present on the system For each license key entered the following information is displayed e Key This is the 32 character license string e Type Information field not editable If the Key is recognized the name of the feature it licenses is shown in this field If Invalid is displayed it indicates that the Key has not been correctly enter
249. e Page 31 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 4 10 Account Codes The Account Code Entry feature is used to enter an account code up to 6 digit for any outside call incoming or outgoing An account code is typically used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes An account code can be either forced or optional When an extension is set up with the forced account code feature the user must enter an account code before they can dial outside calls To create an account code entry button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 12 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To enter an account code using an account code entry button 1 After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button If the button has lights the green light turns on 2 Enter an account code by dialing the account code using the telephone s dial pad You can also use a system or person speed dial number programmed with the account code or press an Auto Dial button pr
250. e Quiet Line Default Off North American only This setting may be required to compensate for signal loss on long lines e Automatic Balance Impedance Match These controls can be used to test the impedance of a line and to then display the best match resulting from the test Testing should be performed with the line connected but the phone system otherwise idle To start testing click Start The phone system will then send a series of signals to the line and monitor the response repeating this at each possible impedance setting Testing can be stopped at any time by clicking Stop When testing is complete Manager displays the best match and ask whether that match should be used for the line If Yes is selected Manager asks whether the that match should be applied to all other analog lines provided by the same analog trunk card or module To conform with the Receive Objective Loudness Rating at distances greater than 2 7km from the central office on the analogue trunks a receive gain of 1 5 db needs to be added e Ring Persistency Default 400ms Range 0 to 2550ms The minimum duration of signal required to be recognized e Ring Off Maximum Default 5000ms Range 0 to 25500ms The time before signaling is regarded as ended e Await Dial Tone Default 3000ms Range 0 to 25500ms Sets how long the system should wait before dialing out e Intermediate Digit Pause Default 500ms Range 0 to 2550ms Pause between digits transmitt
251. e When the number has been are required press the Save soft key e To exit without making any changes press the Cancel soft key 6 4 1 Add a Contact from the Call Log You can add a name and number shown in your call log to your personal speed dials You can only do this if there is Space in your allowed 20 personal speed dials 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if Known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records Press the Details soft key The individual details of the currently selected call record are displayed Press the Contact soft key Use the d up and down arrow keys to switch between the name and number details for the new contact U PR U N Using the telephone keypad and the Bksp soft key you can edit the name and the number When editing the number use the Pause soft key to enter a comma for a 1 second pause in the number dialing 6 When the name and number are set as required press the Save soft key To return without saving the name and number press the Cancel soft key 6 5 Deleting a Contact You can delete a personal speed dial from your contacts 1 Access your personal directory contacts a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select your Personal directory Extensions 1
252. e and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is i
253. e blocked in the system Essential Edition PARTNER Version will support up to 10 SIP trunks which can be assigned across multiple SIP service providers The following features are pre assigned e Last Number Redial e Drop e Voice Mail Access Each extension has voice mailbox assigned with Automatic Voice Mail Coverage turned on PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 9 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e Recall CO hook flash e Auto Line Selection L1 L2 etc PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 10 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 2 Getting Started PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 11 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 2 Getting Started This chapter describes preparation work that should precede installation of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version equipment and software System components Pre requirements e P Office 500v2 control unit with power lead e Base and daughter cards fitted to base cards as necessary to fulfill customer system requirements e Minimum of 1 digital Supervisor telephone provided by the customer e Avaya SD Card registered to customer e Mounting kits installed if units are not to be freestanding a Tools Required 6 Pozidrive No 1 screwdriver for removal of module covers Cutter for cable ties 1 2 3 4 5 Pozidrive No 4 screwdriver Wrist strap for anti static groundi
254. e cradle e To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker e To adjust handset volume press while listening through the handset 1 2 Ringing Patterns ETR phones use the following ring patterns Call Type Ring Pattern ring BEEP ring e If you have a system display telephone the caller s extension number and BEEP ring BEEP name if programmed appears on the display Recalling Call ring BEEP BEEP ring e A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing BEEP BEEP ring back at your extension BEEP BEEP 1 3 Dial Tones There are two different dial tones when you call with a system telephone e Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line e Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 9 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 1 4 Light Patterns Some buttons have a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or pool is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Auto Dial button The meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment are
255. e extensions connected to the fax machine and loudspeaker the mailboxes are used when the extension has calls it does not answer within a set time by default 15 seconds though this can be adjusted for each extension by the system administrator In addition to accessing your mailbox 3 and listening to your messages 40 gt you can perform a range of other actions e Record Your Name 41 gt Your can replace the extension number played to callers with a recording of your name e Set an Access Code 42 You can set an access code that must be entered whenever you try to access your mailbox e Record a Greeting 43 gt You can replace the default greeting asking a caller to you mailbox to leave a message with your own recorded greeting e Switch Voicemail Cover On Off 445 You can select whether voicemail should be used to cover calls ringing at your extension e Forward a Message 45 You can forward a message to another extension or extensions You can also add you own comments to the message A e Call a Message Sender 45 If the message includes the caller ID you can initiate a call back to the message sender e Voicemail Email 46 You can use email to receive notification of a new voicemail message e Visual Voice 47 gt 1408 and 1416 phone users can access their mailbox using a series of menus on the phone s display PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 38 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c
256. e following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya reseller or distributor lL Information Required e Equipment Checklist Draw up an installation checklist of the parts and equipment expected en HAL Procedure e Check for Package Damage Before unpacking any equipment check for any signs of damage that may have occurred during transit If any damage exists bring it to the attention of the carrier e Check the Correct Parts Have Been Delivered Check all cartons against the packing slip and ensure that you have the correct items Report any errors or omissions to the equipment supplier e Retain All Packaging and Documentation While unpacking the equipment retain all the packaging material Fault returns are accepted only if repackaged in the original packaging If performing a staged installation the original packaging will also assist when repacking equipment to be moved to the final install site e Ensure that Anti Static Protection Measures are Observed Ensure that anti static protection measures are observed at all times when handling equipment with exposed electrical circuit boards e Check All Parts Visually inspect each item and check that all the necessary documentation and accessory items have been included Report any errors or omissions to the dealer who supplied the equipment e Check All Documentation Ensure that you read and retain any documentat
257. e left and right P arrow keys to select which type of directory entries you want displayed e All All directory entries e Personal Your personal speed dials e External The system speed dials e Users The names and numbers of other users on the telephone system e Groups The names and numbers of hunt groups on the telephone system c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 When the required entry is displayed press Details to display the name and number 3 Use the d up and down arrow key to switch between the name and the number 4 The range of soft keys available will depend on the type of directory entry e Call 51 Make a call to the stored number e Back Go back to the directory listing e More If the contact is one of your personal directory entries the More soft key will be present to allow you to access the options below It is also present for external directory entries if you have been setup as a system phone user by the system administrator e Edit 51 Edit the name and number e Delete 52 gt Delete the name and number PARTNER User Guide Page 50 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Contacts 1408 1416 Viewing Contacts
258. e of access code if successful To remove your access code 1 Log in to your mailbox 2 Press 04 to change your access code 3 Enter your current access code and press 4 When you are asked to enter your new access code press 5 When you are asked to re enter your access code press Your access code will have been removed PARTNER User Guide Page 42 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Using Voicemail Changing Your Access Code 5 5 Changing Your Greeting By default the system will play a general greeting to callers who are directed to your mailbox stating your extension number or name if you have recorded on and askign them to leave a message after the tone You can override the default greeting with your own personal greeting Login 3 Edit greeting 1 Hear greeting Change greeting lt tone gt speak 3 Save greeting 4 Save ina continuous loop To listen to your greeting 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Press 3 to select the option to edit your greeting 3 Press 1 to hear your greeting If no greeting has been recorded your will hear The message has not yet been recorded You need to record a message To record or change your greeting 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Press 3 to select the option to edit your greeting 3 Press 2 to change your greeting 4 When you are prompted speak your new greeting e The greeting must be longer than 3 seconds e Along approximately 10 se
259. e older equipment these ports do not include a ringing capacitor Therefore for connection to 4 wire analog phones where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors Message waiting is hard wired 51 volt stepped Structured Cabling Line Cord This is an RJ45 to RJ11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ 45 port to a DS phone It can also be used for two wire analog phone extensions m l 1 II RJ45 Fuld 1 4 Meters 3 2 Feet Ds Port Pn Description Pr Rds 1 Not used u Fil 1 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 82 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Physical Ports Not used Not used Signal 1 Signal 2 Not used oO VI A W N Be Not used oO N ono uo A WW N Not used e Part Number 700047871 4 9 10 PRI Port These ports are used for connection to PRI trunk services including El T1 and El R2 PRI Trunk Cable This cable is used to connect from trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment If that equipment does not use RJ 45 sockets the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternative cable used The appropriate signal pin outs and wire colors are detailed below IF Office Metwork Termination FRIBRI Port Point Ras r l45 Meters9 04 Feet Network Termination Rds Rx A White Orange a Rx
260. e park process See the section on Auto Dialing 295 To park a call 1 While on a call press TRANSFER and and dial your own two digit extension number 2 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension To retrieve a parked call 1 Press an intercom button and 6 followed by the extension number of the extension that parked the call 4 12 Call Pickup You can use this feature to answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension This feature is useful for office colleagues who agree to answer each other s calls To create an call pickup button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial 6 followed by the target extension number 5 The current setting of the button will now be Call Pickup followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an call pickup button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit
261. e required external number 6 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Forward O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a call forwarding button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 11 or use the amp up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Forwarding and press Select 5 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 6 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number e To forward using cell phone connect mobile twinning enter followed by the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Forward O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT
262. e the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Any comments or suggestions regarding this document should be sent to wgctechpubs avaya com 2010 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Avaya Unit 1 Sterling Court 15 21 Mundells Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1LZ England Tel 44 0 1707 392200 Fax 44 0 1707 376933 Web http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 118 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 AVAYA IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Quick Installation Guide Issue 1a 30 January 2010 2010 Avaya SME Communications All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases Documentation Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Link Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites refe
263. e to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records Press the Details soft key The individual details of the currently selected call record are displayed Press the Contact soft key Use the d up and down arrow keys to switch between the name and number details for the new contact Mm KR U N Using the telephone keypad and the Bksp soft key you can edit the name and the number When editing the number use the Pause soft key to enter a comma for a 1 second pause in the number dialing 6 When the name and number are set as required press the Save soft key To return without saving the name and number press the Cancel soft key 6 5 Deleting a Contact You can delete a personal speed dial from your contacts 1 Access your personal directory contacts a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select your Personal directory Extensions 10 and 11 can also add edit and delete entries from the External directory c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name to display only matching entries d Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 Locate the required entry 3 Press
264. eakerphone by pressing SPEAKER or SPKR and then hanging up the handset e If you are using the speakerphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset The speaker and microphone are turned off e On ETR phones to turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press MIC HFAI This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you On 1400 Series phones to do this press the MUTE button 3 4 Hands Free Answer on Intercom When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your telephone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your telephone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system telephone by pressing an intercom button and and then either dialing an extension number You cannot make a voice signaled call to an extension that has the Cell Phone Connect feature active The call will not appear at the extension 1 The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your telephone is idle On ETR phones use the HFAI button on 1400 Series phones use the MUTE button Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for the duration of the call 2 1f you are already on a call any additional voice signa
265. eakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines e Avoid placing your telephone in areas with high background noise caused by sources such as motor vehicles manufacturing equipment loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment or heater and air conditioning fans e Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through e Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your telephone system e When talking always face your telephone and stay within two feet of it e Place your telephone at least six inches 15 cm away from the edge of your desk e If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation e In conference rooms a separate speakerphone is recommended since the built in speaker on a system telephone is designed for individual use To make a call without lifting the handset 1 Press SPEAKER or SPKR to get a dial tone 2 Dial the number you hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset To switch modes e If you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to the sp
266. ebruary 2010 Administration Tasks Additional Administration Tasks e Transfer Return Ring Default 4 20 seconds Range 1 to 180 seconds Sets the delay after which any call transferred by the user that remains unanswered should return to the user A return call will continue ringing and does not follow any forwards or go to voicemail Transfer return will occur if the user has an available call appearance button Transfer return is not applied if the transfer is to a hunt group that has queuing enabled e Outside Conference Denial Default Allowed e Ring on Transfer Default Active If selected callers being transferred hear ringing during the transfer process If not selected the caller will hear music on hold e Recall Timer Duration Default 500 Range 25 to 800 milliseconds This is the flash pulse width used for analog trunks and T1 trunks e Toll Call Prefix Default O or 1 Required Before Area Code Allows selection between O or 1 Required Before Area Code or Area Code and Number Only e STUN Settings for Network These settings are used if SIP trunks are added to the phone system s configuration using the SIP Trunk Administration 62 gt dialog These settings are necessary to allow SIP connections from the network on which the phone system is attached to reach the public network on which the SIP provider is located e The following fields can be completed either manually or the phone system can attempt to automaticall
267. echnical Bulletins L Note The use of Windows 2000 operating systems is no longer tested or supported with Essential Edition PARTNER Version applications The following Windows applications are used to program and maintain an IP Office system They run on PCs connected to the IP Office system via its LAN interface These applications are all provided on the IP Office Administrator Applications CD and don t require any licenses Typically all these applications would be installed onto a single PC usually a laptop in order to ensure that each is available on site if required Due to the nature of the applications this should be a secure PC e IP Office Manager This tool is used to access all parts of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration Manager is also used to upgrade the software files used by the system When running is can also act as the TFTP server from which upgradable Avaya phones can request new software e Embedded Voicemail Also called Integral Voicemail this application is supported by the IP Office 500v2 control unit It is pre installed on the SD Card to store messages and prompts Embedded Voicemail supports basic voicemail mailbox operation simple auto attendants and hunt group announcements e System Status Application This application can be used to inspect the current status of Essential Edition PARTNER Version lines and extensions and to view records of recent alarms and events It runs as a J a
268. ecseeeeeeseaeeees 24 4 3 Absent Text M SSQQES cccccccsssseeeeeeeseesseeeeseeseaeees 25 4 4 Forwarding CalllS ccccccccssececeeceesseeceeeeseeseceeeeeseeeees 26 4 5 Call Coverage neen a E E 27 4 6 AUTO DIAG ee een 29 4 7 Locking Your Extension nuersesnnnenneennnnnen nennen 30 4 8 System Speed Dials ici ies nase 30 4 9 Personal Speed DiallS ccccccccccceceseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 31 4 10 Account COdES ccccccccecccseesseeeceeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeeeeeeees 32 4 11 Parking Cals eisene On eee ee eee ere 33 412 Call el 40 ss ee a 33 4 18 D0 NOL DIStUrbe 222 er 34 4 14 Voice Mailbox Transfer uusu42444sRnn nenne nennen 35 5 Using Voicemail 5 1 Accessing Your Mailbox u 4400B4enn nenn nennen 39 5 2 Listening to Your Messages 44444444mnnnnnn nennen 40 5 3 Record Your NAMme ccccsssceccceeseeeceesseeeceeeeeeseeeeees 41 5 4 Changing Your Access Code u004nnnnnnennennn 42 5 5 Changing Your Greeting cccccccccceseseeseesseeeeeeeeeeees 43 5 6 Voicemail Coverage OnN Off usnnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnn 44 5 7 Forwarding a M SSQQE cccccsseeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeseaeees 45 5 8 Calling a Message Sendel cccccceceecessesseeeeeeeeeeees 45 9 9 VOICEMall EmMa nri 46 SB JON WISUAL VOICE anne nen aha 47 6 Contacts 1408 1416 6 1 Viewing Contacts DetallS ccccccccceeesssssseeeeeeeeeeees 50 6
269. ecure the card 3 4 Going Live 1 With power still off insert the SD card in the first control unit rear panel slot 2 Connect the installation laptop via an R45 lead to the LAN socket on the control unit rear panel 3 Apply power to the control unit 4 As the control unit goes through its start up cycle make the following checks e The CPU LED changes to green rear of unit e The System SD LED changes to green rear of unit PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 20 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Installation Going Live e The LAN connection LED flashes and then settles to steady green rear of unit e Card module front lamps light randomly but after approximately 30 second the No 1 lamps flash together once every 5 seconds front of unit e If the control unit does not behave as above power it down and ensure all base card connectors are fully engaged e If retry fails call Avaya support or refer to the Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Reference Manual for more detailed installation instructions and technical information 5 Start up Manager on the installation laptop Avaya IP Office Manager The splash screen displays briefly as Manager application starts Version 8 0 011021 No response or action is required 3 5 Manager Responses Manager running on the laptop will detect Essential Edition PARTNER Version has started up correctly Duri
270. ed In order to use this feature your system administrator must configure your phone system to use email and enter your email address into the system configuration If this has not been done your will hear Email is not enabled on this mailbox whenever you try to use an email option Login 0 1 Forward All to Email 0 2 Send Email Alerts 0 3 Tum Email Mode Off To switch on email notification You can set up your mailbox so that any messages received in future are forwarded to your email address The messages are not stored in your voicemail mailbox 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Select the required type of email notification e Fora email alert press O2 e To have the message forwarded to your email press 01 To forward a message to email If you are listening to a message you can send the message to your email either whilst listening to it or immediately after it has been played 1 During or immediately after playing a message press 6 2 Press 1 The message is forwarded to your email address To switch off email notification If you have chosen any of the email notification options you can switch them off from your telephone 1 Log into your mailbox 2 Press 03 You hear a confirmation message to tell you that the option is now turned off PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 46 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Using Voicemail Voicemail Email 5 10 Visual Voice 14
271. ed e Status This field shows the status of the license e Unknown is shown for newly entered licenses until the configuration is sent to the phone system and then reloaded again e Valid is shown if the license key matches the SD card serial number e Invalid is shown if the license key does not match the SD card serial number e Dormant is shown if the license key is valid but is conditional on another license that is not present e Obsolete is shown if the license key is valid but the license is no longer used by the version of software installed in the phone system e Quantity Information field not editable This field indicates how many items are enabled by the license The meaning of this will vary depending on the feature being licensed e Expiry Date Information field not editable Some licenses have an expiry date This field will indicate that date 5 7 Additional Processes 5 7 1 Upgrading the System Upgrade is performed using the Upgrade Wizard tool within the IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version application File Advanced Upgrade It displays the systems it can detect their existing software level and the levels it has available PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 98 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration Additional Processes e Check IP Office Technical Bulletins Whenever upgrading check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletins for
272. ed Configure Allowed List Extensions Disallowed List Extensions Name IPOffice_1 Emergency List Configured 911 IP Address 192 168 421 Extensions MOT Configured for VoiceMail MONE vee EM a Extensions excluded from Directory Listing NONE Mode PARTNER Edition iret Status Offline Fealuic Key N A Exlensiurs assigned fur Twinning NONE You may toggle between the two administration windows by Activating or deactivating menu option View Hide Admin Tasks iw Avaya IP Office Ko Manager wy System Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition P Hide Admin Tasks Baq 1 What wou TFTF Log Please review the curt Administration tasks that can only be accessed from the Admin Tasks pane are detailed in the Additional Administration Tasks 6 section 2 3 Remote Admin Password WARNING Password Change Required New Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems use default security settings AS a minimum you should change the default Remote Administrator Password Failure to do so will render the system potentially insecure This option enables you to change the Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit access password This password must be used whether you are using manager locally or remotely The password controls remote or local access to the system to make administrative changes to the overall set up such as changes to the configuration or equipment The administration password can on
273. ed are shown in blue A graphic representation of the hardware shows used slots and type of card fitted in them Hot Links What would you like to do Change Remote Administration Password 24 enables you to set 245 or change a system control unit access password Change System Settings 26 used to alter system parameters such as hardware identities and system password 24 gt Create Calling Lists 27 provides convenient tables to assign users permissions Administer Speed Dial 31 enables you to allocate speed dial codes User Settings 33 used to manage user configuration and user membership Configure User Button Programming 34 allows configuration of button functions for each different type of extension handset Manage Hunt Groups 42 gt assigns extensions to groups Administer Auto Attendant 43 used to set up system responses automatic greetings and routing of out of hours calls Setup Auxiliary Equipment 45 gt administers external items that interface the telephone system such as door locks phones admission control Update Trunk Configuration 48 administers trunk connections installation settings PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 22 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Using Administration Windows 2 1 Using Administration Windows os e Two Icons at bottom left of the window enable you to return to the Home Page or displ
274. ed as the source for upgrading the contents of the System SD card PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 18 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Installation SD Card Various IP Office 500v2 features and applications including a license key are required for the system configuration These are stored on the SD card The serial number also Known as the feature key is printed on the SD prefixed with either SN or FK The SD Card can be backed up and copied The Manager application 7 enables updates and changes to be made to the SD Card content Separate instructions for these tasks are contained in the IP Office Administrator Tool Manager user Manual 3 3 Fitting Base Cards At this stage fit all the internal IP Office 500 cards before powering up the control unit These processes should be performed with no power to the control unit General Notes The first left hand slot of the control unit must have a DS or ETR ports base card fitted This is because in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version extensions 10 and 11 ports 1 and 2 must support digital supervisor telephones Remaining cards can be fitted in any order into any available slots The only exception is the IP Office 500 4 Port Expansion card which can only be installed in right hand slot 4 It is recommended that cards are fitted from left to right otherwise automatic system number allocation could be inconvenient There are restri
275. ed to the line e Long CLI Line Default Off The CLI signal on some long analog lines can become degraded and is not then correctly detected If you are sure that CLI is being provided but not detected selecting this option may resolve the problem e Modem Enabled Default Off The first analog trunk IP500 Analog Trunk cards can be set to modem operation V32 with V42 error correction This allows the trunk to answer incoming modem calls and be used for system maintenance When on the trunk can only be used for analog modem calls The default system short code 9000 can be used to toggle this setting e Mains Hum Filter PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 50 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks e Mains Hum Filter Default Off If mains hum interference on the lines is detected or suspected this settings can be used to attempt to remove that interference Useable with ATM16 trunks and IP500 ATM4U trunks Options are Off 50Hz or 60Hz e Voice e Voice Recording Not available in current version e Echo Cancellation Default 16ms Allows settings of Off 8 16 32 64 and 128 milliseconds The echo cancellation should only be adjusted as high as required to remove echo problems Setting it to a higher value than necessary can cause other distortions e Gains These settings should not be adjusted without guidance from the line provider e A gt D Default
276. eded to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system e Personal speed dials do not override any dialing restrictions that apply to an extension e 1408 and 1416 phone users can view use and edit their personal speed dials through the phone s CONTACTS 50 menu To use a personal speed dial 1 At dial tone or whenever you want to dial a number press FEATURE and dial the two digit personal speed dial code between 80 and 99 2 The stored number is dialed To edit personal speed dials ETR 18D 34D 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press Feature and the speed dial number to be programmed which must be between 80 and 99 4 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 5 Enter the external number The number can be up to 28 characters in length The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Inserts a 1 5 second pause O R Send a hook switch flash signal 6 To remove the existing number press MIC HFAI Stop dialing e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To edit personal speed dials 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Tel
277. edirected using a programmed button Before you can automatically forward calls you need to assign the feature to a button with lights The button can then be used to turn call forwarding on and off as required e Selected users may also be able to do remote call forwarding where they forward their calls to an external number If that is the case consult your system administrator you can use your personal speed dials 31 gt as the forwarding destination e Some users may also be able to use cell phone connect again consult your system administrator With cell phone connect the call will ring at both your extension and at the remote call forwarding destination This is sometimes called mobile twinning To create a call forwarding button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 11 4 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination number for the call coverage calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number e To forward using cell phone connect mobile twinning enter followed by the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains th
278. eedback conference hold and transfer are similar The only difference is Voice Messaging that is supplied on the Essential Edition and uses the Essential Edition TUI Do get anything new SIP trunks full PRI T1 64 party conferencing account code entry automatic daylight savings and more Which cards are supported on the IP Office 500v2 in IP PARTNER Version mode ETR6 Combination Card ATM4 DS8 Phone 8 and maximum of 1 expansion unit DS16 or Phone 16 What trunk interfaces does the new ETR card support The ETR Card can be fitted with the ATM4 daughter card with power fail or universal PRI daughter card all channels available maximum 1 T1 PRI per system Which voice messaging platform can I use in IP PARTNER Version mode Essential Edition only It utilizes the Essential Edition TUI and is different from PARTNER voicemail TUI Badger Communications Durand W1 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com gt onarvene ACS IP PARTNER Version What is the maximum capacity Total capacity is 48 stations and 56 trunks o 48 stations 18 ETR phones maximum o 12 analog Trunks ATM4 on ETR Card or Combination Card ATMA o 24 T1 PRI Daughter card on ETR o 20 SIP trunks requires the Combination Card for the VCM channels Can add more messaging ports to the IP PARTNER Version Yes 2 voice ports are included for simultaneous access and you can add ports in increments of 2 up to a maximu
279. eeeeeeeeeeeeas 14 2 2 Partner Constraints ccccccccccccecesseseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 15 2 3 System Components uunnesessssnnnnnnsnnnnnnnneenennnnnnnennnnn 16 22 COMMON aan 17 PION zur E 18 20 Base Cards Amen el 19 2 7 UNECO S ea E 20 28 SIE Cards ae ni 21 2 9 External Expansion Module 4444400Rnn nennen 21 2 10 Supported Phones sss0000nsnnnnnnneeeeeennnnneennnnn 22 2 11 Dial Planes ee 23 2 12 Core Software amp BIN Files uuu00nnneennnnn 23 2 13 Power Supplies 02022200uuueeeeennnnnnennnnnnnneenennnnennennnnn 24 2 13 1 Power Supply Backup eeenennn 24 3 Installing PARTNER 3 1 IP Office Managern ee 28 32 Gelllng Sl lledsrrzuu nsn a ar N 29 3 2 1 Unpackingesn een 29 3 2 2 Environmental Requirements uun 29 3 2 3 Read the Documentation ccccccccsseeeeeeeeees 30 3 2 4 Space REQuireMent cccccccsssseseeeeeesseeeeeees 30 3 2 5 Tools and Parts REQuired ccccsesseeeseeeeeeees 31 3 2 6 Cabling and Cables ccccceccccceceeeeesessesseeeeees 32 32 7 Gl OUMOING re ae 33 3 2 8 Rack MoOURLING as ous eesti einen Ais eee 33 3 2 9 Wall MOUNINO ee 36 3 2 10 Lightning Protection Out of Building CONDECION S c f cosets een 38 3 3 Install Ovenviewia ana ae 38 34 G rd Installalonssunnstense ea 39 STORNO oaea 41 3 0 CONNECCION araa N N 42 3 7 IE IMAlACHONS e E eae 42 4 System Compone
280. elected Destination Where incoming calls with matching digits should be routed The drop down list contains the extensions and groups on the IP Office system Ring Pattern Sets the ring pattern used for external calls to the user PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 63 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 13 4 1 SIP Trunk Advanced These settings are used for configuration of individual SIP channels and more advanced SIP trunk settings Trunks SIP Trunk Administration Trunk Mame SIP Trunk Parameters VOIP Parameters Proxy Server Address oOo Compression mode Automatic Select YOIP Silense Suppression I Mobility Caller ID Format None Call Initiation Timeout 4 Reinvite Supported d Use Tel URI C DTMF Support RFC2833 we Use Offered Codec F Registration Expiry mir Channel Setup Channel Appearance VMS Delay Day VMS Delay Night VMS Schedule 19 2 Z Never 10 Never Never Never Never Dial Plan Incoming Number Filter Result Acton Incoming Number Result Include In Dial Plan H Dial Fl ON Dial IN Dial M Dial Dial Dial e Trunk Parameters e Proxy Server Address In exceptional circumstances the IP Address of the proxy server may be explicitly identified as either a different IP Address or a different domain address resolvable by DNS e Mobility Caller ID Format This option corresponds to the standard draft ietf sip priva
281. elephones e BM32 Buttons e Digital station connects to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version via a DS port PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 22 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Overview Dial Plan 2 11 Dial Plan Essential Edition PARTNER Version has a fixed 2 digit dial plan The extensions are numbered from 10 to 57 which constitutes a 2 digit dial plan Short codes are used to access the different features e 6 Call Pickup e 66 Group Call Pickup e 68 Directed Line Pickup e 7 Group access e 8 Idle Line Pickup The dial plan below identifies the valid digit sequences that can be dialled from Essential Edition PARTNER Version 0 Dial Physical Extn 1st Port 10 57 Station extensions 610 657 Directed call pickup 661 664 Group call pickup pickup groups 1 4 6801 6864 Directed line pickup 70 Loudspeaker Page 71 74 Group calling calling groups 1 4 76 Modem RAS port 771 776 Hunt group hunt groups 1 6 777 Voicemail Collect 778 Remote Voicemail access 7801 Auto Attendant access 7811 Record Auto Attendant Morning Greeting 7821 Record Auto Attendant Afternoon Greeting 7831 Record Auto Attendant Evening Greeting 7841 Record Auto Attendant Menu Greeting 7851 Record Auto Attendant Out of Hours Greeting 801 864 Idle line pickup 9 Dial access to Idle Line Preference Voice signal Intercom only 70 Loudspeaker Page Page Calling Group 1
282. elete the currently displayed call log record 7 5 Deleting All Records You can delete all call records from your call log 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Del All soft key to delete all your call log records 7 6 Adding a Record to Your Contacts You can add a name and number shown in your call log to your personal speed dials You can only do this if there is Space in your allowed 20 personal speed dials 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records Press the Details soft key The individual details of the currently selected call record are displayed Press the Contact soft key Use the d up and down arrow keys to switch between the name and number details for the new contact UO FB U N Using the telephone keypad and the Bksp soft key you can edit the name and the number When editing the number use the Pause soft key to enter a comma for a 1 second pause in the number dialing 6 When the name and number are set as required press the Save soft key To return without sa
283. els PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 57 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Trunks Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Lard Module Number of Channels Analog Trunk Analog Trunk z PR 24 LU niversall T1 Trunk Channel Setup Channel Appearance ID In Service Coverage Destination Ring Pattern Dut OF Service None Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service DID Mapping Table DID Number Incoming CLI Destination Ring Patten eNews 1 e T1 Trunk Channel Setup This table is used to set which trunk channels are available for use Channel For information only not editable Appearance ID Default Auto assigned Range 2 to 9 digits Used for configuring Line Appearances with button programming The line appearance ID must be unique and not match any extension number In Service Default Out of Service Selects whether the trunk channel is in use Coverage Destination Default None If set to None calls on the channel only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the channels Appearance ID Alternatively a specific extension hunt group calling group or the auto attendant can be selected to also receive call alerting for incoming calls on the channel e When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 42 group Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pa
284. em incorrectly PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 40 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Button Programming e Manager will display a warning if it estimates that the user s current text for some buttons may exceed the label Space of the phone type e If no text label has been set the default label for the action currently assigned to the button is passed to the DESI application e Once the labels are shown in the DESI application the label text can be changed 1 Load the configuration of the IP Office system for which you want to print button labels 2 Select Tools and then Print Button Labels Ui ButtonLabelPrintForm Mame Extri20 Extn202 E tn203 Estn204 Estn205 Estn206 Extrni20 Estn205 Estn209 Estn210 Extr211 Extn212 Extriz 3 Extriz 4 Exin215 Extn 6 e Name Extn Phone Type Avaya 1616 Avaya D62 Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset Unknown digital handset ER Expansion Modules al al v BM32x3 v JAB _ E0242 nr SEES IbLe decals Ie Ls These are the user name and extension number details of the users in the IP Of
285. en a Configuration 108 The same action is performed by the k d icon in the Main Toolbar PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 78 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu Select IP Office ae Mame IP Address Type Version Release 6 0 C 00E00705219A 192 168 42 1 IP500 2 6 0 11014 TCP Discovery Progress Unit Broadcast Address The dialog shown above lists all available Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration files Select the one you want to use by checking the box to the left of the filename The OK button then becomes active When a file is opened it is loaded into manager memory The Select IP Office dialog is also used for other actions such as reboot and sending a configuration If the unit required is not found the Unit Broadcast Address can be changed and then Refresh clicked To change the TCP addresses scanned select File Preferences Discovery 80 and enter the required addresses in the IP Search Criteria Known Units Displays all configuration files found by the Manager application This includes unassociated files that may be stored on the Manager system and or files present on the WAN if the Manager laptop is connected 3 1 2 Close Configuration This command closes the current configuration file loaded in Manager memory without saving it 3 1 3 Save Configuration The File Save Configuration command saves the amended conf
286. ence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol knowledge However all IP Office installers and maintainers must understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues For IP Office 4 0 and higher the System Status Application has been added to provide more easily interpreted information than is provided by Monitor PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 76 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Associated Applications e Two versions of Monitor are included in the IP Office Admin applications suite one for IP Office 4 0 systems and one for pre 4 0 IP Office systems Care should be taken to ensure that the correct version is used when monitoring an IP Office system DVD lt APPSDVD gt Languages English only License x No license required PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements RAM Server OS a Hard Disk Free Space 2003 Server Processor 2008 Server Pentium Client OS Celeron XP Professional Windows 7 Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office System Monitor Monitor sysmonitor exe 4 8 4 TAPI Operating System Support UDP 50794 IP Office TAPI is a client PC application that allows TAPI compliant applications to interact with the Essential Edition PARTNER Version The IP Office TAPI software can be used i
287. enneen 51 6 3 Editing a Contat are En 51 6 4 Adding a New Contact ccccccccccseeeeceeseeseneeeseeeeesaaes 52 6 4 1 Add a Contact from the Call Log 52 6 5 Deleting a CONtACL ccc ceccccceeceeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaees 52 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Contents 7 Call Log 1408 1416 7 1 Using the Call L0G an san a 54 7 2 Making a Call from the Call LOg ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 7 3 Viewing Call Details us 4444400200 Rennen 55 7 4 Deleting a Record 02 2s0020000020n0nnnnnnnnnnn nn 56 7 9 Deleting All Records sun 56 7 6 Adding a Record to Your Contacts 0 56 8 Phone Settings 1403 1416 8 TA Menu Alo Exits 22 2 ee 58 8 2 Visual AIEN el 59 8 3 Audible Alerting ccccccsssececcessececseeeseceseesseeseeneeneees 59 GARNO O OUN Aes een 59 8 5 Display Brightness iena ai aiaiai 60 8 6 Display Conlrast 2 2 E 60 8 7 Display Language uu02220s02000nonnnnno nennen nennen nennen 60 8 8 EITOr TONGS in een N 61 8 9 Bull on Llicksun steel 61 8 10 Default Handsfree Audio Path un 61 DOSK ee een ee 63 Page 3 Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 1 ETR Telephones PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 5 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 ETR Telephones 1 ETR Telephones The IP Office PARTNER Version s
288. ense requirements 11 PC requirements 11 Music on hold 45 46 N Name 33 40 NIC 81 NIC IP NIC Subnet 81 Night service 39 42 Number of backup files 83 O Offline commands 84 Open a configuration file 100 Open an offline configuration 102 Open file command 85 Operating system 11 Organising groups 42 Outgoing call bar 27 33 Outgoing call restriction 67 P Password administrator 24 change 24 default 14 system 24 26 39 PC requirements 12 Phone door 45 type 40 Ping commands 7 Preparing Manager 13 Printing labels 40 Processor 11 12 Programming button features 37 handset buttons 34 system features 39 Q Quick links 16 R RAM 11 Read a configuration file 100 Reboot 89 Reboot time 86 Receive configuration file 88 Refresh 78 Remote Admin password 24 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Index Request login on save 83 Ring on transfer 46 Ring pattern 48 51 57 67 Ringing options 40 RJ45 cable 7 S Save configuration 79 Save configuration file 83 Save File As dialog 79 SD Card 22 72 84 88 92 100 folders 8 format 94 insertion 90 Optional 8 removal 90 SD 8 slot 8 90 System 8 Secure communication 83 Security Administrator 83 Select change directory 81 directories 81 IP Office 78 IP Office menu 78 manager 14 visual preferences 82 Send config file 79 Send config menu 79 Send configuration file 86 Server SMTP 70 Service User 95 Setup
289. ephone Programming When displayed press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Personal Speed Dial When displayed press Select 4 At the Code prompt enter between 80 and 99 to select the speed dial entry that you want to edit 5 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 6 Enter the external number and press Enter The number can be up to 28 characters in length Press Clear to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause Inserts a 1 5 second pause O R Send a hook switch flash signal e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 31 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 4 10 Account Codes The Account Code Entry feature is used to enter an account code up to 6 digit for any outside call incoming or outgoing An account code is typically used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes An account code can be either forced or optional When an extension is set up with the forced account code feature the user must enter an account code before they can dial outside calls To create an account code entry button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the butt
290. er is 2 higher than the software level of the system core software with which it is released For example IP Office Manager R8 0 is released with IP Office R6 0 core software Document Conventions The following font attributes are used in this document e Bold Used to emphasize identify commands or highlight menu selections e Italic Used to identify dialog fields windows or documents e Courier Used for code listings file names and command line content How this document is organized This documentation is divided into several parts as follows e Introduction e Preparing Manager e Administration tasks contains descriptions of the various actions to make changes to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version System This part describes general activities available from the Administration Window Interface e Menu commands describes administration tasks and actions available from the application main drop down menu bar e Configuration File management the actions described in this section cover activities concerned with organizing IP Office configuration files that may not necessarily be Essential Edition PARTNER Version System files Some of these tasks can be undertaken off line e Appendices Supplementary Manager information 1 1 1 SD Card The Avaya SD card exercises central control over the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system and acts as the licence authorization for the control unit The SD card is inserted into
291. er is a member are overridden if they also appear in the allowed numbers lists emergency number list of which the user is a member and also by marked system speed dials 31 There are 8 lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits O to 9 and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a single digit wildcard PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 28 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Calling Lists system List Management Allowed Lists Disallowed List Number Telephone Number tn list Disallowed Lists Emergency Number Lists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries LL sl nl Valid digits are 0 3 H and 7 Wildcard Assign Users to list Selected Users Add gt Add All gt gt lt Remove lt lt Remove All 2 5 3 Emergency Number List You can enter 10 emergency phone numbers into this list This list is applied to all users and overrides any dialing restrictions that may also be applied to the users By default 911 is already added to the emergency list and cannot be removed PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 29 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Wa Avaya IP Office R Manager 000070521 9A 6 0 1101 9 Administrator Administrator EIER Fie Edit Yew Help i System List Management Allowed Lists Emergency List
292. es if the other extension doesn t answer press AutCB automatic callback to have that extension call you after it is next used and then hangup To make an external call 1 Pick up the handset The green light next to the button is on steady and you will hear the dial tone 2 Dial the telephone number The dialled number will appear on the display Using the last number redial 1400 Series phones users can use the fixed REDIAL button on their phone to view details of previous calls and redial those number 1 Lift the handset 2 Press FEATURE 05 The digits are displayed as they are dialed To create a last number redial button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 05 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Last Number Redial e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 16 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Basic Call Handling Making Calls 3 2 Answering Calls You can answer telephone calls that are ringing your extension or at another extension If you regularly pick up calls for a specific extension you can program a call pickup 334 but
293. es and click OK i Remember you are changing the password for accessing the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system to which you are attached not the manager application System Password Once Essential Edition PARTNER Version is installed the responsibility for setting this password rests with the customer You should point this fact out and if required make the change before you leave as follows Change system password using Manager 1 Click the hot link Change System Settings PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 88 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration Changing the Default Password 2 In the System Parameters box change system password Field accepts digits only Customer s administrator using a telephone handset 1 Dial 403 2 Dial four chosen digits to set the system password 5 3 SD Card Actions The SD Card exercises the central control of Essential Edition PARTNER Version There are a number of actions that can be taken as part of IP Office administration as follows e Shutdown and start up an SD card e Format an SD card e Read write and delete files on an SD card e Copy Recreate an SD card e Backup an SD card 5 3 1 Removing SD Cards h SD Card Removal SD cards should never be removed while being used Though the SD card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an SD card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard The IP O
294. es is recommended as it then provides analog power failure support for one trunk extension Each daughter card is supplied two pre fitted metal pillars and 3 plastic pillars Two screws and washers for final attachment of the metal pillars to the base card are also included IP Office 500 Analog Trunk Daughter Card This card can be added to IP Office 500 base cards It enables that base card to then also support four analog loop start trunks e When fitted to an IP Office 500 Analog Phone 8 base card the combination supports 1 power failure extension to trunk loop start only connection e Maximum 2 per IP Office 500v2 control unit IP Office 500 PRI U Trunk Daughter Card This card can be added to an IP Office 500 base card The card is a universal card that can be configured in software for El PRI T1 robbed bit T1 PRI or EIR2 The card is available in single and dual port variants e Maximum 4 per IP Office 500v2 control unit e The IP Office 500 PRI U card supports El T1 and E1 R2 PRI modes The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system supports 8 unlicensed B channels on each IP Office 500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected require IP Office 500 Universal PRI Additional Channels licenses added to the configuration These additional channels consume the licenses based on which additional channels are configured as in service from port 9 of slot 1 upward
295. es of damage Main Building Control Unit Secondary Building eo perc CO Analog Lines Analog Module i Phone Module DS Module External Contact Closure Device Earthed Ducted I Cabling 1 Cabling Requirements e Cables of different types for example trunk lines extensions ground and power connections should be kept separate e All cabling between building should be enclosed in grounded ducting Ideally this ducting should be buried e A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building This should be three point protection tip ring and ground Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time DS Phone Extensions ITWLinx towerMAX DS 2 e Connection from the expansion module to the Supports up to 4 connections phone must be via a surge protector at each end h Digital Station Expansion This device was previously and via the primary protection point in each module DS ports only referred to as the Avaya 146E building e The IP Office expansion module and control unit and IROB devices must be connected to the Analog Phone Extensions I P Office Barrier Box protective ground point in their building Supports a single connection A Phones Expansion module Maximum of 16 on any expans
296. es to steady green 4 Card module front lamps light randomly but after approximately 30 second the No 1 lamps flash together once every 5 seconds Connect the laptop via an R45 lead to the LAN socket on the control unit rear panel Switch on the laptop and start the Manager application It should automatically recognize the control unit and the software controlling it IP Office Manager can now be used to configure the extensions and trunk lines See IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration Toll User Manual PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 41 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 6 Connections If the site already has a patch panel for all outside lines and extensions you should be able to use the existing wiring to install the system hardware and connect telephones to the system yourself During control unit startup e Extensions and Users A user is automatically created for each physical extension port detected in the system Users are assigned extension numbers starting from 201 User names take the form Extn201 Extn202 e Hunt Group A single hunt group 200 called Main is created and the first 10 users are placed into that hunt group as members e Incoming Call Routes Two default incoming call routes are created Voice calls are routed to the hunt group Main Installing Telephones After you have installed the IP Office 500v2 control unit and have conne
297. ess or on the volume button while active on the handset or speaker to adjust the volume To adjust the volume of the ringer press or on the volume button while the handset and speaker are inactive Mute Press Mute to mute a call in progress To take a call off mute press Mute again Press Speaker to use the speakerphone To take a call off speakerphone lift the handset Feature Buttons and There are 3 buttons that can be programmed by the system administrator as either call line Call Line appearance buttons or feature buttons Press a call line appearance button to make or answer a Appearance Buttons call or resume a call on hold Press a labeled feature button to enable or disable that feature Typically two buttons are administered as call line appearance buttons and one button is administered as a feature button The feature button provides access to an Avaya call management system feature that has been administered for your extension The green LED next to the feature button indicates if the feature is currently on or off If the light is on the feature is on 4 6 4 ETR34D This phone is only supported by an ETR6 card in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system All Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phone are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone AUX socket The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system supports up to maximum 4 ETR34D
298. ess the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 11 or use the amp up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Forwarding and press Select 5 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 6 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination extension number for the call coverage calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number e To forward using cell phone connect mobile twinning enter followed by the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Forward O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 26 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features Forwarding Calls 4 5 Call Coverage Call coverage is used to redirect all intercom transferred DID and outside calls on lines assigned to your or to another extension When call coverage is in use covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings set by the system administrator Intercom transferred DID and outside calls on lines assigned owners
299. essage eaa a no H Send 1 Old messages 3 Prepend message lt tone gt record comment Saved messages To forward a message 1 When you are listening to a message press 6 e To forward the message without adding a comment press 2 e To forward the message after adding a comment at the start press 3 Record your comment after the tone Record your comment and press to finish recording 2 Enter the extension number to which you want to forward the message and press e If you want to send the message to more than one mailbox enter each mailbox extension number separated by a 3 Press to finish addressing and forward the message 5 8 Calling a Message Sender You can call the person who left a message in your mailbox Both internal and external callers can be called back For external callers you can only reply if their caller ID was available when the message was left Login Hew messages played Return call 11 Old messages Saved messages To reply to a voice message 1 While you listen to a message press If a caller ID was received when the message was left a call will be placed to that number PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 45 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 5 9 Voicemail Email You can have notification of new messages sent to your email address The notification can be a simple alert to tell you that you have a message or a copy of the voicemail message if requir
300. et a timed shut down of between 5 minutes and 24 hours 1 Select Features Phone User System Admin 2 Enter your IP Office user login code 3 From the menu select System Shutdown 4 Select a time period for the shutdown It must be in between 5 minutes and 24 hours 5 Press Done and then Confirm to begin the shutdown 5 7 5 Rebooting the System You can use IP Office Manager to reboot an IP Office system TA OHA 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Reboot 2 From the Select IP Office menu locate and select the IP Office system you want to reboot 3 Click OK You are prompted to enter a valid user name and password 4 The type of reboot can then be selected Reboot Reboot Immediate when Free O tines E E e Reboot Select when the reboot should occur e Immediate Send the configuration and then reboot the IP Office e When Free Send the configuration and reboot the IP Office when there are no calls in progress This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Timed The same as When Free but waits for a specific time after which it then wait for there to be no calls in progress The time is specified by the Reboot Time This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Reboot Time This setting is used when the reboot mode Timed is selected It sets the time for the IP Office reboot If the time is after midnight the IP Office normal daily backup is canceled e C
301. etimes called mobile twinning e DID calls can be forwarded e You receive a slow interrupted intercom dialling tone when call forwarding is active To create a call forwarding button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 11 4 At the Call Coverage Orig prompt enter the extension number for which the button is being programmed 5 At the Call Coverage Dest prompt enter the destination number for the call coverage calls e To forward to an external number enter the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number e To forward using cell phone connect mobile twinning enter followed by the personal speed dial 80 to 99 that contains the required external number 6 The current setting of the button will now be set to Call Forward O lt covered extension gt D lt destination extension gt e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a call forwarding button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt pr
302. example e Do not match your extension number e Do not use a sequence of digits for example 1234 e Do not use the same repeated digit for example 1111 e If you forget your access code your system administrator can clear it Login 04 Change access code enter current access code Ly enter new access code at Ly confirm new access code To change your access code 1 Login 40 to your mailbox 2 Press 04 to change your access code 3 Enter your current access code and press If you have no current access code just press 4 Enter your new access code followed by The access code must be between 4 and 15 digits in length 5 Re enter your new access code followed by The access code will now be changed e The system will prompt you if the codes do not match or is not acceptable It will also confirm the change of access code if successful To remove your access code 1 Log in to your mailbox 2 Press 04 to change your access code 3 Enter your current access code and press 4 When you are asked to enter your new access code press 5 When you are asked to re enter your access code press Your access code will have been removed PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 42 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Using Voicemail Changing Your Access Code 5 5 Changing Your Greeting By default the system will play a general greeting to callers who are directed to your mailbox sta
303. ey System gt TUI gt Reliability Reuse ETR sets New 14xx Digital sets 3910 3920 Wireless Leverage IPO hardware a 85 to 90 New Sales PARTNER Experience gt Key System gt TUI gt Reliability New 14xx Digital sets PARTNER Telsets optional 3920 Wireless Leverage IPO hardware Competitive or Greenfield 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Planned IP Office Release 6 Subject to change AVAYA PARTNER ACS R8 vs PARTNER Version Why Sell PARTNER ACS R8 Why Sell PARTNER Version smaller Sites e g lt 5 sets stand alone 509 Requires more than 18 ETR telephones Requires certain PARTNER Messaging R7 functionality Record A Call Outcalling Notification Multiple Auto Attendants eLarger Mailbox Size Needs more than 4 34D telephones Upgrade from older ACS reuse all modules and phones CPE Migration New system sales Wants all new digital telephones Requires certain messaging functionality Voice Mail to E mail e Visual Voice Messaging via 14xx Display Needs gt 5 party Conferencing PRI T1 or SIP Trunk capability Wants capability to grow to 48 extensions AND Voice Mail Common hardware platform for future upgrade to IP Office Pu AVAYA Pricing Comparison e g 10 user average construct mainte ACS R8 to Essential Edition PARTNER Version PARTNER ACS R8 1P Office PARTNER Version Parts List Gty Price f Parts List Qty Price
304. eys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 4 Ring Sound You can adjust the sound of the ring used by the phone 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Personalized Ringing Press the Select soft key e Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the different available ring patterns e Press the Play soft key to repeat the currently display ring pattern e To make the currently displayed ring pattern the selected ring pattern for the phone press the Save soft key e To leave the menu without making any changes press the Cancel soft key 4 When completed press the Done soft key 5 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 59 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 8 5 Display Brightness 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the up and down P arrow keys to adjust the brightness as required 5 When completed press the Done soft key 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 6 Display Contrast 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Contrast 4 Press the Select soft key 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys to adjust the brightness as required 6 When c
305. f another user Other Account Code Entry Allows the user to enter a voluntary account code to be associated with the current call or with the call made after entry of the account code Conference Drop Acts as a call drop button When used in a conference call the function allows selection of which caller to drop from the conference Allows the user to activate the phone systems contact closure 1 or contact closure 2 The user must also be a member of the Contact Closure 2 appropriate Contact Closure Group 47 While the contact is on the button lamp is green at the user s extension and red at any other users configured for the same contact closure The duration and type of closure is configured in the Contact Closure Group settings 42 m Do Not Disturb Allows the user to redirect all calls while still being able to make calls Incoming calls follow voicemail coverage if on else they receive busy Privacy Allows the user to switch call privacy on or off during a call When on other users with line appearances for the same line are not able N oO oO gt m m N to join the call Station Lock This feature allows the user to lock their extension by entering a 4 digit code When locked the extension can only be used to make emergency calls and dial marked speed dials To unlock the phone the same 4 digit code must be used Station Unlock This feature allows the operator extension 10 to unlock any exten
306. f any type e Maximum 4 per control unit e When fitted with an IP Office 500 Analog Trunk daughter card the Phone 8 base card supports 1 power failure extension to trunk loop start only connection e The analog extension ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors This card provides 6 digital station ports 1 6 2 analog extension ports 7 8 and 4 analog trunk ports 9 12 The card also includes 10 VCM channels e This card has a pre installed IP Office 500 ATM daughter card e Maximum 2 combination cards per control unit e During power failure port 8 is connected to port 12 This card is only supported in an IP500 V2 control unit running in PARTNER Version mode It provides 6 ETR ports for connection of ETR phones 2 Analog extension ports are also provided for emergency use only with an analog trunk card PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 49 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e The card can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter card which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per control unit e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors e If fitted with an IP Office 500 Analog Trunk daughter card during power failure phone por
307. f the microphone for the duration of the call 2 If you are already on a call any additional voice signaled call to your extension is turned into a normal ringing call instead PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 18 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Basic Call Handling Hands Free Answer on Intercom 3 9 Adjusting the Volume While the phone is idle or ringing you can adjust the ringer volume When the phone is connected to a call you can adjust the speaker or handset volume To adjust the ringer volume 1 Use the d up arrow and down arrow keys to change the ringer volume To adjust the caller volume The volume that gets adjusted will depend on whether you are using the handset speakerphone or headset 1408 and 1416 phones only at the time you use this process 1 Use the de up arrow and down arrow keys to change the volume 3 6 Holding Calls When a call is on hold you can make and receive other calls on another line If a call is left on hold for longer than the specified interval it will recall to the extension that put it on hold To place a call on hold 1 During the call press the HOLD button or the button on which the call is taking place The Green light next to the button will wink to show that the call is on hold To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press the button next to the winking Green light You are reconnected to the call The green light changes to a steady green light
308. faces does the new ETR card support The ETR Card can be fitted with the ATM4 daughter card with power fail or universal PRI daughter card all channels available maximum 1 T1 PRI per system Which voice messaging platform can I use in IP PARTNER Version mode Essential Edition only It utilizes the Essential Edition TUI and is different from PARTNER voicemail TUI Badger Communications Durand W1 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com N Di PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version What is the maximum capacity Total capacity is 48 stations and 56 trunks o 48 stations 18 ETR phones maximum o 12 analog Trunks ATM4 on ETR Card or Combination Card ATMA o 24 T1 PRI Daughter card on ETR o 20 SIP trunks requires the Combination Card for the VCM channels Can add more messaging ports to the IP PARTNER Version Yes 2 voice ports are included for simultaneous access and you can add ports in increments of 2 up to a maximum of 6 voice ports Is the voice messaging comparable to PARTNER Messaging No The Essential Edition PARTNER Version voice messaging is comparable to PVM 4 and 12 it has a single auto attendant similar to PVM and a maximum of 15 hours storage more than PVM Which phones are supported by IP PARTNER Version PARTNER 6D 18D 34D ETR phones and IP Office 1400 series and any analog device supported on the Combination Card Phone 8 16 card or the Aux port of the ETR phone
309. ffice Manager provides methods to shutdown and restart an individual card or to shutdown the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system in order to allow removal of an SD card If the System SD card is removed licensed features will continue operating for up to 2 hours 5 3 1 1 Card Shutdown Before a memory card is removed from an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system that is running the card should be shutdown Removing a memory card while the system is running may cause file corruption Shutting down the memory card disables all services provided by the card including embedded voicemail Features licensed by the memory card will continue to operate for up to 2 hours Card services can be restarted by either reinserting the card or using a Start Up command Card Shutdown Using Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Shutdown 2 In the Select IP Office dialog select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK 4 At the back of the control unit confirm that the memory card LED is off 5 The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions h SD Card Removal SD cards should never be removed while being used Though the SD card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written to an SD card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard The IP Office Manager provides methods to shutdown and restart an individual card or to shutdown the Es
310. ffice Units would you like to deploy PARTNER Configuration System Units Locale EBEN p Extension Number Length lt Expansion Modules Hone Select Extension and Daughter Cards Slot Extension WIM Trunk Combo DSE P2 YCMIO w ATM4UNI wi v ATMAUNI Eroun amp Phone 2 None wi 2 In the dialog that is displayed select the PARTNER Configuration box to specify a configuration for a PARTNER Version system 3 Locale and Extension Number Length fields are fixed values for PARTNER and are grayed out 4 In the Select Extension and Daughter Cards section select the cards that match those in the system to which the configuration will be loaded Only cards supported by systems running in Essential Edition PARTNER Version mode are shown P500 Base Cards I P500 Daughter Cards Expansion Modules e Digital Station 8 Max 3 e ATM4 Uni e Digital Station 16 Phone 2 e PRI 1 Uni Max 1 e Phone 16 Phone 8 ETR6 Max 3 Combination Card ATM4 5 Use the Expansion Modules box to select the expansion module if there is one attached to the system to which the configuration will be loaded 6 When the hardware selection is as required click OK 7 The configuration is now created and loaded into Manager for editing 8 When completed e To save the file locally select File Save Configuration as e To send the configuration to a system select File Offline Send Config PARTNE
311. fice Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application How to use Manager What I want to do Associated Task Door Phone Auxiliary 45 Equipment Emergency Numbers List System List Management 27 Create Calling Lists Enable ALS Users Button 34 gt Programming Ex Directory User Setup 33 gt External hot line Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Fax Machine Extension Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Forced Account code Entry Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Framing Trunks T1 PRI 60 Greetings Auto 43 gt Attendant Groups Hunt Pickup Calling Night Service Hunt Group 42 gt Management Haul Length Trunks T1 PRI 60 gt Hold reminder time Advanced Parameters 70 gt Hunt Group Add remove extensions Group Management 27 gt Intercom Dial Tone Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Install Handset Users Button 34 gt Programming Internal hotline alert extension Users Advanced 67 gt Settings IP Address System Setup 26 Only Static IP Address IP Mask System Setup 26 Language User Setup 33 gt Licenses System License 66 Management Line access restriction Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Lines per phone System Setup 26 Line Signaling Trunks T1 PRI 60 Lists Group Management Create Calling Lists 27 Locale System Setup 26 Log All caller ID calls Users Advanced 67 Settings System Setup 26 Loudspeaker paging Extension Users Advanced
312. fice Phone Manager 2008 06 28 11 29 12 00 00 02 2 5002 1 1924 1924 Support 0 1000014169 0 E1924 Ex1n1924 79620 LINE 8 20 0 0 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 109 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Conference Using Conference Add Short Code In this example 2101 has made a call and put it on hold record 2 then made another call and put it on hold record 1 and then dialled the default short code 47 to conference all their held calls record 3 The records for the first two calls have the Continuation field set as 1 indicating that the calls continued in further records Record 3 shows 2101 making a new call in which they dial 47 which places them and their held calls into a conference This is shown by the Party Device and Party Name details as being a conference 100 and the conference channel used for each For both the Continuation fields show that the calls do not end but rather have subsequent records 2008 07 09 17 55 00 00 03 3 2101 0 8262623 8262623 0 1000024 1 E2101 Extn2101 T9002 Line 2 1 8 0 2008 07 09 17 54 00 00 29 7 2101 0 2121 2121 1 1000023 1 E2101 Extn2101 E2121 Extn2121 23 0 2008 07 09 17 55 00 00 46 0 2101 0 47 47 1 1000026 0 E2101 Extn2101 VvV11001 CO Channel 100 1 0 0 2008 07 09 17 54 00 00 49 0 0 71234567890 71234567890 1 1000023 0 E2121 Extn2121 V11003 CO Channel 100 3 0 0 2008 07 09 17 55 00 00 49 0 0 8262623 8262623 0 1000024 0 V11002 CO
313. fice configuration currently loaded in Manager e Phone Type This field shows the type of phone if known that the user is currently associated with The drop down can be used to change the selection if required e Expansion Modules If the phone type supports additional button modules this drop down can be used to select the type and number of button modules e Print Extn This check box is used to select whether the phone button details should be included in the output passed to the DESI software These button will only be selectable if the user s current Phone Type is set to a 1400 Series or 1600 Series phones e Print BM1 Print BM2 Print BM3 These check boxes are used to select whether button module button details should be included in the output passed to the DESI software These button will only be selectable if the user s Expansion Modules is set to the number of BM32 modules 3 Click Print DESI to transfer the information to the DESI application Within DESI edit the labels as required and then print the labels PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 41 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 9 Manage Hunt Groups A hunt group is a collection of users accessible through a single directory number Calls to that hunt group can be answered by any available member of the group The order in which calls are presented can be adjusted by selecting different group types and adjusting
314. figuration will need to be edited to remove redundant entries 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 4 Restart the IP Office system 5 Use Manager to delete the trunks or extensions users in the configuration that are no longer supported by the component installed Adding a New Component If adding a new component to an available slot or port when restarted the IP Office will automatically create configuration entries for the new trunks or extensions users 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 3 Restart the IP Office system 4 Use Manager to configure the new trunks or extensions users Permanent Removal If permanently removing the component the configuration will need to be edited to remove redundant trunk or extension user entries 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or external expansion module 3 Restart the IP Office system 4 Use Manager to delete the trunks or extensions users in the configuration that relate to the component removed 5 In the Cont
315. fter manipulation for changes to take effect Ul Avaya IP Office R Manager T E EA File Edit View Help WELCOME to IP Office Administration What would you like to do Create an Offline Contiquration Open Configuration from System Read a Configuration fram File e To switch to Welcome view select File Close Configuration from the main menu e If you want Manager to always start in the traditional IP Office configuration view deselect the Simplified View option within the File Preferences Preferences tab See Menu 80 command e Create an Offline Configuration 100 e Open a Configuration from System 102 e Read a Configuration from File 103 4 1 1 Offline Configuration Manager can be used to create a configuration file for an Essential Edition PARTNER Version PARTNER Version system to be loaded into a system using Manager or to copy onto a System SD card Similarly the configuration received from an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system can be saved elsewhere PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 100 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Managing Configuration Files Welcome Screen Options 1 From Welcome View select Create an Offline Configuration or from the main menu bar select File Offline Create New Config Lil Avaya IP Office R Manager Sele File Edit View Help Offline Configuration Creation Please epecity System Parameters Which type of IP O
316. gacy feature for some older control units that were managed via the serial port rather than the LAN e Enter Port Number to be used for Serial Communication Used with the setting above to indicate which serial port Manager should use Auto Connect on start up Default On When Manager is started it automatically starts searching for a useable configuration file on the system SD card PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 80 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu e Set Simplified View as Default Default On Used only by experienced Manager users who may want Manager to start only with the Welcome 14 screen 3 1 5 2 Directories This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Directories sub tab These fields set the default location where Manager will look for and save files Working Directory chg files Program Files 4yayaslP Office Manager ccd Binary Directory bin files C Program Files 4yayaslP Office Manager Known IP Office File Program Files 4yayaslP Offices ManagersknowrlPll csy z e Working Directory cfg files Sets the directory into which Manager saves cfg files By default this is the Manager application s program directory e Binary Directory bin files Sets the directory in which the Manager upgrade wizard HTTP TFTP and BOOTP functions look for firmware files requested by phones expansion module con
317. ger PARTNER ACS Today PARTNER has been in the market for 20 years since 1990 Over 1 3 Million systems sold since inception Over 500K systems still in operation today Minimal investment in PARTNER ACS for past 5 years ACS R8 launched April 2009 minor release ACS R7 launched in August 2004 hardware and feature enhancements Losing competitiveness in market Nodigital or IP phone support No SIP PRI T1 IP capability Lack of migration path to IP Office Limited remote service capability u Aging end points 2004 gt Limited to North America and CALA markets 2009 Avaya Inc All rights reserved What BP s are asking for in a new system Customers are very cost conscious Price differences of a few hundred can make or break sale Need out of the box PARTNER key system functionality REQUIRED NO dial 9 On board messaging NO servers Phones ETR phone support essential Minimum of 16 ETR station ports Must support the ETR AUX jack on all ports Refresh sets to support 2 wire more intelligent display Trunking Analog trunks still going strong T1 PRI important SIP trunking emerging Need to be competitive and future proof gt IP500v2 Hardware Like look and feel Provides commonality across platform Must be wall mountable TUI Programming Capability a must Simple GUI Programming needed Keep similar to PARTNER P
318. gured as in service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards D channels are not affected by licensing 2 8 SIP Cards Essential Edition PARTNER Version supports both SIP trunks and SIP extensions Because there is a wide variety of SIP devices and interpretations of standards Avaya cannot give any guarantees of support for all SIP extension devices and features SIP Trunk Providers Essential Edition PARTNER Version SIP trunks have been successfully tested with the following ITSP SIP providers This table of providers is a statement of fact and not any form of recommendation from Avaya nor does it exclude other service providers Any details of the expected operation and service should be confirmed in writing with the individual service provider The SIP Gate service does not support RFC2833 for the sending of DTMF tones SIP Gate uses the alternate SIP INFO method which is not supported by Essential Edition PARTNER Version Essential Edition PARTNER Version supports SIP trunks using UDP or TCP For UDP SIP STUN is supported for NAT Firewall traversal Otherwise use of a service provider supporting Session Border Control SBC is required TURN sometimes used for TCP SIP traversal of NAT firewalls is not supported The Essential Edition PARTNER Version implementation of SIP conforms to the following SIP RFCs RFRFCC Description 2833 7 RTP Payload for DTMF digits telephony tones and telephony signals 3261 8 SIP Session
319. h the unit and must be ordered separately External expansion modules are supplied with an external power supply unit PSU These external power supply units include an integral 1 5 meter lead for connection to the control unit or expansion module A power cord for connection from the PSU to the power outlet is not included as this varies by locale The appropriate power cord must be ordered separately or sourced locally Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls ceilings floors and similar openings Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord including proper routing of the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a socket outlet For locales not detailed below an appropriate power cord must be obtained locally Power Cord Type Power Outlet Plug Type Locales Part number Earthed Power Cords IEC60320 C13 North Central 700289770 SE and South ac er America Control Units e P Office 500 IP Office 500 External Expansion Modules e Digital Station 16 e Phone 16 NEMA1 15 North Central 700213390 and South America 2 13 1 Power Supply Backup The use of an Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS with any telephone system is recommended Even at sites that rarely lose electrical power that power may occasionally have to be switched off for maintenance of other equipment In
320. handsets 2 per ETR6 module The ETR PARTNER Version telephones have fixed buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it The telephones also have a display which provides feedback messages and prompts from the system PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 63 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 ETR34D Telephone Features Feature 34 Number of programmable buttons with lights ith li 3 Number of programmable buttons without lights Key mode line button capacity Y 4 6 5 ETR6D This phone is only supported by an ETR6 card in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system All Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phone are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone AUX socket The ETR PARTNER Version telephones have fixed buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it The telephones also have a display which provides feedback messages and prompts from the system ETR6D Telephone Features Feature Nu
321. hat system will automatically re register to another IP Office system in the network No additional hardware is required making this capability extremely valuable and cost effective to customers requiring business continuity IP Office R6 0 further enhanced resiliency introducing distributed and back up messaging within a Multi Site Network Please see the additional PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version resources in this kit If you have any questions please feel free to call us here at Badger at 715 672 4200 or email info badgercommunications com Badger Communications Durand W1 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version How does IP Office IP PARTNER Version work The new PARTNER Version SD card enables PARTNER version on the new IP Office 500v2 How close to PARTNER emulation do get with this solution All the major features will be emulated i e Key and Lamp audible and visual feedback conference hold and transfer are similar The only difference is Voice Messaging that is supplied on the Essential Edition and uses the Essential Edition TUI Do get anything new SIP trunks full PRI T1 64 party conferencing account code entry automatic daylight savings and more Which cards are supported on the IP Office 500v2 in IP PARTNER Version mode ETR6 Combination Card ATM4 DS8 Phone 8 and maximum of 1 expansion unit DS16 or Phone 16 What trunk inter
322. he Home page See Admin Tasks 23 and Admin Tasks display 23 gt 3 2 5 TFTP Log This command displays the TFTP Log window This window shows TFTP traffic between Manager and devices that uses TFTP to send and receive files For example the TFTP Log below shows an Avaya IP phone requesting and then being sent its software files ES TFTP Log U2 Mar 2006 13 05 36 GMT Log started _ 02 Mar 2006 13 06 14 GMT Recenved BOOTP request for OO096eD52k2U le Mar 2006 13 06 14 GMT Sending BUOTP response to DU096eE052F20 _ U2 Mar 2006 13 06 19 GMT Recenved BOOTP request for O0096e052F20 _ U2 Mar 2006 13 06 19 GMT Sending BUOTP response to 0009605220 _ 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 122 of 46xeupgrade scr _ U2 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 24 of 46s upgrade scr 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 36 of 46ssupgrade scr Sent 43 of 46eeupgrade scr Sent 60 of 46eeupgrade scr Sent 722 of 46eeupgrade scr Sent 84 of 46eeupgrade scr U2 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 36 of 46xsupoqrade scr _ 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 142 of 46xesethings tet le Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 26 of 46eesethinigs tst U2 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 432 of 46xesethings tet U2 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 572 of 4bxesethings tet _ 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Sent 722 of 46xesethings tet le Mar
323. he card should be shutdown Removing a memory card while the system is running may cause file corruption Shutting down the memory card disables all services provided by the card including embedded voicemail Features licensed by the memory card will continue to operate for up to 2 hours Card services can be restarted by either reinserting the card or using a Start Up command Card Shutdown Using Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Shutdown 2 In the Select IP Office dialog select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK 4 At the back of the control unit confirm that the memory card LED is off 5 The card can now be removed in order to perform the necessary maintenance actions Card Reinsertion Reinserting a card into a system that is already switched on will automatically restart the card Similarly reinserting the card and rebooting the IP Office system will restart the card However if the card has been shutdown but not removed it can be restarted using Manager without requiring a reboot Card Startup Using Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Startup PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 91 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK i A If the SD card is removed license i
324. he control units non volatile memory The SD memory card can be shutdown and restarted separately from the system h WARNING When shutdown the system cannot be used to make or receive any calls This is not a polite shutdown any users calls and services in operation will be stopped System Shutdown Using Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced System Shutdown 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the system to be shutdown by activating its checkbox 3 You will be prompted for log in details 4 Select the shutdown mode If Indefinite is used the system can only be restarted by having its power switched off and then on again If a Timed shutdown is selected the IP Office will reboot after the set time has elapsed System Shutdown Using System Status 1 Start System Status and access the status output of IP Office 2 In the navigation panel select System 3 At the bottom of the screen select Shutdown System 4 Select the time duration for the shutdown or indefinite System Shutdown Using a System Phone This process can be used by any user configured as a System Phone user and using a 1400 Series phone The user s Login Code is used to restrict access to system administration functions on the phone PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 101 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Unlike Manager a system phone user cannot select an indefinite shutdown The can s
325. he external number The number can be up to 28 characters in length The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause O P Inserts a 1 5 second pause R_ Send a hook switch flash signal e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle Stop CONFERENCE 6 To remove the existing number press MI C HFAI To edit personal speed dials 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Telephone Programming When displayed press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Personal Speed Dial When displayed press Select 4 At the Code prompt enter between 80 and 99 to select the speed dial entry that you want to edit 5 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 6 Enter the external number and press Enter The number can be up to 28 characters in length Press Clear to remove any existing number The following keys can be used to enter special dialing commands Function Press to insert Character Description Pause HOLD Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer SPEAKER __ Send a hook switch flash signal Stop CONFERENCE Stop dialing e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guid
326. he individual details of the currently selected call record are displayed 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the details The possible values are Time The time of the call Duration The length of the call Name The name of the caller if Known Number The number of the caller if available Reason The type of call record ie Answered Outgoing or Missed Count How many time a call of the same type name and number has occurred Only the details of the most recent call are kept in your call log However the count will indicate if the caller has rung or has been rung several times 4 While you are in the details of a call record the soft key functions available are Call Call the number shown in the call record You can also do this by pressing the OK button Contact Add the name and number to your personal directory You can edit the details before they are added Back Go back to the normal call screen to select another call record PARTNER User Guide Page 55 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 7 4 Deleting a Record You can delete the currently displayed call record 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Delete soft key to d
327. he local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 111 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Index bin files 23 A Administer PARTNER 28 Administration 88 Administration tool 28 Analog phone card 51 Applications 75 Assembling telephones 42 Associated documents 7 Aux button 47 69 91 Availability of equipment 9 Avaya University 28 B Backup 14 90 93 102 Barrier boxes 38 72 Barrier boxes rack 73 Base card 49 analog phone 19 49 ATM combination 19 49 digital station 19 49 ETR 19 49 BM32 extension 22 61 70 Book structure 8 Bulletin technical 7 23 28 30 31 75 98 100 C Cable 9 way DTE 32 access 30 clearance 30 LAN 32 lightening protection 38 maximum distances 32 RJ45 72 standard IP Office 32 Cables 16 Cabling 71 Call barring 102 Call logging applications 78 Capacity 46 Card analog phone 49 analog trunk 20 55 base 16 19 49 booting from SD 91 combination 16 19 49 copy 94 daughter 16 20 55 digital station 19 49 DS 49 ETR6 19 49 installation 39 optional SD 18 48 90 91 PRI 20 55 reinsertion 91 removal 18 removing SD 89 SD 16 18 48 SD actions 89 SD recreation 92 SD removal 91 shutdown 91 shutdown SD 89 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Index SIP trunk 21 start SD 90 system SD 93 94 trunk 16 20 55 Cards A
328. he name and number e Use the d up and down arrow keys to switch between number and name entry e When the name has been entered as required press the OK soft key e When the number has been entered as required press the Save soft key e To exit without making any changes press the Cancel soft key PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 51 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 6 4 Adding a New Contact So long as the telephone system capacity has not been reached you can add up to 100 personal directory entries 1 Access your personal directory contacts a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select your Personal directory Extensions 10 and 11 can also add edit and delete entries from the External directory 2 Press the New soft key e The menu now allows editing of the name and number e Use the i up and down arrow keys to switch between number and name entry e When the name has been entered as required press the OK soft key e When the number has been entered as required press the Save soft key e To exit without making any changes press the Cancel soft key 6 4 1 Add a Contact from the Call Log You can add a name and number shown in your call log to your personal speed dials You can only do this if there is space in your allowed 20 personal speed dials 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will chang
329. hen you have finished recording your name 7 Press 1 to listen to your new name recording After you have listened you can e Press 3 to save the new recording e Press 2 to record the new name again PARTNER User Guide Page 41 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 5 4 Changing Your Access Code You can set an access code for your mailbox If you set an access code it will be requested whenever you access the mailbox to collect messages When changing your access code e Enter least four digits If you enter less than four numbers you will be prompted to enter a longer code e Do not set an obvious code for example e Do not match your extension number e Do not use a sequence of digits for example 1234 e Do not use the same repeated digit for example 1111 e If you forget your access code your system administrator can clear it Login 04 Change access code enter current access code Bane a confirm new access code at To change your access code 1 Login 40 to your mailbox 2 Press 04 to change your access code 3 Enter your current access code and press If you have no current access code just press 4 Enter your new access code followed by The access code must be between 4 and 15 digits in length 5 Re enter your new access code followed by The access code will now be changed e The system will prompt you if the codes do not match or is not acceptable It will also confirm the chang
330. here may not be enough lines assigned to the pool to support the usage One or more local telephone company lines may be faulty test each line from extension 10 Automatic System Answer and or Direct Extension Dial is turned on turn it off an auxiliary device fax modem voice messaging system answering machine answers when it should not either e Check the device and adjust it to answer on a later ring or turn off auto answer e Set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring Device may not recognize the system ringing pattern e Change the extension s ring pattern by using Distinctive Ring 308 e Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 to Machine the system will generate an outside dial tone for the extension If you are using a speakerphone try using the handset If you have touch tone dialing you may have a faulty telephone or cord If you have rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 interval is too long reset it Setting may not be inserting a long enough pause use Star Code Dial Delay 410 to increase setting Recall feature isn t working Increase Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds If using the feature disconnects the call decrease Recall Timer Duration by 100 milliseconds You may be using Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial on a system that doesn t support far end disconnect call your local telephone company and find out if they support it Hold D
331. hich enables you to graphically program 36 the buttons Any change will not be effective until the configuration file is saved back to the SD 8 card PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 34 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Button Programming e Copy and Print This section of the dialog allows you to copy the current users button program settings to other extension users e Available Users Select the users to which you want apply either of the actions below e Copy Feature Buttons Copy 34 the current user s button programming to the selected users You select the extension or several which you want to program to be the same as the current user e Print Labels If you have the DESI label printing application installed on the computer this control offers a list of connected printers and transfers the information required to print labels to the selected machine e Buttons This table displays the list of features programmed on each of the users buttons e Button The button to which the feature is programmed The position of the button will vary depending on the type of phone e Label If the phone displays text labels next to each button you can enter the text that should be displayed To enter the label click on the label space after having selected the action for the button e Action This is the action performed by the button when pressed To select the ac
332. hing Trunk in use Green Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication signal AIS from the trunk remote end Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor IPO 500 Extn Card Phone 2 IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 2 700431778 IPO 500 Extn Card Phone 8 IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 8 700417231 4 3 3 ETR6 Card This card is used to add 6 ETR phone extension ports to the IP 500v2 control unit This card is only supported by IP500 V2 systems running in Essential Edition PARTNER Version mode It also includes 2 analog extension ports which are for emergency use only when the card is fitted with an analog trunk daughter card A further 4 RJ 45 ports 9 to 12 are provided for trunk connections when an IP500 trunk daughter card is fitted to this card e Supports ETR and analog phones e Maximum per IP500 Control Unit 3 e IP500 Daughter Card Support 1 The IP500 BRI trunk daughter card is not supported Port Type Ports Features Port LEDs ETR Each ETR phone can be No status LED are used for ETR ports Extensions used for an ETR or e LED1 is used for base card status analog phone Support for ETR 34D phone is 2 per ETR6 card and 4 e Red Slow Flash Initializing seconds Card okay in total e Red Fast Flash System shutdown REN 1 DTMF dialing only Message waiting indication 51V stepped PARTNER Version Installation
333. hip can be covered Group calls forwarded calls transfer return calls voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt On Busy calls and calls to doorphone alert extensions are not covered A single extension can cover multiple extensions however an extension programmed for call coverage can have only one covering extension Only one call coverage button can be programmed per extension If you activate call coverage at your extension you still can intercept an outside call rerouted by coverage by pressing the outside line button that has the call appearance You can program call coverage on a programmable button Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being covered When the green light is on your calls are being covered when the green light is off call coverage is not active If call coverage and do not disturb are already on covered calls are routed immediately to the covered extension without ringing the covered extension Similarly if Call Coverage is on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb 34 to send that call immediately for coverage If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover 44 active calls ring at the covering extension e If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb 344 active the call i
334. his action will erase any existing files and folders on the card Once a card has been formatted the folders and files required for IP Office operation can be loaded onto the card from the Manager PC using the Recreate IP Office SD Card command 1 Insert the SD card into a reader SDHC compatible slot on the Manager computer 2 Using Manager select File Advanced Format IP Office SD Card 3 Select IP Office Partner Version This selection just sets the card label shown when viewing the card details It does not affect the actual formatting 4 Browse to the card location and click OK 5 The status bar at the bottom of Manager will display the progress of the formatting process 6 When the formatting is complete you can use the Recreate IP Office SD Card command to load the Essential Edition PARTNER Version folders and files onto the card from the Manager PC 3 1 7 8 Recreate IP Office SD Card Create a SD card with folders binaries etc based on the files installed with the current manager For licenses the card must be an Avaya SD card Card must be correct type 4GB SDHC FAT32 Choosing IP Office Partner Edition displays a dialogue to select type of memory card formatting 94 gt to be applied Browse enables selection of source library for files and then destination card the one you want to copy to Copy the system folder along with sub folders across to new SD card Msystem system fonmary forimary backup ba
335. hter card is supplied two pre fitted metal pillars and 3 plastic pillars Two screws and washers for final attachment of the metal pillars to the base card are also included IP Office 500 Analog Trunk Daughter Card This card can be added to IP Office 500 base cards It enables that base card to then also support four analog loop start trunks e When fitted to an IP Office 500 Analog Phone 8 base card the combination supports 1 power failure extension to trunk loop start only connection e Maximum 2 per IP Office 500v2 control unit PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 20 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Overview Trunk Cards IP Office 500 PRI U Trunk Daughter Card This card can be added to an IP Office 500 base card The card is a universal card that can be configured in software for El PRI T1 robbed bit T1 PRI or EIR2 The card is available in single and dual port variants e Maximum 4 per IP Office 500v2 control unit e The IP Office 500 PRI U card supports El T1 and E1 R2 PRI modes The Essential Edition PARTNER Version system supports 8 unlicensed B channels on each IP Office 500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected require IP Office 500 Universal PRI Additional Channels licenses added to the configuration These additional channels consume the licenses based on which additional channels are confi
336. ial Numbers System Speed 31 gt Dial Setup System Version Common Area 23 gt T1 Channel Allocation table Trunks Setup 48 Time Synchronize Advanced Parameters 70 gt Transfer Return Ring Default 4 rings Advanced Parameters 70 Transport Protocol Trunks SIP 62 gt Trunks Configuration User assign to group User 33 gt Setup User configure User 33 Setup VMS Cover Duration Users Advanced 67 gt Settings Voicemail User 33 Setup Advanced Parameters 70 gt Zero suppression Trunks T1 PRI 60 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 18 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application How to use Manager PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 19 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Chapter 2 Administration Tasks PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 21 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 Administration Tasks Wa Avaya IP Office N Manager 00E0070521 9A 6 0 11019 Administrator Administrator KBR File Edt View Help Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration What would you like to do Please review the current IP Office Setup below Change Remote Administration Password Hardware Installed 3 Control Unit IP 500 V2 Change System setings Internal Modules PHONES Unknown DIGSTAS Unknown ETR6 Unknown Unknown Unkno
337. ice PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Advanced Features System Speed Dials 4 9 Personal Speed Dials You can create up to 20 personal speed dial codes 80 to 99 to store frequently dialed numbers The numbers can be quickly dialed by pressing FEATURE and the two digit code for that personal speed dial The personal speed dial numbers programmed for a particular extension can only be used at that extension e If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system e You can store an account code as a personal speed dial for use during account code entry e Personal speed dials do not override any dialing restrictions that apply to an extension e 1408 and 1416 phone users can view use and edit their personal speed dials through the phone s CONTACTS 50 menu To use a personal speed dial 1 At dial tone or whenever you want to dial a number press FEATURE and dial the two digit personal speed dial code between 80 and 99 2 The stored number is dialed To edit personal speed dials ETR 18D 34D 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press Feature and the speed dial number to be programmed which must be between 80 and 99 4 The current setting of the speed dial entry is displayed 5 Enter t
338. icemail mailbox password To do this requires entry of the existing password e Voicemail Switch voicemail coverage on off Using the Visual Voice Button for Voicemail Transfer If pressed when you have a call is connected the MESSAGE button allows entry of an extension number for direct to voicemail transfer of the connected call PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 47 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 6 Contacts 1408 1416 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 49 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 6 Contacts 1408 1416 This menu is accessed by pressing the key It is used to display names and numbers that you can then use for making calls The directory includes names stored for use by all users names stored for use by just you and the name and numbers of all the other users and groups on the phone system 6 1 Viewing Contacts Details 1 Access the contacts directory a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select which type of directory entries you want displayed All All directory entries Personal Your personal speed dials External The system speed dials Users The names and numbers of other users on the telephone system Groups The names and numbers of hunt groups on the telephone system c Either press the List soft key to display all the directory entries or start dialing the name
339. ide while on ETR6 POTs they are one long ring followed immediately by two short rings e Returning held calls on PHONE Combination POTs are three short rings whilst on ETR6 POTs they are one long ring followed immediately by two short rings e Returning parked calls on PHONE Combination POTs ring with the base call ringing pattern whilst on ETR6 POTs they ring with the same ring as the returning held call ETR6 POTs cannot place calls on hold for extended periods like PHONE Combination POTs This is consistent with PARTNER ACS POT behavior If a call is placed on hold and the ETR6 POT user hangs up the call immediately returns and rings with the returning held call ringing pattern described above The PE Automatic Line Selection feature applies to ETR6 POTs whilst it does not apply to PHONE Combination POTs When a PHONE Combination POTs user dials 9 to obtain an outside line it looks for an available line starting at line one and progressing upwards When a ETR6 POTs user dials 9 to obtain an outside line it uses the ALS programming to select an available line potentially skipping some lines Call Waiting Tone is consistent between ETR6 POTs and PHONE Combination POTs which is one short beep of tone This is inconsistent but acceptable with PARTNER ACS which is two short beeps of tone PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 69 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 6 13 Phone Add Ons na
340. iguration The exact method of physical connection and configuration will vary with each trunk provider and so requires local telecoms experience The topics covered here are general guidelines e Clock Quality Altering which digital trunk is used to provide the IP Office with its clock signal for call synchronization e Unused Trunks Disabling the use of trunks and trunk channels that are not available e Prefix Dialing On systems where a prefix is being used for external dialing ensuring that the same prefix is added to incoming numbers in order to allow return calls Details may be found in the IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator Tool User Guide 5 4 1 Clock Quality Any system where digital trunks are being used requires a clock signal for call synchronization between the switches at each end of the trunk Typically the clock signal provided by a digital trunk from the central office exchange is the best quality and most reliable source The Essential Edition PARTNER Version can obtain and use the clock signal from any of its digital trunks However it will only use one trunk for its clock signal at any time and will ignore any other possible clock sources If no clock source is available the Essential Edition PARTNER Version can use its own internal clock if necessary The Clock Quality setting on each line is set to one of the following e Network If available the clock signal from this tr
341. iguration in Manager memory e If the configuration has been received from an SD card the Send Config 86 menu is displayed e If the configuration file has been opened offline or created from new the file is saved to disk only 3 1 4 Save Configuration As The File Save As command allows you to save a configuration offline The command displays the Save File As dialog box You can enter the new file name including the drive and directory Configurations saved onto the PC in this way can be reopened using the L icon or the File Offline Open File command i Note that dynamic configuration data for example advertised hunt groups is not included in a configuration file until the configuration file is saved onto PC and the SD card configuration is reopened for use by a control unit PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 79 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 3 1 5 Preferences This command displays a dialog for configuring various aspects of Manager operation The dialog is divided into a number of tabs Preferences 80 gt Directories 81 Discovery 81 gt Visual Preferences 82 gt Security 83 Validation 84 3 1 5 1 Preferences This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Preferences tab i Note For Partner Admin tool a number of option have been moved from this sub tab to the Security 83 sub tab Those options are Request Login on Save C
342. ility features of IP Office Avaya IP Office is a highly reliable communications platform with a number of related features including X Solid state components with no moving parts there are no hard drives or fans that can fail X There are no cooling fans required in the IP Office chassis which significantly reduces any potential points of failure On other systems when fans fail components overheat and may become so damaged that they have to be replaced N The resiliency capability of IP Office Release 5 0 with Multi Site Networking adds tremendous reliability as well In the unlikely event that one IP Office in the network fails IP phones from that system will automatically re register to another IP Office system in the network No additional hardware is required making this capability extremely valuable and cost effective to customers requiring business continuity IP Office R6 0 further enhanced resiliency introducing distributed and back up messaging within a Multi Site Network Please see the additional PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version resources in this kit If you have any questions please feel free to call us here at Badger at 715 672 4200 or email info badgercommunications com Badger Communications Durand WI 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com AVAYA INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATIONS IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version What Is It Why The Need Ron Rogers SME Product Mana
343. ing support for this product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Please note that if you acquired the product from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE HTTP SUPPORT AVAYA COM LICENSEINFO ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS USES AND OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER AS APPLICABLE UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER AND AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE BY INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO YOU ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE AVAYA Avaya grants End User a license
344. inutes depending on the PC Once system system started it is recommended that the process is not interrupted pnmary primary 2 Insert the SD card into a reader slot on the Manager computer backup backup Amail imail 3 Using Manager select File Advanced Recreate IP Office SD Card dynamic dynamic 4 Select IP Office Partner Version This selection will affect how the Essential temp temp Edition PARTNER Version system operates when defaulted with this card present in its System SD card slot 5 Browse to the card location and click OK 6 Manager starts creating folders on the SD card and copying the required files into those folders PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 92 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration SD Card Actions 5 3 6 Backing Up the System SD Card There are two levels of backup that can be performed e Backup the System SD Card Primary Folder The contents of the primary folder on the card can be copied to the backup folder They files can then be restored if necessary Both actions can be performed remotely e Backup the Whole System SD Card The contents of the whole System SD card can be copied to the Optional SD card While this can be done remotely the contents can only be copied back manually using an SD card reader i Note that in either case the configuration file on the System SD card will not contain any changes made by I
345. ion The between building connection must be via POT or PHONE ports only module earthed ducting preferable underground The cable must not be exposed externally at any point Analog Trunks ITWLinx towerMAX CO 4x4 For locations where the risk of lightning strikes is felt Supports up to 4 two wire lines to be high additional protection of incoming analog This device was previously trunks is recommended referred to as the Avaya 146C External Output Switch ITWLinx towerMAX SCL 8 Connections from an IP Office Ext O P port to an This device was previously external relay device must be via a surge protector referred to as the Avaya 146G The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx http www itwlinx com 3 3 Install Overview Essential Edition PARTNER Version is an out of the box installation and is meant to work correctly when it is switched on without requiring any setting up or pre configuration The efficiency of this automatic procedure is simplified and guaranteed by following a few basic rules in connecting up cable groups and populating the card slots of the control unit as follows e Insert base cards working from left to right and do not leave unoccupied slots between cards e Apply simple housekeeping rules to cables by tying them in associated and clearly labeled bundles e Route cables carefully so that they do not intrude the working area or create a hazard PARTNER Version Installation and Referen
346. ion Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Show Phone Screen 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER Version Phone User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 58 Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Phone Settings 1408 1416 A Menu Auto Exit 8 2 Visual Alerting The message waiting lamp at the top right corner of the phone can also be used to indicate when you have a call alerting your phone The lamp is flashed to indicate a call waiting to be answered 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Visual Alerting 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 3 Audible Alerting The phone s audible ringer can be switched off This only affects the ring and does not affect the visual alerting 59 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Audible Alerting 5 Use the left and right P arrow k
347. ion Quick Install Page 24 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Installation Final Actions A Do not leave the Manager application open for long periods and particularly when it is not being used Check system operation and gather all packing materials for disposal If appropriate obtain sign off signature PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 25 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 2 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 Troubleshooting Install problems 1 Have you insert the correct Avaya System SD card into the System SD slot on the rear of the control unit e Ensure that you have the correct card There are three versions A Law Mu Law and Partner Version e Ensure that the card has the level of software required If necessary the card can be upgraded to match a version of IP Office Manager 2 The control unit loads firmware from the System SD card with which it uses to upgrade itself and the components installed in the control unit 3 This process takes approximately a minute The end of this process is indicated by LED1 on each base card flashing every 5 seconds LED9 on each base card fitted with a trunk daughter card will also flash every 5 seconds 4 The control unit will then begin upgrading the external expansion module if fitted This is indicated by the red center LE
348. ion included with the equipment 3 2 2 Environmental Requirements Before you begin the physical installation of the system you must check that all environmental factors are within the acceptable ranges The planned location must meet the following requirements If installing into a rack system these are requirements for within the rack e Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F e Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing e Check there are no flammable materials in the area e Check there is no possibility of flooding e Check that no other machinery or equipment needs to be moved first e Check that it is not an excessively dusty atmosphere e Check that the area is unlikely to suffer rapid changes in temperature and humidity e Check for the proximity of strong magnetic fields sources of radio frequency and other electrical interference e Check there are no corrosive chemicals or gasses e Check there is no excessive vibration or potential of excessive vibration especially of any mounting surface e Check that where telephones are installed in another building that the appropriate protectors and protective grounds are fitted see Out of Building Telephone Installation e Check there is suitable lighting for installation system programming and future maintenance e Check that there is sufficient working space for installation and future maintenance e Ensure that likely activities near the system will not cause any problems e g
349. ion of analog phones The card can be fitted with an IP Office 500 daughter card which then uses the additional 4 RJ 45 ports for connections e This card accepts one IP Office 500 daughter card of any type e Maximum 4 per control unit e When fitted with an IP Office 500 Analog Trunk daughter card the Phone 8 base card supports 1 power failure extension to trunk loop start only connection e The analog extension ports do not include a ringing capacitor Where this is a requirement connection should be via a Master socket containing ringing capacitors This card provides 6 digital station ports 1 6 2 analog extension ports 7 8 and 4 analog trunk ports 9 12 The card also includes 10 VCM channels e This card has a pre installed IP Office 500 ATM daughter card e Maximum 2 combination cards per control unit e During power failure port 8 is connected to port 12 This card is only supported in an IP500 V2 control unit running in PARTNER Version mode It provides 6 ETR ports for connection of ETR phones 2 Analog extension ports are also provided for emergency use only with an analog trunk card PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 19 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e The card can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter card which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per control unit e The analog phone ports do not include a ringing capacitor
350. is will use the ports set for secure configuration and secure security access It also requires the configuration and or security service within the IP Office s security configuration settings to have been set to support secure access Depending on the level of that secure access selected it may be necessary for the Manager Certificate Checks below to be configured to match those expected by the IP Office configuration and or security service ry e When Secure Communications is set to On a i padlock icon is displayed at all times in the lower right Manager Status field 3 1 5 6 Validation This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Validation sub tab By default Manager validates the whole configuration when it is loaded and individual fields whenever they are edited This tab allows selection of when automatic validation should be applied to configuration files loaded into Manager Validation Validate configuration on open Validate configuration on edit e Validate configuration on open Automatically validate configuration files when they are opened in Manager e Validate configuration on edit Validate the whole configuration when OK is clicked after editing a record For large configurations disabling this option removes the delay caused by validating the configuration after every edit e Prompt for configuration validation on save or send If selected when saving or sending a configuration a prompt is di
351. isconnect Time 203 setting may be too short Automatic System Answer Mode 121 may be set to Disconnect change it to Hold or Ring Hold Disconnect Time 203 may be too long try resetting it Local telephone company does not send a hold release signal you may need the help of our hotline Power may have been interrupted to the control unit check the power cord the on off switch and the LEDs on the modules Power outlet may be faulty test the outlet with an appliance like a lamp one or more system modules may be out try reseating the module in the control unit PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 107 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 6 2 Safety Statements 6 2 1 Lightning Protection Hazard Symbols Lightning protectors The buildings lightning protectors must be verified as follow 1 Check the lightning protectors at the trunk cable entry point to the building housing the Avaya IP Office paying special attention to the lightning protection grounding Report any problems in writing to the telephone company 2 Equipment that is designed to be connected using internal wiring is typically not lightning protected Hence Avaya IP Office extension cabling must not leave the building For installations where telephones and or other standard tip ring devices are installed in another building then lightning protection is required see Out of Building Telephone Installations
352. ist after highlighting the item you want to move The different types of list are List Type Description Allowed Lists 28 Each allowed list contains external telephone numbers that member of the list are allowed to dial regardless of any other call barring The user s allowed lists override any disallowed lists of which they are a member and the user s Outgoing Call Bar 33 gt and Outgoing Call Restrictions 67 gt settings There are 8 lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits O to 9 and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a Single digit wildcard PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 27 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Disallowed Lists 28 Each disallowed list contains external telephone numbers that users who are members of the list are not allowed to dial Numbers in the disallowed lists of which a user is a member are overridden if they also appear in the allowed numbers lists emergency number list of which the user is a member and also by marked system speed dials 31 There are 8 lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits 0 to 9 and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a Single digit wildcard Emergency Number You can enter 10 emergency phone numbers into this list This list is applied to all users and List
353. it e h Only the screws M3 x 6mm provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 36 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Getting Started Minimum Clearance 500mm 19 7 onallsides 8 TOP a 4 5mm am I 645mm BEE BOTTOM UP BOTTOM Fix to solid vertical surface using wall fixings suitable for the wall type AN Orientation must be as shown A minimum clearance of 500mm 19 7 is required on all sides h The brackets must be used as shown with the deeper tray like bracket used at the bottom of the wall mounted control unit h Only the screws M3 x 6mm provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 37 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 2 10 Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be connected to the IP Office system In these scenarios additional protection in the form of protective grounding and surge protectors must be fitted e h The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage It merely reduces the chanc
354. ite http powerquality eaton com AVAYA default asp cx 101 provides a calculator into which you can enter the equipment you want supported on a UPS It will then display various UPS options The site uses VA values for typical IP Office systems However if more specific values are required for a particular system the table below can be used to enter values Typical IP Office System IP Office System 230 Individual Equipment Phone 8 Module 17 Typical Server PC 600 Typical Desktop PC 400 Mid Span PSU 6 ports 150 Mid Span PSU 12 24 ports 300 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 25 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 26 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 3 Installing PARTNER PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 27 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 Installing PARTNER This section is intended to assist with the installation of the core components of an Essential Edition PARTNER Version telephone system It describes those components and factors that should be considered for an installation e The Essential Edition PARTNER Version is a converged voice and data communications system It should therefore only be installed by persons with telephony and IP data network experience e Installers must be trained on IP Office systems Through its
355. ither through automatic or manual configuration the phone system can send recurring SIP Options requests to the remote proxy terminating the trunk Those requests will keep the port open through the firewall Requests are sent every x seconds as configured by this field If a binding refresh time has not been set you may experience problems receiving inbound SIP calls as they are unable to get through the Firewall In these circumstances make sure that this value has been configured e Public IP Address Default 0 0 0 0 This value is either entered manually or discovered by the Run STUN process If no address is set the phone system IP address is used e Public Port Default 0 This value is either entered manually or discovered by the Run STUN process e Run STUN This button tests STUN operation between the phone system and the STUN Server IP Address set above If successful the results are used to automatically fill the remaining fields with the discovered values Before using Run STUN the SIP trunk must be configured e SMTP Server Configuration Essential Edition PARTNER Version can communicate with an SMTP email server Using SMTP requires details of a valid SMTP email account user name and password and server address If SMTP email alarms are configured but for some reason the IP Office cannot connect with the SMTP server only the last 10 alarms are stored for sending when connection is successful e IP Address Default 0 0 0
356. its and external expansion modules are marked with a rh or E symbol Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground e Additional protective equipment In addition to grounding additional protective equipment will be required in the following situations Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations e On any Digital Station or Phones external expansion module connected to an extension located in another building 3 2 8 Rack Mounting The IP Office 500v2 control unit and IP Office 500 external expansion units can be rack mounted if required into 19 inch rack systems This requires an IP Office 500 Rack Mounting Kit SAP 700429202 for each unit The kit includes e A rack mounting bracket and screws for attachment of the bracket to the unit e Nuts and bolts for rack attachment e Brackets and cable ties for cable tidying As indicated in the diagram following the rack mounting bracket can be used in several positions on the unit PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 33 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Environmental Requirements In addition to the existing environmental requirements for an IP Office system the following additional factors must be considered when rack mounting a unit 1 Rack Positioning Ensure compliance with the rack manufacturers safe
357. ivacy Recall Station Lock Station Unlock Mobile Twin Blank Hot Dial Coverage Messaging Call Coverage Call Forwarding VMS Cover Absent Message Voicemail Collect e Blank When selected this option removes all programming from the button Feature Description Making Calls Auto Dial Outside These buttons can be used to store a number which when pressed is dialed to the user extension s first available line appearance Auto Dial ICM equivalent of a User button Pg 27 of 139695 Auto Dial ICM Page direct dial DE Group Calling Page This button can be used to page the available members of a calling group Group Calling Ring This button can be used to call a calling group Last Number Redial Redial the number of the last outgoing external call dialed by the user Bere es BEE Save Number Redial Save the number of the last outgoing external call dialed by the user Can then be used to redial the saved number Simultaneous Page Simultaneous paging is paging of an extension connected to a external paging amplifier Loudspeaker Paging 7 and the available members of calling group 1 at the same time PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 37 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 N Oo re m m 00 N u Turns hot dial on or off For ETR extensions hot dial if off by default For 1500 Series extensi
358. iversal PRI Additional Channels licenses added to the configuration These additional channels consume the licenses based on which additional channels are configured as In service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards D channels are not affected by licensing e Maximum per IP500 Control Unit 4 e Software Level 4 1 Daughter Card Ports 9 12 x The LEDs for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows e Off No trunk present e Red Green Fast Flash port 9 or Green e Green on Trunk present Fast Flash port 10 Alarm indication Signal AIS from the trunk remote end e Red with Green Blink port 9 or Green Blink port 10 Port in loopback mode set through IP Office System Monitor e Green flashing Trunk in use e LED 9 is used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 seconds Card e Red Slow Flash Initializing Okay e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IPO 500 TRNK PRI 1 UNI IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 1 Universal 700417439 IPO 500 TRNK PRI 2 UNI IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 2 Universal 700417462 4 5 Expansion Modules The Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit can support one extension unit as follows e Digital Station DS module or e Phone module 4 5 1 Digital Station IPO 500 Digital Station modules can be used to add additional DS ports to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Note that this requires the IP Office control
359. izard The Version column details the current software each unit in the systems is running whilst the Available column shows the version of bin file Manager has available for that type of unit a indicates no file available The check boxes are used to select which units should be upgraded Upgrading will require entry of a valid name and password for the selected Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Using Manager to upgrade 1 Leave all the check boxes the same as the options offered when the upgrade wizard is launched The Validate option should remain selected wherever possible When selected the upgrade process is divided as follows transfer new software confirm transfer delete old software restart with new software If Validate is not selected the old software is deleted before the new software is transferred 2 Select the upgrade box beside the IP Office file you are going to upgrade to 3 Click Upgrade this will start the upgrade process 4 Upgrade ends with a system reboot 4 Note that the phone binaries are updated when going between major releases However be aware that if the name of the phone binary has not changed between the releases this process will not work for the ports that have 1400 phones plugged in already This only applies to development releases and would require another reboot once the upgrade process is complete to download the correct binary to the phone Using the optional SD card slot to u
360. ized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction transfer and or use can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on Avaya s web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at
361. l calls e Hotline Alert Number Default Blank If a number is entered here when the extension goes off hook by simply lifting the handset or pressing a speaker button rather than first selecting a line or intercom button this number is called e Privacy Enabled Default Off If off when connected to an external call on a particular line other users with a line appearance for that line are able to join that call If on other user cannot join calls A user can switch privacy on off using a programmable button set to the Privacy 37 gt feature e Voicemail Settings e Voicemail Code Default Blank Range 0 no code to 15 digits A code 1 15 digits used to validate access to the mailbox e The mailbox user can change the code by dialing 04 after having entered the mailbox e Voicemail Email Enter the user s email address e DTMF Breakout dual tone multi frequency Essential Edition PARTNER Version allows system defaults to be set These are then applied to all user mailboxes unless the users own settings differ e Reception Breakout DTMF O The number to which a caller is transferred if they press O while listening to the mailbox greeting rather than leaving a message 0 on embedded voicemail e For systems set to Intuity emulation mode the mailbox user can also access this option when collecting their messages by dialing 0O e If the mailbox has been reached through a call flow containing a Leave Mail actio
362. lation Having prepared each base card by adding any daughter cards required the base cards can be inserted into the control unit h Warnings e Correct anti static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards e During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected g Tools Required e O 5mm Flat blade screwdriver e O Anti static wrist strap and ground point z 20 Procedure 1 Using a flat bladed screwdriver remove the covers from the slots on the front of the control unit This cover is no longer required but should be retained until installation has been completed 2 Allowing the card to rest against the bottom of the slot begin sliding it into the control unit When half inserted check that the card rails have engaged with the slot edges by trying to gently rotate it If the card does rotate remove it and begin inserting it again 3 The card should slide in freely until almost fully inserted At this point apply pressure at the base of the front of the card to complete insertion into its connector block 4 Using a flat bladed screwdriver secure the base card General Notes PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 40 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Card Installation e Cards can be fitted in any order into any available slots The only exception is the IP500 4 Port Expansion card which can
363. lation and Reference Manual Page 78 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Physical Ports Not used Not used Ring Tip Not used Not used CON OD UPB WN Not used e Off Hook Current 25mA Ah IMPORTANT In all IP Office installations any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional earth h WARNING Within areas of high lightning risk any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment 4 9 2 Audio Port This port is found on the rear of the control unit It is used for the input of an external music on hold sound source not yet implemented in PARTNER Version Note that if the IP Office has loaded an internal music on hold sound file any input from this socket is ignored The port is a 3 5mm stereo jack socket suitable for use with the most standard audio leads and connection to the headphone output socket of most audio systems The use of a headphone socket allows simple volume adjustment Connection via a Line Out socket may require additional equipment in order to adjust the volume level Pine pesenan Common Common Left Audio In Left Channel Right Audio In Right Channel e Input impedance 10k channel Maximum a c signal 200mV rms 4 9 3 DS Ports These ports are used for connection from an RJ 45 structured cabling system to
364. lect The Show Phone Screen option only applies to the A menu screens accessed when you press the key If the option is on if you receive a call while in the A menu the phone will automatically exit the menus and display the call details 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Show Phone Screen 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER User Guide IP Office PARTNER Version Page 58 Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Phone Settings 1408 1416 A Menu Auto Exit 8 2 Visual Alerting The message waiting lamp at the top right corner of the phone can also be used to indicate when you have a call alerting your phone The lamp is flashed to indicate a call waiting to be answered 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Visual Alerting 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 6 When completed press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 3 Audible Alerting The phone s audible ringer can be switched off
365. led call to your extension is turned into a normal ringing call instead PARTNER User Guide Page 18 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Basic Call Handling Hands Free Answer on Intercom 3 5 Adjusting the Volume While the phone is idle or ringing you can adjust the ringer volume When the phone is connected to a call you can adjust the speaker or handset volume To adjust the ringer volume 1 Use the amp up arrow and down arrow keys to change the ringer volume To adjust the caller volume The volume that gets adjusted will depend on whether you are using the handset speakerphone or headset 1408 and 1416 phones only at the time you use this process 1 Use the amp up arrow and down arrow keys to change the volume 3 6 Holding Calls When a call is on hold you can make and receive other calls on another line If a call is left on hold for longer than the specified interval it will recall to the extension that put it on hold To place a call on hold 1 During the call press the HOLD button or the button on which the call is taking place The Green light next to the button will wink to show that the call is on hold To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press the button next to the winking Green light You are reconnected to the call The green light changes to a steady green light 3 Transferring Calls Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can tra
366. lephone When another extension calls your extension your active absent text message appears on the caller s display This feature is only supported on ETR 18D ETR 34D 1408 and 1416 telephones It is not supported on ETR 6D and 1403 telephones To set and clear an absent text message you need to assign the feature to a programmable button with lights The button can then be used to activate select and deactivate the message To create an absent message button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 28 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Absent Message e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an absent message button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 28 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Absent Message and press Select 5 The cu
367. les used by an IP Office system Requirements e IP Office Administration PC A Windows PC Laptop with the IP Office Administrator Application suite installed 12 gt e LAN Cable IP Office 500v2 control units can use a standard RJ 45 RJ 45 LAN cable The Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager application automatically loads a control unit configuration file into memory and displays system information and settings in editor screens for you to check or alter Manager must then be used to save the modified configuration file back to the control unit L For customers or maintainers who do not have access to Manager almost all settings described in this document can be achieved through manual TUI commands described in the IP Office Essential Edition ETR Telephone System Programming User Guide Associated documents are e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Quick Install Manual e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator Tool Guide e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Programming and User Guide e P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version ETR Telephone System Programming and User Guide e Individual User Guides for associated telephone instruments ETR 1400 3910 3920 IP Office Technical Bulletins Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which you are installing This bulletin will contain important
368. ll business communications solution which is reliable established scalable easy to use and can grow as needed IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version is an IP Digital communication system designed exclusively to meet the unique needs of a small business The Essential Edition PARTNER Version supports a selection of system telephones many with displays that show you programming and operation feedback But don t throw that old telephone away because the Essential Edition PARTNER Version includes support for many single line telephones And you can connect many auxiliary devices such as fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners to the system On board basic voice mail eliminates the need for additional hardware This document provides system and component descriptions with details to support configuration and maintenance activities The main administration and analysis tool used with the Essential Edition PARTNER Version is the Essential Edition PARTNER Version admin tool known as Manager which has its own user manual i For customers or maintainers who do not have access to Manager almost all settings described in this document and in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Tool User Manual can be achieved through manual TUI commands described in the IP Office Essential Edition ETR Telephone System Programming User Guide Associated documents are e P Office Essential Edition P
369. lls or Conference Lamps on the button reflect whether the channel is in use On a small system with just 4 Analog trunks and no T1 trunks installed the SIP Channels would be numbered starting from Line Appearance 05 On a larger system with 8 Analog trunks and a T1 trunk with 24 channels the SIP Channels would start at Line Appearance 33 The maximum channel number allowed on the system is 64 You can configure a Line Appearance on any button with LEDs on any phone and you can also configure the Automatic Line Selection which will choose the default line you would select when you go off hook A SIP Trunk Line Appearance appears to have the Same properties as an Analog Trunk line Appearance e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range O to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to the voicemail system auto attendant e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when unanswered calls should be redirected to the voicemail system The delay for the redirection is set by the VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night values for the channel The options are Always Day Only Night Only or Never Service only Dial Plan Number Dialled number to be converted Result The number that will be o
370. log phone extensions Extension Supports ICLID modes e LED1 is used for base card status DTMFA DTMFC DTMFD FSK and UK20 REN 2 1 for external e Red On Error e Red Flash every bell device e Red Slow Flash Initializing 5 seconds Off Hook current bane Okay e Red Fast Flash 25mA Ring Voltage 40V 0 Intended for connection to two wire analog phones the ports do not include a ringing capacitor For connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors If fitted with an analog trunk card for the Phone 8 during power failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 51 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Optional Trunk The card can be fitted LED use depends daughter card type fitted Card Ports with one of the following e LED 9 is used for daughter card status trunk daughter cards The trunk daughter card then uses ports 9 to 12 on the e Red On Error Red Flash every base card for its trunk e Red Slow Flash Initializing 5 seconds connections Card okay Red Fast Flash e P500 Analog System Trunk Card shutdown e P500 PRI Trunk Analog Trunk Daughter Card Card e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use PRI Trunk Daughter Card e Off No trunk present Red Green Fast e Green on Trunk present Flash port 9 or e Green flas
371. lose Configuration Security Settings After Send Save Configuration File After Load Backup Files on Send Ul IP Office Manager Preferences Preferences Directories Discovery Visual Preferences Security validation Edit Services Base TCP Port Services Base TCP Pork S004 Enable Time Server Enable BootP and TFTP Servers Enable Port For Serial Communication Enter Port Number To Be Used fh 1 For Serial Communication E Auto Connect on start up Simplified view This field shows or hides the Service Base TCP Port setting Edit Services Base TCP Port Default On e Service Base TCP Port Default 50804 Access to the configuration and security settings on an Essential Edition PARTNER Version 3 2 system requires Manager to send its requests to specific ports This setting allows the TCP Base Port used by Manager to be set to match the TCP Base Port setting of the IP Office system The IP Office system s TCP Base Port is set through its security settings Enable Time Server Default On This setting allows Manager to respond to time requests from Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems Enable BootP and TFTP Servers Default On This setting allows Manager to respond to BOOTP request from IP Office systems for which it also has a matching BOOTP entry It also allows the Essential Edition PARTNER Version to respond to TFTP requests for files Enable Port for Serial Communication Not used This is a le
372. ltiple telephones dead no dial tone or lights PARTNER Version Quick Install IP Office Essential Edition Troubleshooting e Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 to Machine the system will generate an outside dial tone for the extension If you are using a speakerphone try using the handset If you have touch tone dialing you may have a faulty telephone or cord If you have rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 interval is too long reset it Setting may not be inserting a long enough pause use Star Code Dial Delay 410 to increase setting Recall feature isn t working Increase Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds If using the feature disconnects the call decrease Recall Timer Duration by 100 milliseconds You may be using Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial on a system that does not support far end disconnect call your local telephone company and find out if they support it Hold Disconnect Time 203 setting may be too short Automatic System Answer Mode 121 may be set to Disconnect change it to Hold or Ring Hold Disconnect Time 203 may be too long try resetting it Local telephone company does not send a hold release signal you may need the help of our hotline Power may have been interrupted to the control unit check the power cord the on off switch and the LEDs on the modules Power outlet may be faulty test the outlet with an appliance
373. ltiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction transfer and or use can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that
374. lugged into the right jack on the bottom of the telephone Telephone may need to be reset unplug the cord and with the handset hung up replug Telephone cord may be defective switch cords and try again Telephone may be defective switch telephones and try again There may be a problem with the control unit switch to a different port and try again Is the telephone cord plugged into the right jack of the DSS Is the Intercom Autodialer plugged into an electric outlet Telephone cord may be defective switch cords and try again Two calls may already be recording You may not have enough ports for Hunt Group 7 Make sure you have a four port mail system You may not have enough ports programmed in Hunt Group 7 Telephone may be part of a combination extension that includes a system telephone with Background Music on turn it off The message waiting light may not be compatible with the system only phones with LEDs not neon lights support message waiting lights Or the telephone may not be connected to the proper module Page 106 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Appendices Troubleshooting Problem Check this Can t make outside calls Can t make outside calls from pool buttons on pooled extensions Calls are answered automatically a call rings once then disappears as if answered Auxiliary device doesn t answer Trouble hearing the person you called Automatically dialed calls beginning with star codes
375. ly be changed by an administrator 1 From the Manager home 15 page click Change Remote Administrator Password PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 24 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Remote Admin Password 2 The Change Password dialog is displayed Change Password Change Password New Password 3 Make any required changes and click OK li Remember you are changing the password for accessing the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system to which you are attached not the manager application Please Note System Password The Avaya telephone system also uses a System password This password is a four digit password that must be entered at an extension to set or make changes to local settings such as call barring night service and other dialling restrictions Change System Password using Manager 1 From Manager home page Click the hot link Change System Settings 2 In the System Parameters box change system password Field accepts four chosen digits only Change System Password by using a telephone handset 1 Dial 403 2 Dial four chosen digits to set the system password PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 25 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 4 System Settings This window displays a summary of the hardware components installed in the phone system It also enables configuration of system specific se
376. m and acts as the License authorization for the control unit The SD card is inserted into the System SD slot on the rear of the control unit Except when necessary during maintenance the System SD slot should contain an Avaya SD card at all times The files on that card are used when the system is started and the Feature Key serial number only present on Avaya cards is used for the licensing of IP Office features e The control unit has two SD card slots labeled System SD and Optional SD e The system SD card is also used to store copies of core software binary files configuration files and backups as well as the voice mail application and the system status application e Embedded voicemail on the SD card provides 2 channels by default but can be licensed for up to 6 channels total e Various commands within the Manager interface enables the SD card contents to be backed up restored or copied These actions can also be achieved via the handset instructions to do this are provided in the system TUI guide e The additional SD card slot can be used to store occasional full copies of the System SD card or as an additional memory card to or from which files can be copied Non Avaya cards can be used for this as long as they conform to the standard below SDHC minimum AGB FAT32 format Single partition SDHC class2 FAT32 SPI amp SD bus System SD system fOnmary ibackup imall fdynamic 5 temp N See also SD Car
377. m of 6 voice ports Is the voice messaging comparable to PARTNER Messaging No The Essential Edition PARTNER Version voice messaging is comparable to PVM A and 12 it has a single auto attendant similar to PVM and a maximum of 15 hours storage more than PVM Which phones are supported by IP PARTNER Version PARTNER 6D 18D 34D ETR phones and IP Office 1400 series and any analog device supported on the Combination Card Phone 8 16 card or the Aux port of the ETR phones How many ETR Enhanced Tip and Ring phones are supported A maximum of 18 6 each on the ETR Module with 3 ETR modules maximum per IP Office 500v2 Is analog supported on the Aux port of the ETR phone Yes How is power fail supported In each ETR Module when used with the ATM4 trunk daughter card port 7 and 8 will failover to trunk port 12 Port 7 and 8 are not operational in normal power mode Which trunk interfaces are supported Analog T1 PRI and SIP trunks SIP trunks require the Combination Card Can IP500v2 systems in IP PARTNER Version be networked No Badger Communications Durand WI 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version Can IP PARTNER Version be upgraded to full IP Office functionality Yes A parameter in Manager will change modes Note that the ETR cards and ETR phones are only supported in IP PARTNER Version mode What are some of the key reliab
378. m supports the 1400 Series of Avaya digital telephones Supported models are the 1403 1408 and 1416 oD oO oO MESSE EEE EEE _ EEE Intercom Buttons BE Pas u Da TEL A Jsa ts 5 Line Button PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 12 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 1400 Series Phones 1408 Telephone Line Programmable 050 QO 0650 MO 0850 Buttons m 6 with lights OD 22O 0380 08D intercom Buttons HOLD N E OOOG OE D s VOLUME HEADSET d z 1416 Telephone Line Programmable Buttons 14 with lights E 4 207 O A Z sy Intercom Buttons o OO 9998 m 2 VOLUME HEADSET PARTNER Version Phone User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 3 Basic Call Handling PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 15 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 3 Basic Call Handling 3 1 Making Calls You can make a call by dialing an outside telephone number or an extension number e If the telephone number is one that is used frequently called it can be stored and dialed as a personal speed dial or using an auto dial button To make a call to another extension 1 Pick up the handset and press an idle INTERCOM button The green light next to the button is on steady and you will hear the dial tone 2 Dial the extension number e On 1400 Series phon
379. majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ 45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ 45 to RJ 45 cable However connection at the line providers end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers equipment e RJ 11 Phone Connectors Many phones use RJ 11 sockets and are supplied with RJ 11 to RJ 11 cables RJ11 plugs can be inserted into RJ 45 sockets and in many case the connection will work However this is not recommended or supported as the connection lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected An RJ 45 to RJ11 cable is available for these connections Standard IP Office Cables The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems The maximum length is applicable if the standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternative cable Description Standa Maximu 9 Way DTE Cable Connects to control unit RS232 DTE port 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 9 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling DS Line Cable Connects from RJ 45 sockets to RJ 11 7000478 4m 13 2 See table socketed DS and analog phones 71 N below PRI Trunk Cable Connects PRI trunk ports to the line 7002134 3m 9 10 providers network termination point RJ 45 40 a to RJ45 Red PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 32 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Getting Started Expansion Interconnect Cable Connects the control unit to expansion
380. mapping table entry e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension Pattern Ringing SA isting 2s off a OO OOR o 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 1 75s off O a TV O a smgasot a OOOO O O s smga SOS e osassring asso OOOO U OSO O8 o 0 25s ring 0 24 off 0 25 ring 2 25 off ls ring 3s off 2 13 3 1 T1 Advanced Setup XK Because some settings can conflict with or nullify other settings do not use this dialog except under direction of a trained Avaya technician or when directed to do so by support personnel This dialog allows setting of advanced T1 trunk settings that normally do not need to be changed The Channel Setup 60 option give access to a dialog for configuring individual channels Trunks T1 Advanced Setup Trunk Number 9 Trunk Parameters Clock Quality CSU Operation Framing ESF k Line Signaling CPE Channel Setup CAC Checking Haul Length 0 115 ft zero Suppression Channel Unit Foreign Exchange e Trunk Parameters e Clock Quality Default Network This option sets whether the IP Office should try to take its clock source for call synchronization and signalling from this line Preference should always be given to using the clock source from a central office exchange if available by setting at least one exchange line to Network e If multiple lines are set as Network
381. matically ticked 8 Select Upgrade 9 The system password is requested Enter it and click OK 10 The bin files required are transferred to the system and stored in temporary memory 11 Once all the files have been transferred the upgrade wizard will prompt whether it okay to proceed with the upgrade process Select Yes to continue 12 Each module being upgraded will delete its existing core software restart and load the new software file that was transferred This process may take several minutes for each unit Do not cancel or close the upgrade wizard while this process is running 13 Following the upgrade check that the upgrade wizard now shows that the selected units and modules have upgraded It may be necessary to select Refresh to update the information in the upgrade wizard display 5 7 3 Changing the IP Address Settings By default the IP Office system name is set to match its MAC address This can be changed to something more distinctive When a new or defaulted IP Office is switched on the control unit makes a DHCP requests for IP address settings on each of its LAN interfaces LAN1 and LAN2 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 100 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration Additional Processes e If the IP Office receives a response from a DHCP server it configures itself as a DHCP client using the address details provided by the DHCP server e If the IP Office does
382. max 3 1 PRI T1 daughter card may be added to any ETR6 card or DS card or Phone card increasing digital line capacity PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 14 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Overview Partner Constraints 2 2 Partner Constraints Max allowed in system IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Base Cards SE IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Daughter Cards ATM 4 Uni daughter 3 PRI 1 Uni daughter 1 I P Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Expansion Modules IP Office 500v2 PHONE 16 1 IP Office 500v2 DIGITAL STATION 16 1 Essential Edition PARTNER Version requires a presence of at least 1 ETR or Digital station to be used for TUI administration This needs the presence of at least 1 of the following cards e Comination Card e DS8 e ETR 6 System capacity for the Essential Edition PARTNER Version is flexible and can use combinations of the following hardware components Control unit 4 available slots maximum of 4 of the following cards e Up to 2 Combination cards each provides 6 DS ports 2 POTS station ports 4 POTS line ports and supports up to 10 SIP lines e Up to 3 ETR6 cards each provides 6 ETR station ports e Up to 3 DS8 cards each provides 8 digital station ports e Up to 3 Phone 8 cards each provides 8 POTS station ports o Maximum of 3 because a combination card DS 8 or ETR 6 mus
383. mber of prgrammabibuans win ans Rarer a7 programmabe Ban maus TO CL BE Speakerphone Yes PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Page 64 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Telephones 4 6 6 ETR18D This phone is only supported by an ETR6 card in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system All Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phone are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone AUX socket The ETR PARTNER Version telephones have fixed buttons that are already imprinted and line buttons that you can press to connect to an inside intercom or outside line If a line button is not assigned as an intercom or outside line button you can program an extension number or a feature on it The telephones also have a display which provides feedback messages and prompts from the system ETR18D Telephone Features Feature 18D Number of programmable buttons with lights Number of programmable buttons without lights i 4 Key mode line button capacity Y es 4 6 7 ETR34 This phone is only supported by an ETR6 card in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system All Refresh and Euro Style variants of the phone are supported An additional analog device using the same extension number can be connected via the ETR phone AUX socket The ETR PARTNER Version telephones have fixed
384. med Reboot Time oso e Call Barring Cee Ce 2 If Manager thinks the changes made to the configuration settings are merge able it will select Merge by default otherwise it will select Immediate e Merge Sends the configuration settings without rebooting the IP Office This mode should only be used with settings that are merge able e Immediate Send the configuration and then reboot the Essential Edition PARTNER Version e When Free Send the configuration and reboot the Essential Edition PARTNER Version when there are no calls in progress This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Timed The same as When Free but waits for a specific time after which it then wait for there to be no calls in progress The time is specified by the Reboot Time This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Reboot Time This setting is used when the reboot mode Timed is selected It sets the time for the Essential Edition PARTNER Version reboot If the time is after midnight the IP Office s normal daily backup is canceled e Call Barring These settings can be used when the reboot mode When Free is selected They bar the sending or receiving of any new calls 3 The following warning will appear if the configuration being sent contain any errors indicated by a x icon in the error pane The configuration can still be sent by selected Yes IP Office Manager 2 Ir ffice_1 has errors a
385. milarly a group can be taken in or out of Night Service by using Manager short codes or an associated time profile When the group is in Night Service callers are played the group s Out of Hours greeting and can then leave a message Note Alternatively if an Out of Hours Fallback Group has been configured then callers are passed to that group e Profile Select whether the time profile is used e Record Greeting These fields are not editable They indicate the short code to be dialled on the phone system to record the different parts of the auto attendant greeting e Setup Auto Attendant Actions This table allows you to assign which key presses have associated actions for the auto attendant e Key The standard telephone dial pad keys 0 to 9 plus and Fax e Action The following actions can be assigned to each key e No Action The corresponding key takes no action e Dial by Name Callers are asked to dial the name of the user they require and then press The recorded mailbox name prompts of matching users are then played back for the caller to make a selection The name order used is set by the Dial by Name Match Order setting Users without a recorded name prompt or set to Ex Directory are not included Users can record their name by accessing their mailbox and dialing 05 e Dial By Number This option allows callers with DTMF phones to dial the extension number of the user they require No destination is set for this opti
386. mited to a maximum of 4 with a maximum of 2 per ETR6 base card PARTNER User Guide Page 8 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 ETR Telephones 1 1 Fixed Buttons In addition to the line buttons the telephones have some or all of the following fixed buttons which are already imprinted e INTERCOM Press to make or answer a call to or from another extension If you receive a call on a T1 line with Direct Inward Dialing DID and you cannot access that line from a line button the call will appear on your Intercom button e FEATURE Press to change programmed settings or use system features e CONF Press to add other parties to your call e TRANSFER Press to pass a call to another extension e HOLD Press to put a call on hold e SPKR Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on e MIC HFAI Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature e Volume Control Buttons Press to decrease or d amp to increase the volume as follows e To adjust ringer volume press while the telephone is idle and the handset is in the cradle e To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker e To adjust handset volume p
387. n 3 1 7 2 Reboot When this command is used the Select IP Office dialog is displayed Once an IP Office system is selected a valid user name and password are required After OK is pressed the type of reboot can then be selected Reboot Reboot Immediate O When Free O time ist PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 89 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 system SD Optional SD system system Torimary P orimary backup ylyrmail I ydynamiic dynamic temp temp Feature Key Order of configuration file search during boot up 3 1 7 3 System Shutdown When this command is used the Select I P Office dialog is displayed Clicking Known Units displays all connected systems including system extension units and any connected to the network Once an IP Office system is selected OK can be clicked to shutdown that system Note A system must be shutdown before an SD card is removed or inserted 3 1 7 4 Upgrade This command starts the Upgrade Wizard tool This tool is used to compare the software level of the control unit and expansion modules within Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems against the software level of the bin binary files Manager has available The Upgrade Wizard can then be used to select which units to upgrade Ah WARNING Incorrect use of the upgrade command can halt IP Office operation and render units in the system unusable You must refer t
388. n the option provided when O is pressed are e For IP Office mode the call follows the Leave Mail action s Failure or Success results connections depending on whether the caller pressed O before or after the record tone e For Intuity mode pressing O always follows the Reception Breakout DTMF QO setting e Breakout DTMF 2 The number to which a caller is transferred if they press 2 while listening to the mailbox greeting rather than leaving a message 2 on embedded voicemail e Breakout DTMF 3 The number to which a caller is transferred if they press 3 while listening to the mailbox greeting rather than leaving a message 3 on embedded voicemail e Voicemail Email Radio Buttons Enable voicemail user to set telephone system response to voicemail for that user e Off Don t send email alerts for new messages e Copy Send a copy of each new message received to the user s email address e Forward Forward each new message received to the user s email address deleting the message from their mailbox e Alert Send an email alert for each new message received e Equipment Type Default Standard e Loudspeaker Paging Select this option for an extension connected to a paging amplifier e Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 Select this option for an extension connected to a door phone device The phone system can support two such devices The setting is linked to the Assign Extension setting on the Door Phone 1 45 and Door Phone 2
389. n Phone User Guide Page 28 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features Call Coverage 4 6 Auto Dialing Auto dialing uses numbers stored under one of the phone s programmable buttons Whenever a number need to be dialed pressing the button will dial the stored number To To To use an auto dial button 1 At dial tone or whenever you want to dial a number press the programmed auto dial button 2 The stored number is dialed create an auto dial button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 To create an auto dial button to store an extension number press Intercom 1 For a button to store any other type of number press Intercom 2 5 Enter the number for calls made using the button The number can include and and the following special characters Intercom 2 type only Function Press to insert Character Description Inserts a 1 5 second pause Transfer O R Send a hook switch flash signal 6 The current setting of the button will now be AD I auto dial intercom or AD O auto dial other followed by the stored number e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle e To clear press the MI
390. n another building additional In Range Out Of Building IROB protective equipment must be used For phones connected to IP Office DS ports the supported device supplied by ITWLinx is a towerMAX DS 2 module This IROB device was previous badged by Avaya as the 146E IROB The protection device should be installed as per the instructions supplied with the device The ground points on the IP Office control unit and the DS modules must be connected to a protective ground using 18AWG wire with a green and yellow sleeve Typically the IROB 2 RJ 45 EQUIPMENT ports are straight through connected to the 2 RJ45 LINE ports This allows existing RJ 45 structured cabling using pins 4 and 5 to be used without rewiring for up to two DS connection However each of these ports can be used to connect a second extension using pins 3 and 6 Main Building u Secondary Building FF DSi Control Unit IE J a PFa Digital ONE nn ae Primary gr Station fau uf M Protection Boxes f Eathed Ducted Approved Ground Point Cabling Approved Ground Point me a Farm Ra 1 Not used 1 Ra 2 Not used 2 5 i 3 Ring II Optional 3 i 4 Ring 4 5 Tip I 5 6 Tip II Optional 6 7 Not used 7 8 Not used 8 The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx http www itwlinx com 4 7 2 Analog Phone Barrier Box Where analog phone extensions are required in another building additional protective equipment must
391. n has the following consequences e Mailboxes are based on names For all users and groups if their name is changed they may no longer be associated with their former mailbox e Voicemail is case sensitive If a mailbox or start point name is entered incorrectly within a Manager or Voicemail Pro the intended operation will not occur and the call may be disconnected e Voicemail removes spaces at the end of mailbox names If spaces are left at the end of a mailbox user s name within Manager when Voicemail creates the directory the space at the end of the name will be dropped When this occurs the mailbox cannot be found as there is a miss match between the user name and directory The default configuration for Essential Edition PARTNER Version allows almost immediate voicemail operation once the voicemail server is running The IP Office default settings are e Voicemail on for each user and hunt group on the IP Office PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 75 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e No Voicemail Code set for any mailboxes Until a code is entered for a mailbox it can only be accessed from the user s own extension e No Voicemail Email or Voicemail Help operational e No Voicemail Reception for user mailboxes e Whilst hunt group mailboxes are created and used by default there is no default method for accessing them A method for accessing each hunt group mailbox should be progr
392. n on the display 4 To add additional text or edit the existing text press More and then Edit 5 To complete the process press the absent text message button again To deactivate the absent text message 1 Press the absent text message button The green light flutters and the active absent text message is displayed W in pos 1 2 Press the button beneath the word Dactiv 3 To complete the process press the absent text message button again PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 25 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 4 4 Forwarding Calls All external internal and transferred calls directed to your extension can be diverted to a different internal extension number You can enter the destination extension telephone number and select when calls are redirected using a programmed button Before you can automatically forward calls you need to assign the feature to a button with lights The button can then be used to turn call forwarding on and off as required e Selected users may also be able to do remote call forwarding where they forward their calls to an external number If that is the case consult your system administrator you can use your personal speed dials 31 as the forwarding destination e Some users may also be able to use cell phone connect again consult your system administrator With cell phone connect the call will ring at both your extension and at the remote call forwarding destination This is som
393. n one of two modes depended on whether it is licensed or not The same software is installed in either case with the licenses if any being entered in the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system configuration e 3rd Party TAPI In this licensed mode TAPI software can be used to control call function on multiple user extension This mode is used with CTI Developer applications DVD lt APPSDVD gt License Optional Licenses are required for 3rd party TAPI mode operation PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements Operating System Support RAM Server OS Hard Disk Free Space 2003 Server xX Processor 2008 Server OX Pentium Client OS ae Celeron XP Professional Windows 7 x Ports Location ProgramFiles Avaya IP Office Ports 0 TAPI2 TAPI tspi2w tsp PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition UDP 50797 Page 77 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 e DevLink Provides a real time event stream in addition to the SMDR interface provided in Essential Edition PARTNER Version SMDR The real time event stream takes the form of a call record which is issued whenever the state of any endpoint of a call changes typically there are two end points on a call but for some circumstances such as conference calls intruded calls there may be more 4 8 5 Call Logging Applications A wide range of 3rd party applications exist to provide call logging and acc
394. n program a voice mailbox transfer button to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button and then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number If you are using call Screening you cannot use Voice Mailbox Transfer To transfer a caller to an extensions mailbox 1 During the call press FEATURE 14 or press a Voice Mailbox Transfer button if the extension has one programmed 2 Dial the two digit extension number of the extension for which the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up To create a voice mailbox transfer button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 14 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Voice Mailbox Transfer e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a voice mailbox transfer button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3
395. n to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the telephone number or numbers you will be using with this equipment e The facility interface codes FIC for 1 544 MBps digital connection are 04DU9 BN 04DU9 DN 04DU9 IKN 04DU9 ISN e The facility interface code FIC for analog trunk connection are OL13A OL13B OL13C O2AC2 O2LA2 O2LB2 O2LC2 O2LR2 O2LS2 e The facility interface code FIC for analog trunk connection are OL13A OL13B OL13C 02AC2 02GS2 O2LA2 O2LB2 O2LC2 O2LR2 O2LF2 e The Service Order Code SOC for 1 544 MBps digital connection is 6 0Y e The Service Order Code SOC for analog trunk connection is 9 0Y e Disconnection You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line or lines e Hearing Aid Compatibility The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC Ringer Equivalence Number REN The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact t
396. nager During installation it is recommended that the control unit is started without it being connected to any other unit This ensures that the Essential Edition PARTNER Version defaults to a known set of IP address settings This section covers connecting your installation PC directly to the control unit Requirements e IP Office Administration PC A Windows PC Laptop with the IP Office Administrator Application suite installed 12 gt e LAN Cable IP Office 500v2 control units can use a standard RJ45 RJ45 LAN cable Direct Connection to a Defaulted IP Office 500v2 Control Unit 1 Connect the LAN cable from the PC LAN port to the LAN or LANI port on the control unit 2 Check that the orange LED lamp at the control unit LAN port is on The green LED may also be flickering as it indicates traffic across the LAN connection 3 Your PC should automatically connect to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version 4 You can now start Manager PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 13 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 5 The default address for an IP Office control unit LAN port is 192 168 42 1 255 255 255 0 If Manager does not detect the Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit you may have to change the TCP IP properties for the PC LAN port to the following Fixed IP address 192 168 42 203 Default gateway 192 168 42 1 255 255 255 0 e Although setting the PC to be a D
397. nager 7 to configure the new trunks or extensions users Lower Capacity Replacement If replacing with a component of the same type but lower capacity after restarting the IP Office the configuration will need to be edited to remove redundant entries 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or external expansion module Note the card slot or expansion port used as the replacement must be installed in the same position 3 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 4 Restart the IP Office system 5 Use Manager to delete the trunks or extensions users in the configuration that are no longer supported by the component installed Adding a New Component If adding a new component to an available slot or port when restarted the IP Office will automatically create configuration entries for the new trunks or extensions users 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Install the replacement using the appropriate process for the type of component Fitting IP Office 500 cards 3 Restart the IP Office system 4 Use Manager to configure the new trunks or extensions users Permanent Removal If permanently removing the component the configuration will need to be edited to remove redundant trunk or extension user entries 1 Switch off the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 2 Remove the card or exter
398. nal expansion module 3 Restart the IP Office system 4 Use Manager to delete the trunks or extensions users in the configuration that relate to the component removed 5 In the Control Unit section of the configuration delete the entry for the component that is no longer present in the system Replacement of a Different Type If replacing a component with one of a different type the process should be divided into two stages First remove the existing component using the Permanent Removal process above and adjust the configuration and reboot Then install the new component using the Adding a New Component process above PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 74 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Additional Administration Tasks PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 75 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Chapter 3 Main Menu Commands PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 77 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 3 Main Menu Commands This section describes administration actions available from the main drop down menus nung Ciba Sia ae Tool Tigi Ohi I 7 Sod es 1 u SS S BISHE ern FL E EEE O babes i a Er EI the ttn tots ere TFEP Lew irate et aoe Prost Tag 4 Note The Edit and Help menus have standard Windows
399. nalog phone 51 combination 54 daughter 50 digital station 50 ETR6 52 Change IP address 100 password 28 system components 95 Checklist 29 Clock signal 94 Component descriptions 46 Conference parties 46 Connecting handsets 42 Connection grounding 33 out of building Connector phone 32 RJ11 32 Control unit 46 audio connector 47 dimensions 17 grounding 33 PARTNER System Unit 17 rear panel 47 reset 47 ventilation space 30 Copying files 94 Core software 23 100 CPU 41 Customer handover 42 D Daughter cards analog trunk PRI trunk 56 PRI U trunk trunk 20 55 DECT 30 Default password 88 DHCP settings 88 Dial plan 23 Digit sequence 23 Digital station card 50 Directories 90 Document history 8 Documentation 30 Dynamic system files 90 E Earthing 33 73 EMC Cautions 38 71 20 55 56 20 55 Canadian Department of Communications 110 EMC Caution for China 110 Federal Communications Commission 110 Environmental requirements 29 33 Equipment availability 9 disposal 8 protective 33 servicable 9 Page 113 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Expansion module 16 57 connections 57 digital station 21 57 phone 21 Expansion Modules phone 59 Extension ID 95 External expansion modules 21 External trunk configuration 94 F Faulty Units 9 FCC Rules 109 Feature keys 18 Features PARTNER 14 File copy 94 dynamic system 90 Fitting daughter cards 39 Fixed buttons 65 G General information co
400. nalog trunks AUDIO Rear of IP Office control unit Used for input of an external music on hold source Digital ATM4 Combination base card x2 Connection of Avaya digital station phones supported by IP Office Station DS Digital Station expansion modules Connection of digital phones x16 RS232 DTE All control units x1 Used for control unit maintenance under Avaya guidance On All expansion modules x1 expansion modules not used ETR ETR Enhanced Tip and Ring Used for the connection of DTMF analog phone devices and Avaya provided by the ETR6 base card ETR phones EXPANSION All control units x various Used for interconnection of external expansions modules and All expansion modules except control units WANS x1 EXT O P All control units x1 Used to control external relay systems The port provides two switchable on off and pulse controls rh All modules x1 Used for connection of functional or protective ground if required LAN All control units x various 10 100Mbps Ethernet LAN ports PF Analog Trunk expansion module Analog power fails ports x2 PHONE Phones expansion modules x8 Analog phone extension ports On older units these ports are POT x16 labeled as POT ports PRI Single PRI trunk cards x1 PRI trunk ports Dual PRI trunk cards x2 4 9 1 ANALOG Port These ports are analog trunk ports The ATM4 analog trunk cards only support loop start trunks ee u RJ4S 1 Not used PARTNER Version Instal
401. nd CTS Clear To Send DSR Data Set Ready Ground DCD Data Carrier Detect DTR Data Terminal Ready RI Ring Indicator PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Oo A e A D OIN NUW IP Office 9 Way RS232 PC Terminal DTE Port Adaptor Page 84 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Physical Ports PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 85 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Chapter 5 Administration PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 87 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 5 Administration This section lists the administration tasks that are involved in making any changes to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version set up These actions are achieved by using IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version application Please refer to the IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Admin Tool User Guide for detail e Changes to system parameters e Changes to users groups and lists e Trunk set up e Auxiliary equipment connection e Auto attendant set up e STUN settings for networks e Management of the SD card 5 1 Initial Configuration This section covers basic configuration changes required for all Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems e Change the Default Passwords e Change the System Name and IP Address DHCP Setti
402. ndicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction transfer and or use can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on Avaya s web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com For additional support telephone numbe
403. ne system is licensed If the license cover is exceeded an error message is displayed Remote Call Forwarding with simultaneous internal alert mobile twinning in IP Office terminology allows a user to send internal and external calls destined for a particular extension to an external phone In addition the call rings at internal extension s and receives the extension s coverage including Voicemail treatment when the call has not been answered This feature is only available on systems that have external trunks with answer supervision e Twinned Number Default Blank This is the number used for twinning if selected above PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 33 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e List Memberships Information field not editable This field shows a summary of the Allowed Lists 28 AL and Disallowed Lists 28 DL to which the user belongs If the user is selected these can be edited in the Membership Assignment table below e Group Memberships Information field not editable This field shows a summary of the hunt groups pickup groups and calling groups to which the user belongs If the user is selected these can be edited in the Membership Assignment table below e Membership Assignment This section allows the list and groups memberships of the currently selected user to be edited The Type option is used to select either List or Group memberships e List 27 If List i
404. nformation is retained for approximately two hours thus allowing Essential Edition PARTNER Version to continue operation When a card is subsequently reinserted the control unit may not function correctly for the first two hours 5 3 5 Recreating an IP Office SD Card The new card must be correctly formatted because for the System SD slot only Avaya SD cards with a Feature Key should be used h WARNING Avaya supplied SD cards should not be formatted using any other method than the format commands withinEssential Edition PARTNER Version Manager and IP Office System Status Application Formatting the cards using any other method will remove the feature key used for IP Office licensing from the card Note This task requires a PC with an SD card read write drive attached and IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version software installed i Only this method should be used for formatting an Avaya SD card Using IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager ensures that special files required for Essential Edition PARTNER Version operation are created and that the Feature Key information is retained NZ Ab WARNING All File Will Be Erased Note that this action will erase any existing files and folders on the card Once a card has been formatted the folders and files required for Essential Edition PARTNER Version operation can be loaded onto the card from the Manager PC using the Recreate IP Office SD Ca
405. ng or similar PC running Windows XP 2003 During the Staging Installation later in this manual we recommend that you use a Laptop PC that has the IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration Tool Manager application installed with a LAN cable for direct connection to the control unit to enable changes to be made in the basic configuration or to set up user lists Indelible marker for cable labeling Parts Required 1 2 Cable ties Cabling labels PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 12 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Getting Started 3 Technical Bulletins Each Essential Edition PARTNER Version software release is normally accompanied by a Technical Bulletin detailing special installation requirements Known issues etc Various software releases and their associated Technical Bulletins can also be obtained from http Support avaya com Pre installation activity involves the following e Evaluating the environmental requirements e Connecting lines and extensions e Identifying telephone type to be installed at each extension e Mounting and connecting auxiliary equipment e Obtain a Laptop PC which has IP Office Manager R6 0 7 or above installed e Ensure you have a pre programmed Avaya SD card that is compatible with the system you are about to install Note The pre installation tasks listed above should have been completed before installing the hardware 2 1 U
406. ng start up U Avaya IP Office RG Manager 3 jo This is called the Welcome Filo Edit View Hep view and is presented briefly during application start followed by log in session and presentation of the Administration screen i This view remains WELCOME to IP Office displayed if Manager is unable Administration to find a configuration file that is compatible with Essential Edition PARTNER Version This can be because the control unit is not powered up or incorrect connection Oper Conhiguralion from Syster thus preventing the manager Read a Configuration from File application accessing the contents of the SD card Refer to the separate Admin tool user manual for further instructions What would you like to do Create an Offline Configuration PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 21 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 The login dialog is displayed Configuration Service User Login Default Service User password is Administrator IF Office OOEOO7052194 IP 500 vz After successful login the welcome screen is replaced by the Administrator home page Service User Mame Administrator After start up Ca Avaya lien Ri Manager The Manager screen changes to this Admin home page as soon as the control unit has completed booting fle Edt wew Hep i System Wolcome to IP Ollice Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration Wihal would you hke bo do Mlease review Ihe cur
407. ngle line telephone switch the line cord and try again If this does not work call the telephone company Is Forced Account Code Entry assigned to this extension Is your dial mode touch tone or rotary incorrect Use Dial Mode 201 to reset it Has someone changed the Pool Access Restriction for the extension Pool may not be assigned to the extension There may not be enough lines assigned to the pool to Support the usage One or more local telephone company lines may be faulty test each line from extension 10 Automatic System Answer and or Direct Extension Dial is turned on turn it off an auxiliary device fax modem voice messaging system answering machine answers when it should not either e Check the device and adjust it to answer on a later ring or turn off auto answer e Set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring Device may not recognize the system ringing pattern e Change the extension s ring pattern by using Distinctive Ring 308 PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 30 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Trouble hearing the person you called Automatically dialed calls beginning with star codes are miss dialed Call rings continuously but no one at other end Calls on hold are disconnected Calls on Automatic System Answer lines are disconnected Call on Hold hangs up but line does not disconnect All telephones dead no dial tone or lights Mu
408. ngs e Trunk Configuration e Remove Unused Trunks Disabling the use of trunks and trunk channels that are not available e Select the Clock Source for Digital Lines Altering which digital trunk is used to provide the IP Office with its clock signal for call synchronization e Enter Trunk Prefixes On systems where a prefix is being used for external dialing ensure that the same prefix is added to incoming numbers in order to allow return calls 5 2 Changing the Default Password h WARNING Password Change Required New Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems use default security settings These settings must be changed to make the system secure As a minimum you should change the default Remote Administrator Password if IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version is to be attached Failure to do so will render the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system potentially unsecured Remote administration password This password controls remote or local access to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system to make administrative changes to the overall set up such as changes to the configuration or equipment The administration password can only be changed by an administrator 1 From the Manager home page select Change Remote Administration Password A log in dialog is displayed 2 Provide login detail and enter password case sensitive as your default password The change dialog is displayed 3 Make required chang
409. nks Advanced Parameters Advanced System Parameters Enable Network Time Synchronization Hold Reminder Time u Transter Return Aing Outside Conference Denial Disallowed STUN Settings for Network Enable STUN 3 in 4 4 STON Port 47a Run STUN Firewall MAT Type Cancel Blocking Firewall w Public Port SMTP Server Configuration IP Address D g Email From Address Advanced Parameters setup allows the administrator ta modify C Server Requires Authentication User Name advanced FARTHER system wide parameters Password e Advanced System Parameters Ring on Transfer Recall Timer Duration S00 Br Toll Call Prefis 0 or 1 Required Before Area Code w IP Address aan A Binding Refresh Time seconds Public IF Address oO oO D a g 0 Fort Use Challenge Response Authentication e Enable Network Time Synchronization Default On When selected the phone system will use the time included in the ICLID on incoming calls as its system time e Hold Reminder Time Default 60 seconds Range 0 Off to 180 seconds This setting controls how long calls remain on hold before recalling to the user who held the call Note that the recall only occurs if the user has no other connected call Recalled calls will continue ringing and do not follow forwards or go to voicemail PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 70 Issue 1b 01 F
410. npacking Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya reseller or distributor E Objective To check that the correct equipment has been supplied and that no damage has occurred during transit 4 Information Required e Equipment Checklist Obtain an installation checklist of the parts and equipment expected e Identify the SD memory Card S The serial number is printed on the SD prefixed with either SN or FK e Check for Package Damage Before unpacking any equipment check for any signs of damage that may have occurred during transit If any damage exists bring it to the attention of the carrier e Check the Correct Parts Have Been Delivered Check all cartons against the packing slip and ensure that you have the correct items Report any errors or omissions to the equipment supplier e Retain All Packaging and Documentation While unpacking the equipment retain all the packaging material Fault returns are accepted only if repackaged in the original packaging If performing a staged installation the original packaging will also assist when repacking equipment to be moved to the final install site e Ensure that Anti Static Protection Measures are Observed Ensure that anti static protection measures are observed at all times when handling equipment with exposed electrical circuit boards e Check All Parts Visually inspect each item and check that all the necessary documentation
411. nsfer both outside and internal calls to another extension To transfer a call 1 While the call is active press the TRANSFER button The call is put on hold and the green light next to the line or intercom button will wink 2 When you hear the dial tone dial the number to which the call is to be transferred Then do one of the following e To transfer the call without announcing it an unsupervised transfer hang up or press the transfer button again as soon as you hear the extension ringing The transfer is complete If the extension is not answered the call will be returned to your extension When your extension rings left the handset to be reconnected to the caller e To announce the call before announcing it a Supervised transfer wait for the call to be answered If the called party is willing to accept the call hang up or press the transfer button again to complete the transfer If no one answers or the call is refused press the button next to the winking green light to be reconnected to the caller PARTNER User Guide Page 19 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 3 8 Conferencing Calls The Conference feature allows you to conference other parties including yourself into a call A conference call can connect up to 5 calls including up to 2 external callers To create a conference call 1 While active on a call press the CONF or CONFERENCE button The first party is now on hold 2 Dial the telephone number
412. nt Details Ae MONON UN ea a 46 4 1 1 Rear Connections a assue dhe sabato aces 47 42 5SD Card ee Pe eiieie 48 AS Base GANGS nn een 49 4 31 Digital Stalose see 50 4 3 2 Analog Phone 51 4 383 EIR6 Os Een ee 52 4 3 4 ATM Combination Card ccccccccsseeceseeseeeeeaes 54 AA TUNG ANG Ses eee cease ae eect 55 4 4 1 Analog Trunk Carrd ccccccccccceseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeees 56 4 4 2 PRI Trunk Cards cccccccccccsceecseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaees 56 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Contents 4 5 Expansion MOdules cccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 57 A 5 1 Digital Station ans 57 4 5 2 Phone MoQule nein 59 4 6 Telephones ea 61 46 1 14 16 ee an 61 4 6 2 1408 een ei 61 4B S TAOS a e a e a aaia 62 4 6 A ETRSAD nenne 63 2 6 3 ETRO Doua lese 64 4 6 6 ETR TOD een 65 KO ETRA Nee 65 AG O E TRTO eien acisseasesnsintuieuiase een 66 2 69 EFRO cai e e 67 2 6 10 BI DE ana 68 46 11 DI 2 eek seen 68 16 12 POTSya a 69 4 6 13 Phone Add Ons 002222200000000200000nn000 BR 70 4 7 Out of Building Telephone Installations COPY 71 4 7 1 DS Phones aaa era 72 4 7 2 Analog Phone Barrier BOX ccccsssseeeeseeeeeeees 72 4 7 3 Rack Mounting Barrier BOxeS cccssseeeeeees 73 4 8 Associated Applications ccccccssssesceeeeceseseeeeeeesaeeees 75 4 8 1 Volcemal a 75 4 8 2 System Status Application SSA
413. nt or other protective rights of Avaya or others Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to Lucent Technologies have been transferred or licensed to Avaya All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements Any comments or suggestions regarding this document should be sent to wgctechpubs avaya com 2010 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Avaya Unit 1 Sterling Court 15 21 Mundells Welwyn Garden City Hertfordshire AL7 1LZ England Tel 44 0 1707 392200 Fax 44 0 1707 376933 Web http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase PARTNER Version Quick Install Page 36 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 AVAYA IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Administration Tool User Guide Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2010 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases Documentation Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not re
414. ntact Closure Group The phone system has two ports which can be connected to external relay systems for example systems used to open doors You can configure which users are able to activate those ports and the type of activation There are two separate dialogs one for Contact Closure Group 1 and one for Contact Closure Group 2 Each has the Same range of settings Auxiliary Equipment Contact Closure Group 1 Setup Door Phone 1 Contact Closure Type 3 Seconds ON w BE Extensions ta be enabled Available Items Selected Items Contact Closure Group Add gt Contact Closure Group 2 Add All gt gt Music On Hold SDR lt Remove lt lt Remove Al e Contact Closure Type Default 3 seconds On Sets how long the closure is activated when a user presses a contact closure button The options are 1 Second On 3 Seconds On 5 Seconds On and Toggle change the contact between open or closed PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 47 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e Extensions to be enabled Default None This table is used to select which user extensions are able to activate the contact closure by dialing feature codes at their extension or using programmable buttons set to the Contact Closure 37 gt feature 2 13 Trunks a The Trunks dialog displays a list of the Installed Trunks excluding SIP trunks 62 gt Installed Trunks Ps Line Number Line Type Line Su
415. ntenance action When the configuration is next opened the fact that it has been altered will be indicated e Delete Contact I nformation Select this option to take the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system out of special control e Leave contact information and flags unchanged Administrators only This option is only available to service users logging in with administrator rights 4 1 3 Read Configuration This option enables you to open a configuration file for examination Normally this option would only be used by service personnel investigating a suspect file or wanting to copy part of it PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 103 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 104 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Chapter 5 Appendix SMDR PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 105 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 5 Appendix SMDR The Essential Edition PARTNER Version control unit is able to send SMDR Station Message Detail Reporting records to a specified IP address and port Typically an SMDR record is output for each call between two parties internal and or external that is handled by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system In some scenarios for example transfers where a call involves multiple parties then multiple SMDR records may be output for each
416. ntent 8 repair 9 system description 14 training 9 web sites 9 Getting started 29 Ground symbols 33 Grounding control units 33 H Hazard Symbols 108 Hazardous Substances 8 Incoming call routes 42 Initial configuration 88 Installation 28 38 rack mounting 33 wall mounting 36 Installer 28 Introduction 7 IP address 100 IP Office base cards 16 combination cards 16 control unit 16 installation 28 system 16 IP Office Operation in Canada 111 USA 111 K Knowledge base 30 L LAN 41 75 81 Laptop 41 Layout 8 LED 41 Level of software 23 Licenses 18 76 77 97 Lightening protection 38 71 108 Line appearance 62 M Manager 28 75 Managing 28 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual IP Office Essential Edition Message waiting indicator 62 Module testing 42 Modules trunk interface 109 Monitor application 75 76 Mounting clearances rack 33 wall 33 36 33 36 O Other documents 7 Out of building 38 Out of building connection 71 P Packaging 29 PARTNER features 14 Parts check 29 Parts required 31 Password change 28 default 88 system 88 Phone POT Port 82 1403 62 1408 61 1416 61 3920 68 addons 70 analog 72 analog barrier box 72 assembling 42 connectors 32 DECT 68 DS 72 ETRi8 66 ETR18D 65 ETR34 65 ETR34D 63 ETR6 67 ETR6D 64 extensions outside 38 IROB 72 POTS 69 supported 22 61 system shutdown wireless 68 Phone POT Port 82 Pillars support 39 Plan dial 2
417. nts of the memory cards are displayed PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 93 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 Select File Backup System Files 5 The contents of the primary folder on the System SD card will be copied to the backup folder 5 3 6 3 Copying the System Card to the Optional Card i This process copies all files on the System SD card to the Optional SD card It System SD Optional SD includes the primary and backup folders and the embedded voicemail files system system including message files fonmary forimary Any matching files and folders on the Optional SD card are overwritten backup backup i There is no in built method for copying the contents of an Optional SD card Avail mall back onto a System SD card If that is necessary it must be done by fdynamic dynamic removing the cards and copying files using a PC SDHC compatible card temp reader Feature Key Copying the system card to the optional card using Manager 1 Using Manager main menu select File Advanced Embedded File Management 2 From the Select IP Office dialog tick the box beside the IP Office system you want to work with 3 The file contents of the memory cards are displayed 4 Select File Copy System Card 5 The contents of the System SD card are copied to the Optional SD card 5 4 External Trunk Configuration This section cover the basic requirements for external trunk conf
418. o 4 selected Seize the specified line if it is idle and then make a call using that line Answer or seize the call on the specified line Page the loudspeaker device attached to the system Page both the loudspeaker device attached to the system and the extensions in calling group 71 Call the available extensions in one of the calling groups 1 to 4 Page the available extensions in one of the calling groups 1 to 4 Call the available extensions in one of the hunt groups 1 to 6 Page the first available extension in one of the hunt groups 1 to 6 Page 23 Issue 1a 20 January 2010 4 2 Naming Your Extension You can assign a name to your extension up to 15 characters long The name is then displayed on the phone and also on other extensions when you make or receive calls To change your extension name ETR 18D 34D 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press Intercom 1 4 Enter the extension name e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space GE sasons E _2abeasc WE sen eer s soa 6 omnomo Es 7 parsons e oww o wwz meren Lof o sn e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique
419. o change your extension name ETR 18D 34D 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press Intercom 1 4 Enter the extension name e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cursor will move onto the next space 11 amp Ea 2abcABC aoe 3defDEF 4ghiGHI EA 5jkIJKL 6 6mnoMNO BE Ey a Foarseors fs em a oem een Bol Dose fe e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle e To remove the current name press the MIC HFAI key To change your extension name 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Telephone Programming When displayed press Select 3 Use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Extension Name When displayed press Select 4 The current setting is displayed 5 To enter a new name dial the characters using the dial pad buttons When finished press Enter e Enter a character by pressing the indicated button until that character is displayed If you pause more than 1 second after press a button the cu
420. o finish entry IMPORTANT Once a new message has been listened to it is marked as old and is automatically deleted after 24 hours If you do not want the message deleted you must mark it as saved by pressing 5 while listening to the message PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 39 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 5 2 Listening to Your Messages When you log in to your mailbox you are automatically played any new messages After a message has been played it is marked as being an old message Old messages are automatically deleted after 24 hours unless you mark the message as saved Login New messages played 4 Delete message 1 Old messages 5 cave message Saved messages 6 Forward message Repeat last message El Skip message Rewind F SECs 4 Advance 5 secs Return call Exit voicemail When you listen to any of your messages you have the following options e Press 4 to delete the message e Press 5 to save the message e Press 6 to forward the message See Forwarding a Message 45 gt e Press 7 to repeat the last message e Press 8 to exit voicemail e Press 9 to skip to the next message e Press to rewind the message a few seconds e Press to advance the message a few seconds e Press to return the call See Replying to Messages 455 To listen to an old message 1 Login 3 to your mailbox 2 Press 1 to listen to your old messages To save a mess
421. o the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Technical Bulletins for a specific release for full details of performing software upgrades to that release h WARNING Reboot which takes place at the end of this process will restart the phone system and disconnect all currently connected calls Avaya recommend that Upgrade is performed as an Out of working hours task e Performing any other actions on a system during an upgrade or closing the upgrade wizard and Manager during an upgrade may render systems unusable e During an upgrade the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system may restrict calls and services It will reboot and disconnect all current calls and services e The Validate option must remain selected wherever possible Use of non validated upgrades is subject to a number of conditions outlined in the IP Office Installation Manual and Technical Bulletins PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 90 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu Avaya IP Office R UperadeWiz C Program Files ivayallP Office Manager Talx Mame IF Address Type Version Licensed Required Licence Available Status Progress 00E00 7052194 00E007052194 192 168 42 1 IPSOOV2 6 amp 0 11014 2 5 0 11021 Unit Broadcast Address Backup System Files 255 255 255 255 w validate Upload System Files Upgrade The list area shows details of IP Office systems found by the Upgrade W
422. of Avaya or others All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements 2010 Avaya Inc All rights reserved PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 66 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 AVAYA IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Reference Issue 1a 30 January 2010 2010 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases Documentation Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Link Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this Documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the tim
423. ogrammed with the account code 3 Continue with the call 4 At the end of the call press the programmed Account Code Entry button again To enter an account code without using a preprogrammed button 1 After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press FEATURE and dial 12 2 Enter an account code by dialing the account code using the telephone s dial pad 3 Continue with the call 4 After the call press FEATURE and dial 12 to end account code entry To create an account code entry button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 4 At the phone press Feature 00 5 Program Extension is shown on the display 6 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 12 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an account code entry button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 12 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scr
424. oicemail mailbox after the copy of the configuration is received by Manager Manager is part of the IP Office Admin suite of programs It is important to note that the software level of IP Office Manager application is 2 higher than the software level of the IP Office system core software with which it is released For example IP Office Manager 8 0 is released with IP Office 6 0 core software When IP Office Manager is used with Essential Edition PARTNER Version the PC running Manager is connected directly to the IP Office control unit being installed or updated IP Office Manager detects that a PARTNER Version is present and automatically starts in its Simplified mode designed to manage Essential Edition PARTNER Version i It is important to note that the software level of IP Office Manager application is 2 higher than the software level of the IP Office system core software with which it is released For example IP Office Manager 8 0 was released with IP Office 6 0 core software PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 28 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Installing PARTNER Getting Started 3 2 Getting Started This section describes tasks that must be planned and executed before commencing installation of Essential Edition PARTNER Version 3 2 1 Unpacking Objective To check that the correct equipment has been supplied and that no damage has occurred during transit Use th
425. oll the display to Account Code Entry and press Select 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 32 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Advanced Features Account Codes 4 11 Parking Calls Use this feature to place a call on a special type of hold where it can be retrieved from any extension in the system e You should park only one call at a time to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you retrieve the parked call e If you frequently park calls and you have a system telephone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing that button during the park process See the section on Auto Dialing 29 gt To park a call 1 While on a call press TRANSFER and and dial your own two digit extension number 2 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension To retrieve a parked call 1 Press an intercom button and 6 followed by the extension number of the extension that parked the call 4 12 Call Pickup You can use this feature to answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension This feature is useful for office colleagues who agree to answer each other s calls To create an call pickup button ETR 18D ETR
426. ompleted press the Done soft key 7 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 Display Language The system administrator can configure which language your extension uses Though the phone s menu you can change this settings IP Office PARTNER Version only supports English French and Latin Spanish The phone menu may display other languages supported by the phone If one of these other languages is selected the languages displayed on the phone menu may be a mix of that language and English 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Advanced 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Language 5 Press the Select soft key 6 Use the d up and down arrow keys scroll through the different languages available 7 10 select the language currently displayed press the Select soft key or OK 8 When completed press the Done soft key 9 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 60 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Phone Settings 1408 1416 Display Language 8 8 Error Tones 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Error Tone 4 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 5 When completed press the Done soft key 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus
427. on Lines u 0O17 Immediate m 18 03 04 No Ring 05 06 Blank OF Delayed Aing 9090508 Blank a Ey O C mn OO i e Lines Select the line with which the line appearance button will be associated Line appearances are created when PRI and SIP channels are put into service e Ringing Options Select whether the phone should provide audible alerting when a call is waiting to be answered on the line e Immediate Provide audible alerting as normal e Delayed Ring Only provide audible alerting after three rings or 15 seconds e No Ring Do not provide any audible alerting e Blank When selected this option removes all programming from the button 2 8 5 Printing Button Labels This option is only enabled if a version of DESI software is also installed on the same PC as IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version It can then be used when an IP Office configuration is loaded in Manager DESI software can be obtained from the Avaya support web site http support avaya com or from DESI http www desi com Currently although all IP Office users are shown only ETR 1400 and 1600 Series IP Office phones are supported by DESI templates The text used on the labels e If a text label has been added in the user s Button Programming settings that text label is passed to the DESI application e Note that the DESI application cannot import non ASCII characters and may render th
428. on The Direct Dial By Number setting above determines how the digits dialed with this action are used e Transfer to Number Transfer the call to the extension or group selected in the Destination field e Replay Greeting Repeats greeting on transfer e Destination only active when Transfer to Number is selected as Action Sets the destination for the Transfer to Number action The drop down list can be used to select from the available extension and groups configured on the phone system This list contains an option to collect voicemail PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 44 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Auto Attendant Setup 2 11 Auxiliary Equipment These dialogs are used to configure the operation of a range of additional features provided by the telephone system Auxiliary Equipment Door Phone 1 Setup Door Phone 1 Assign Extension Door Phone 2 Extensions to be alerted Available Items San Contact Closure Group Add gt Contact Closure Group 2 Contact Closure Group 2 Music On Hold CDR lt Remove Remove All Equipment Description Door Phone If a handset has been configured as being a door phone you can specify which extension is alerted when that door phone is used Two door phones can be configured into the system See Door Phone 45 for further detail Contact Closure The phone system has two ports which can be connected to ex
429. on Modules NONE Feature Key Local 1301183063 Administer Speed Dial Serial Number 00e00705219a User Settings System Settings IP Address 192 168 42 1 Configure User Button Programming Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Meanaae Hunt Geouiia System Locale United States US English 3 i Number assigned to first Extension 10 Administer Auto Attendant Number of Extensions on System 22 Features Configured Daylight Saving Enabled Update Trunk Configurations System Trunks per phones 5 Licenses Installed NONE ETR Digital Extensions Connected NONE Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Group Extensions 3 Calling Group Extensions Night Service Group Extensions NONE Assigned Configure Allowed List Extensions Disallowed List Extensions Emergency List Configured 91 Extensions NOT Configured for YoiceMail NONE Extensions excluded from Directory Listing NONE Extensions assigned for Twinning NONE Extensions barred from making Outgoing Calls NONE Music on Hold Active Auto Attendant Greetings configured Mornina 08 00 00 1 1 59 00 Afternoon 2 00 00 1 7 59 00 Evening 18 0 Night Service Status Not Active Selup Auxiliary Equipments Ce ae FS we te gt e u i i ti i a s Ps Apply button prompts you to save the configuration file that is currently in Manager memory by invoking the Send Configuration 86 gt command Cancel button displays a pop up for confirmation before closing the c
430. on for small enterprises that anticipate growth Essential Edition PARTNER Version incorporates the best from one of the world s most popular phone systems Avaya PARTNER Advanced Communications System with the flexibility sophistication and expandability of our award winning IP Office Many small businesses want the ability to grow and with Essential Edition PARTNER Version your communications are ready to do just that Start with two extensions and expand to 48 begin with a single line and grow to 56 Increase capacities and features only as you need them And with features like Caller ID Dial by Name Automated Attendant Multi Party Conferencing Integrated Voicemail and more Essential Edition PARTNER Version will be right there with you wherever your enterprise takes you FACT SHEET Capabilities Unified Messaging Retrieve voice messages from the keypad on any phone through the display on an Avaya 1400 series phone or via email voice messages show up just like an email from a single Inbox for fast and efficient access to information One Number Access Let calls to your office ring simultaneously on your mobile or home phone so calls are never missed even when out of the office Messaging conferencing and more Automatically receive notification and listen to voice messages when out of the office Quickly set up conference calls with up to 64 people to enable cost effective coll
431. on that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 3 Dial FEATURE 12 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To enter an account code using an account code entry button 1 After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button If the button has lights the green light turns on 2 Enter an account code by dialing the account code using the telephone s dial pad You can also use a system or person speed dial number programmed with the account code or press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code 3 Continue with the call To enter an account code without using a preprogrammed button 1 After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press FEATURE and dial 12 2 Enter an account code by dialing the account code using the telephone s dial pad 3 Continue with the call To create an account code entry button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 4 At the phone press Feature 00 5 Program Extension is shown on the display 6 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 12 5 The current set
432. onds Card e Red Slow Flash Initializing Okay e Red Fast Flash System shutdown IPO 500 Trnk Anlg P Office 500 Trunk Card Analog 4 Universal 700417405 4 Uni 4 4 2 PRI Trunk Cards This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for PRI trunks The card is available in single port or dual port variants e Ports Channels 1 or 2 PRI trunk ports Each port supports the following PRI line types On dual port cards both ports will be the same line type The line type selection can be changed using IP Office Manager e El PRI 30B D channels per port e E1R2 PRI 30B channels per port e T1 robbed bit 24B channels per port or T1 PRI 23B D channels per port e The required mode can be selected within IP Office Manager by right clicking on the line icon and selecting Change Universal PRI Card Line Type and then selecting the required line type e Physical trunk connection is via ports 9 and 10 of the host IP500 base card e Port 11 and 12 can be used as test points for connection of test and monitoring equipment for the adjacent port PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 56 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Trunk Cards e Licenses The IP Office system supports 8 unlicensed B channels on each IP500 PRI U port fitted Additional B channels up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI mode selected require IP500 Un
433. one system features For example licenses are used to enable additional voicemail ports or the twinning feature Each license is a unique 32 character string based on the feature being licensed and the serial number of the SD card plugged into the system control unit It is recommended that you use the Import control to import licenses Alternatively the license keys can be cut and pasted into the Key field Entering licenses manually is liable to errors caused by mis keying of the correct 32 character string PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 66 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Additional Administration Tasks system License Management License Management Type Status Quantity Expiry Date Insel Invalid 0 o 00 e Import Import licenses from a CSV file Each line of the file should contain a license name and the 32 character license key each separated by a comma e Export Export the licenses to a CSV file Only if exportable licenses are present on the system For each license key entered the following information is displayed e Key This is the 32 character license string e Type Information field not editable If the Key is recognized the name of the feature it licenses is shown in this field If Invalid is displayed it indicates that the Key has not been correctly entered e Status This field shows the status of the license e Unknown is sho
434. onfiguration file currently in Manager memory PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 15 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 1 7 How to use Manager d IMPORTANTI As you use Manager to make changes to the lt SHORTNAME gt setup you are prompted to save or discard changes you have made before leaving any administration window to go on to another task However you should remember that you are accumulating these changes in a COPY of the control unit configuration file which must be saved back to the SD card 8 before changes are effective Similarly system changes such as plugging in handsets or making system changes through TUI actions during this time are recognized by the lt SHORTNAME gt system control unit but are undetected by Manager because it is working with a copy of the configuration file Avaya recommend that whilst using Manager you save 79 the configuration file and then restart Manager at frequent intervals to ensure the control unit working copy and the Manager copy of the configuration file remain as compatible as possible Avaya recommend that you read this document and make yourself thoroughly familiar with it and its contents This table is provided for when you may need to jump directly to a specific task that may not be obvious from the list of contents What I want to do Associated Task Area code Required Advanced Parameters 70 Toll Call Prefix Abbrevi
435. only be installed in right hand slot 4 e It is recommended that cards are fitted from left to right e There are restrictions to the number of supported cards of some types When such a limit is exceed the right most card of that type will not function e Ensure that you use the labels supplied to identify the card fitted into the control unit 3 5 Starting h Do not begin this procedure until all cards are installed in the control unit With power still off insert the SD card into the first rear panel slot System SD of the control unit Apply power to the control unit Check that the orange LED lamp on the IP Office LAN port is on The green LED may also be flickering as it indicates traffic across the LAN connection As the control unit goes through its start up cycle make the following checks 1 The CPU LED changes to green When power to the control unit is switched on the normal sequence for the CPU LED is as follows a Steady Red for 3 seconds b Off for 10 seconds c Flashing alternate red green for 4 seconds d The LED should be steady green following successful start up Note that the IP Office 500 cards on the front of the control unit may still be going through their own start up process e Flashing RED A flashing red CPU LED at this stage indicates an error The most likely cause is a missing or loose SD card 2 The System SD LED changes to green 3 The LAN connection LED flashes and then settl
436. ons hot dial is on by default When on the extension user is able to begin dialing without going off hook Answering Calls Call Log Allows the user to access the call log The user must also be one of the 3 extensions configured for Log All Caller ID Calls for Users Do call pickup from the target extension If the target has parked calls a parked call is retrieved in preference to any ring call at the target Extension users can park calls by transferring the call to themselves Parked calls will recall after 3 minutes Caller 1D Inspect When off hook on a call pressing this button allows the user to then press another active line appearance or intercom button to view caller number information for that call 23 Call ID Name Display When off hook on a call pressing this button allows the user to then press another active line appearance or intercom button to view caller name information for that call Direct Line Pickup Active Allows the user to pickup a ringing held or connected call on a specific line Users can also dial intercom 68LL where LL is the line number Direct Line Pickup Idle Allows the user to seize and make a call using a specific line if that 8LL line is idle Users can also dial intercom 8LL where LL is the line number Group Pickup Allows the user to pickup the longest ringing call at the specified 66G group VMS Transfer Allows the user to transfer a call directly into the voicemail mailbox 14 o
437. ontrol unit is starting up will pause the start up until the button is released The effect of pressing the button during normal operation will depend on how long the button is pressed and is indicated by the CPU LED Press Duration CPU LED Summary seconds O to 5 None None 5 to 10 Orange Reboot When Free Reboot when free with new incoming outgoing call barring A reboot using the reset button is recorded in the Audit Trail PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 47 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Press Duration CPU LED Summary seconds 10 to 30 Flashing orange Erase Configuration Erase the configuration alarm log and audit trail Immediate Reboot Immediate reboot without waiting for active calls to end 30 to 40 Red Erase All Erase configuration alarm log and core software Over 40 Flashing green None None name eestor eure Trtnumier IPO 500 V2 Base Unit IP Office 500 V2 Base Unit 700476005 Avaya SD Memory Card IPO System SD Card Partner Version 700479728 CEE7 7 Europe 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit 700429202 IP Office 500Wall Mounting Kit IP Office 500Wall Mounting Kit 700430150 IP Office 500Blanking Plate Kit IP Office 500Blanking Plate Kit 700429194 4 2 SD Card The Avaya SD card exercises central control over the Essential Edition PARTNER Version syste
438. or Tones 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Error Tone 4 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 5 When completed press the Done soft key 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 9 Button Clicks While using the phone menus the phone can provide a key press confirmation click sound This can be turned off if it is annoying 1 Press the MENU button 2 Press the Select soft key 3 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Button Clicks 4 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the On Off soft key to change the setting 5 When completed press the Done soft key 6 Press the Exit soft key to exit the menus 8 10 Default Handsfree Audio Path By default when you make a call or answer a call without lifting the handset the audio is played through the phone s speaker while you speak via the phone s microphone If you have a headset attached you can change the phone s behavior so the audio is played through the headset by default rather than the speaker 1 Press the MENU button 2 Use the d amp up and down arrow keys to locate the option Call Settings 3 Press the Select soft key 4 Use the d up and down arrow keys to locate the option Audio Path 5 Use the left and right P arrow keys or press the Change soft key to change the setting 6 When completed
439. or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either press Intercom 1 or use the amp up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Call Pickup and press Select 5 At the Endpoint prompt enter 6 followed by the target extension 6 The current setting of the button will now be Call Pickup followed by the target extension number e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu To use a call pickup button 1 Press the Call Pickup programmed button for the specified extension number You are connected to the call that was ringing the specified extension PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 33 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 4 13 Do Not Disturb Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from ringing lights may still flash You can still use the extension to make calls or answer calls that are on your extension for example line appearance calls e You need to program a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also on indicating that the telephone will not ring e Use Do Not Disturb when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you e Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and
440. ormat type 94 G Gateway default 26 Greeting profiles 43 times 43 Group assignment 42 calling 42 hunt 42 management 42 night service 42 pickup 42 H Handset 34 Handset programming 36 Hard disk 11 12 PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Help icon 23 Home page icon 23 Home screen 15 Hot links 15 22 Icon help 23 home page 23 padlock 83 size 82 Icons 23 Import 31 66 Install manager application 12 wizard 12 Installed hardware 26 IP 81 IP address 7 26 95 IP Office admin applications 12 administration 11 connect manager 7 file 81 installation 7 12 select window 14 technical bulletins 90 tools 11 IP Search criteria 81 K Key 66 Known units 78 90 102 Known units file 81 L Label printing 34 LAN 7 14 Language 33 Laptop 7 LED 7 Licences Monitor 11 Licenses 8 Line assignment 40 perphone 40 subtype 51 57 Lines per phone 26 Links 16 List account code 27 allowed 27 assignment 33 calling 27 disallowed 27 emergency 27 group 33 management 27 membership 33 sorting 90 user 33 Log caller IDs 26 Main menu 78 Manager 7 11 home page 15 installing 12 Page 116 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Manager 7 11 preparing 7 select 14 start 14 using 16 Managing configuration files 100 Managing groups 42 Menu commands 78 edit 78 file 78 help 78 view 78 Messaging 37 Mode change 92 Monitor application 11 components 11 lic
441. osts are to be supported a keep alive will need to be sent to each host If this type of NAT Firewall is detected or manually selected no warning will be displayed for this type of NAT PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 71 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e Port Restricted Cone NAT A port restricted cone NAT is like a restricted cone NAT but the restriction includes port numbers Specifically an external host can send a packet with source IP address X and source port P to the internal host only if the internal host had previously sent a packet to IP address X and port P SIP packets needs to be mapped Keep alives must be sent to all ports that will be the source of a packet for each ITSP host IP address If this type of NAT Firewall is detected or manually selected no warning will be displayed for this type of NAT However some Port Restricted have been found to be more symmetric in behavior creating a separate binding for each opened Port if this is the case the manager will display NATs a warning Communication is not possible unless the STUN server is supported on same IP address as the ITSP as part of the manager validation e Unknown Use this setting if the other settings are unsuitable e Static Port Block Use the RTP port range 49152 to 53246 e Binding Refresh Time seconds Default 0 Never Range 0 to 3600 seconds Having established which TCP UDP port number to use e
442. ot a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there can be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya fraud intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com Trademarks Avaya and Aura are trademarks of Avaya Inc The trademarks logos and service marks Marks displayed in this site the documentation s and product s provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya its affiliates or other third parties Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark Nothing contained in this site the documentation s and product s should be construed as granting by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya In
443. other settings do not use this dialog except under direction of a trained Avaya technician or when directed to do so by support personnel This dialog allows the adjustment of settings for each channel of the T1 trunk Channel Parameters Channel Appearance lD Type Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service Out OF Service a BEE 2 3 4 E Trunks T1 Advanced Channel Setup Trunk Number 4 Incoming Trunk Type Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Outgoing Trunk Type Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start Wink Start FAxGain TsGain VMS Delay VMS Delay WMS Day Night Schedule BaB 0 2 12 Ner 048 Ode dE dE dE dE dE dE Timers for selected channel Ode Ode Ode Ode Ode Ode Outgoing Seizure Outgoing Dial Guard Incoming Dial Guard Flash Hook Detect 240 2 Wink Start Outgoing IMM Dial Guard 1500 2 Incoming Confirm Incoming Disconnect 300 2 Wink Validated Outgoing Pulse Dial Break Incoming Automatic Delay Incoming Disconnect Guard Wink End Outgoing Pulse Dial Make Incoming Wink Delay Disconnected Signal Error Delay End Outgoing Pulse Dial InterDigit First Incoming Digit Outgoing Disconnect 300 Wink Signal 200 Outgoing Pulse Dial Pause 1500 2 Incoming Inter Digit Qutgaing Disconnect Guard Ring Yerify Dura
444. ounting for telephone systems The Essential Edition PARTNER Version has a number of options for providing call details to those applications e Direct SMDR Output The IP Office control unit can directly output SMDR records to a specified IP address Essential Edition PARTNER Version has a feature Call Logs that applies to incoming outside calls when caller ID is received In Essential Edition PARTNER Version both answered and unanswered calls can be logged on a per extension basis based on flexible configuration settings that allow logging unanswered calls arriving on specific lines at an extension and or logging all calls answered at the extension regardless of the line they arrive on Every extension will have logs for its own internal answered missed calls and its own external answered calls The size of the call log list for every extension is up to 30 One extension can be designated to log all incoming outside calls both answered and unanswered regardless of where they terminated in the system You can designate up to three extensions that can log all incoming outside calls both answered and unanswered regardless of where they terminated in the system The size of the call log list for these three extensions is up to 400 4 9 Physical Ports The following port types are found on Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems Por Foundon U hescmin UT ANALOG ATM4 Trunk card x4 Used for the connection of external a
445. our personal speed dials as the destination Cell Phone Connect 26 FEATURE 11 Similar to remote call forwarding but with your calls ringing lt Personal Speed Dial gt at both your extension and the external number Account Code Entry FEATURE 12 Enter and exit account code entry mode during a call Voice Mailbox Transfer 35 FEATURE 14 Transfer your current call to an extension s mailbox lt Extension Number gt VMS Cover On Off 44 FEATURE 15 Turn your voicemail cover on off Caller ID Name Display FEATURE 16 Caller ID Inspect FEATURE 17 Call Coverage 27 gt Toggle the display between name and number information See the call details of a call on another line button without interrupting your own current call FEATURE 20 Enable call coverage from your extension to another lt Own Extension gt extension To disable call coverage enter your own lt Covering Extension gt extension number twice Lock or unlock your extension Set clear an absent text message Operate the system s first contact closure switch Operate the system s second contact closure switch Display the software version of the system PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 23 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 4 2 Naming Your Extension You can assign a name to your extension up to 15 characters long The name is then displayed on the phone and also on other extensions when you make or receive calls T
446. ox of the extension that activated Call Coverage e Users with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb 34 to send ringing calls immediately to their voice mailbox e Note that when your voicemail cover is off you can still access the messages in your mailbox and other users can still use forwarding 45 gt to send messages to your mailbox To manually switch VMS cover on off 1 Dial FEATURE 15 To create a VMS cover button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature 00 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 15 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to VMS Cover e Exit programming by pressing Feature OO You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a VMS cover button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Program and either dial 15 or use the amp up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to VMS Cover and press Select 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to
447. pgrade The customer is sent an SD card with the new SD card image for that release 1 Insert the new SD card is into the Optional SD card slot 2 From either extension 10 or 11 enter the system password 3 Enter 731 This will upgrade the IP Office 500v2 control unit The upgrade process is as follows The primary directory is copied to the backup directory PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 91 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Il All the system files from the optional SD card are copied to the primary directory of the System SD card Ill The system automatically reboots and starts using the new binaries in the primary directory of the System SD card This includes any phone firmware binaries as well Sorting the List 1 To sort list of IP Office systems click on the Name or IP Address column headings Search for Particular Systems The default address used by the Upgrade Wizard is the address shown in the Manager title bar which is selected through File Preferences 81 gt If the unit required is not found the address used can be changed 1 Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Address field 2 Click Refresh to perform a new search Changing the bin File Directory Used The directory in which the Upgrade Wizard looks for bin files is set through Manager s Binary Directory setting This can be changed using File Preferences Directories 81 It can
448. phone cord plugged into the right jack of the DSS Is the Intercom Autodialer plugged into an electric outlet Telephone cord may be defective switch cords and try again Two calls may already be recording You may not have enough ports for Hunt Group 7 Make sure you have a four port mail system You may not have enough ports programmed in Hunt Group 7 Telephone may be part of a combination extension that includes a system telephone with Background Music on turn it off The message waiting light may not be compatible with the system only phones with LEDs not neon lights Support message waiting lights Or the telephone may not be connected to the proper module Is Forced Account Code Entry assigned to this extension Is your dial mode touch tone or rotary incorrect Use Dial Mode 201 to reset it Has someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction for the extension Did someone lock the extension with Station Lock Use Station Unlock from extension 10 or 11 to unlock it Local telephone company may not be receiving signals accurately If problem is on just one telephone see Telephone does not Work above Too many tip ring devices may be trying to dial at once Local telephone company line may be faulty unplug each line from its module and test it by using a single line telephone e f the trouble does not occur on the single line telephone the problem is in your control unit e f the trouble occurs on the si
449. play 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter between 03 to 80 to select the line button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial Feature 01 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Do Not Disturb e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a do not disturb button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d amp up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 01 or use the amp up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Do Not Disturb and press Select 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Do Not Disturb e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER User Guide Page 34 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Advanced Features Do Not Disturb 4 14 Voice Mailbox Transfer You can transfer a caller to directly to an extension s voice mailbox for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when you know that the extension user is not present and has not set do not disturb You ca
450. plication 76 upgrade 98 System status application 75 97 T TAPI 75 TAPI application 77 Technical bulletin 7 23 30 31 75 98 100 Telephone assembling 42 Testing modules 42 Tools 39 Tools required 31 towerMAX device 71 Training courses 9 Trouble shooting 97 Trunk cards 55 clock source 88 external configuration 94 interface modules 109 prefixes 88 unused 88 95 Trunk provider 21 U Units faulty 9 University Avaya 28 Unpacking 29 Upgrade 23 98 Upgrade software 23 100 UPS 24 V Voicemail 46 W Wall mounting 33 36 Wall mounting requirements 29 Web Sites 9 Page 115 Issue 1a 30 January 2010 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 117 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to Lucent Technologies have been transferred or licensed to Avaya All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks ar
451. port but to a different destination a different mapping is used Furthermore only the external host that receives a packet can send a UDP packet back to the internal host SIP Packets need to be mapped but STUN will not provide the correct information unless the IP address on the STUN server is the same as the ITSP Host If this type of NAT Firewall is detected or manually selected a warning Communication is not possible unless the STUN server is supported on same IP address as the ITSP will be displayed as part of the manager validation e Full Cone NAT A full cone NAT is one where all requests from the same internal IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port Furthermore any external host can send a packet to the internal host by sending a packet to the mapped external address SIP packets need to be mapped to NAT address and Port any Host in the internet can call in on the open port that is the local info in the SDP will apply to multiple ITSP Hosts e Restricted Cone NAT A restricted cone NAT is one where all requests from the same internal IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port Unlike a full cone NAT an external host with IP address X can send a packet to the internal host only if the internal host had previously sent a packet to IP address X SIP packets needs to be mapped Responses from hosts are restricted to those that a packet has been sent to So if multiple ITSP h
452. pports the following phones and phone add ons Availability may be subject to local restrictions e 3910 3920 e 1403 1408 1416 e All POTS telephones e BM32 Buttons e Digital station connects to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version via a DS port 4 6 1 1416 This phone is supported by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Connects via DS port Programmable Buttons w 16 Headset Socket ff Hands free Speaker ft Microphone Message Waiting Lamp ff Display 4 x 24 Backlit Supported Add Ons BM32 x 2 Upgradeable Firmware a Fixed Function Keys lt speaker DHEADSET MUTE sf dm VOLUME UP J BE CONTACTS J E MESSAGE amp HOLD Z C C TRANSFER Wr VOLUME DOWN EE CALL LOG 5 C prop Z HED REDIAL 5 CCC CONFERENCE wf MENU 4 6 2 1408 This phone is supported with Essential Edition PARTNER Version Connects via DS port Programmable Buttons w 8 Headset Socket w PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 61 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Hands free Speaker Microphone f Message Waiting Lamp w Display 3x24 backlit Supported Add Ons None Upgradeable Firmware vi lt A speaker W F HEADSET MUTE sf dm VOLUME UP J BEI CONTACTS J E MESSAGE amp HOLD Z C E TRANSFER Fr VOLUME DOWN CE CALL LOG CH prop HO Repa GEE CONFERENCE wf AX MENU 4 6 3 1403 The 1403 IP telephone is a multi line IP telephone for use with Avaya IP Office
453. product range compliant with the requirements of ROHS The actions taken vary e In some cases equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available from Avaya e In some cases new manufactured stock has been made ROHS compliant and keeps its existing Part number e In other cases the equipment has been replaced by a new ROHS compliant alternative with new Part numbers PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 8 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Introduction RoHS The Part numbers within this document are for ROHS compliant equipment unless otherwise stated 1 3 Repair Essential Edition PARTNER Version systems do not contain any user serviceable or repairable components If a faulty unit is suspected the whole unit should be replaced A IP Office 500v2 control units should not be opened under any circumstances 1 4 Equipment Availability Part numbers and details of specific items within this documentation are for reference only Items available in any specific locale should be confirmed against the local Essential Edition PARTNER Version price list for that locale The local price list may also include additional items relative to the installation requirements of that locale 1 5 Web Sites Information to support the IP Office can be found on a number of web sites e Avaya http www avaya com The official web site for Avaya The front page also provides access to individual
454. r failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12 Analog Trunk DTMF ICLID Busy e Green on Card fitted tone detection e Green flashing Trunk in use Over voltage and e LED 9 is used for daughter card status lightning protection DTMF and LD dialing Adjustable echo cancellation default l6ms Selectable e Red On Error Red Flash every 5 e Red Slow Flash Initializing seconds Card Okay Red Fast Flash to Off 8 16 32 64 System shutdown and 128 milliseconds PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 54 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Base Cards Description Part Number 1PO 500v2 COMBINATION CARD IP Office 500v2 COMBINATION CARD ATM 700476013 ATM 4 4 Trunk Cards IP Office 500 daughter trunk cards can be fitted to IP Office 500 base cards to provide support for trunk The daughter card uses the physical ports provided on the front panel of the base card for cable connection The addition of an IP Office 500 daughter card is supported on any IP Office 500 base card except the IP Office 500 Legacy Card Carrier base card For those base card that support daughter cards there are no restrictions on the combination of card types However in systems with both analog phone base cards and analog trunk daughter cards combining the two typ
455. r Guide Page 31 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e Import Allows you to import a CSV text file of speed dials Each line of the file should contain a name number and speed dial code each separated by a comma If an entry being imported matches an existing name it will overwrite the existing entry If an entry being imported matches an existing speed dial code it will be assigned an unused speed dial code e Export This control allows you to export a CSV text file of speed dials You can then edit the file using a text editor e Comma Separated Variable text Files csv These are plain text files In addition to being exported from Manager these files can be created and edited using programs such as WordPad or Excel Manager imports and exports CSV files using UTF 8 character encoding which uses a double byte to support characters with diacritic marks such as a Other applications such as Excel may depending on the user PC settings use different encoding which will cause such characters to be removed or corrupted Care should be taken to ensure that any tool used to create or edit the CSV supports all the characters expected and uses UTF 8 format Importing into Manager from Excel From Excel save the file as a csv This file will use ANSI character encoding Open the file in Notepad and use the Save As option to rename the file and select UTF 8 encoding Import the UTF 8 version of the file into Manager Expo
456. r a conference call at anther extension Join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Put a joined call on hold Tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line button change to alternately flashing Red and Green Program Privacy onto a system telephone button to allow or prevent others from joining your calls Join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system When you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller Use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to join a call on that line if a line is not assigned to your extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension To join a call A steady red light next to a line button indicates that a call is in progress on that line 1 Press the line button next the the steady red light and lift the handset Alternatively press INTERCOM and dial 68 followed by the two digit line number 2 The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 20 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 4 Advanced Features PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 21 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Feature and Intercom Codes Intercom Codes The following features are accessed by pressing an idle intercom button The two intercom buttons are the programm
457. r a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction tran
458. r calls routed via this mapping table entry e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension Pattern Ringing ls ring 2s Off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 1 75s off 0 4s ring 0 8s Off 2s ring 4s Off 0 945s ring 4 5s Off 0 25s ring 0 24 off 0 25 ring 2 25 Off ls ring 3s Off 5B 2s ring 2s Off 2 13 2 1 PRI Advanced aN Because some settings can conflict with or nullify other settings do not use this dialog except under direction of a trained Avaya technician or when directed to do so by support personnel This dialog allows setting of advanced T1 trunk settings that normally do not need to be changed The Channel Setup 55 option give access to a dialog for configuring individual channels PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 53 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Trunks PRI Advanced Setup Trunk Number 9 Trunk Parameters Channel setup Switch Type Mle ero Suppression BZS ka Provider Test Number fT CSU Operation LJ Clock Quality Line Signalling CPE v Framing ESF Haul Length CAC Checking Channel Unit Dial Plan Humber Result Action N Dial UM Dial IM Dial M Dial Dial Dial e Trunk Parameters e Switch Type Default NI2 Options 4ESS 5ESS DMS100 and NI2 e Provider Default Local Tel
459. r involved in the call 21 Call Charge The total call charge calculated using the line cost per unit and user markup 22 Currency The currency This is a system wide setting set in the IP Office configuration 23 Amount at Last User Change The current AoC amount at user change 24 Call Units The total call units 25 Units at Last User Change The current AoC units at user change 26 Cost per Unit This value is set in the IP Office configuration against each line on which Advice of Charge signalling is set The values are 1 10 000th of a currency unit For example if the call cost per unit is 1 07 a value of 10700 should be set on the line 27 Mark Up Indicates the mark up value set in the IP Office configuration for the user to which the call is being charged The field is in units of 1 100th for example an entry of 100 is a markup factor of 1 The following additional fields are provided by IP Office SMDR They are not provided by Delta Server SMDR 28 External Targeting Cause This field indicates who or what caused the external call and a reason code For example U FU indicates that the external call was caused by the Forward Unconditional setting of a User Ta rgeted by Reason Code HG _ Hunt Group fb Forward on Busy S U user fu Forward unconditional LINE Line fnr Forward on No Response SSS AA auto Attendant fdnd Forward on DND S O Pi Incoming Call roue o conference proposal consultation ai SCS D
460. rd command l1 Insert the SD card into a reader slot on the Manager computer 2 From Manager main menu select File Advanced Format IP Office SD Card 3 Select IP Office Partner Version This selection just sets the card label shown when viewing the card details It does not affect the actual formatting Select the label that matches the files set you will be placing on the card 4 Browse to the card location and click OK 5 The status bar at the bottom of Manager displays the progress of the formatting process 6 When the formatting is complete you can use the Recreate IP Office SD Card command to load the IP Office folders and files onto the card from the Manager PC Format rules SDHC minimum 4GB FAT32 format Single partition SDHC class2 FAT32 SPI amp SD bus Writing an IP Office SD Card This process will create the folder structure on the SD card and copy the necessary firmware files from those installed with Manager onto the SD card This includes the binary files for the IP Office 500v2 system any external expansion modules and phones It also includes the prompt files for embedded voicemail operation This process can be used to upgrade an existing SD card to match the file set installed with Manager For the card to be used in an IP Office 500v2 system System SD slot the card must be Avaya SD Feature Key card The card must be correctly formatted see Format IP Office SD card 1 Note This process can take up to 20 m
461. rded then the default system mailbox greeting is used e Email This option is only shown if you have been configured with an email address for voicemail email usage in the IP Office configuration This control allows you to see and change the current voicemail email mode being used for new messages received by your voicemail mailbox Use Change to change the selected mode Press Done when the required mode is displayed Possible modes are e Password Change the voicemail mailbox password To do this requires entry of the existing password e Voicemail Switch voicemail coverage on off Using the Visual Voice Button for Voicemail Transfer If pressed when you have a call is connected the MESSAGE button allows entry of an extension number for direct to voicemail transfer of the connected call PARTNER User Guide Page 47 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 6 Contacts 1408 1416 PARTNER User Guide Page 49 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 6 Contacts 1408 1416 This menu is accessed by pressing the key It is used to display names and numbers that you can then use for making calls The directory includes names stored for use by all users names stored for use by just you and the name and numbers of all the other users and groups on the phone system 6 1 Viewing Contacts Details 1 Access the contacts directory a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use th
462. re you sure you wish to send the configuration PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 87 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 3 1 6 4 Receive Config This command is used to fetch the configuration file from the SD card of an attached Essential Edition PARTNER Version system and load it into Manager memory When this command is used the Select IP Office dialog is displayed Select IP Office Mame IP Address Type Version Release 6 0 ooEOOFOS2194 192 168 42 1 IPSOOV2 6 0 f11014 TCP Discovery Progress CO E UnitiBroadcast Address Once an IP Office system is selected a valid user name and password are required to complete the action 3 1 7 Advanced These Advanced menu options detail advanced administration tasks that can be carried out with configuration files and SD cards 3 1 7 1 Erase Configuration Default This command erases the configuration file currently in Manager memory When this command is used the Select IP Office dialog is displayed PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 88 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu Select IP Office Sie Mame IP Address Type Version Release 6 0 ooEOOFOS2194 192 168 42 1 IPSOOV2 6 0 f11014 TCP Discovery Progress I UnitiBroadcast Address Once an IP Office system is selected a valid user name and password are required to complete the actio
463. reeting except by recording a new greeting PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 43 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 5 6 Voicemail Coverage On Off You can chose to have calls to your extension be rerouted to your voicemail mailbox if you do not answer the call within a set number of rings the default being 3 rings This is called VMS Cover The number of rings used for your extension is set by your system administrator e If an extension has Call Coverage 27 and VMS Cover active a covered calls ring at the covered extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings It will then start ringing the covering extensionlf the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings The count of VMS cover rings starts when the covered extension initially begins to ring If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb 34 active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage e Users with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb 34 to send ringing calls immediately to their voice mailbox e Note that when your voicemail cover is off you can still access the messages in your mailbox and other users can still use forwarding 454 to send messages to your mailbox To create a VMS cover button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO
464. ren IP Hice Selup below Change Remote Adminisiration Password This view confirms that Change Syelam Setings Salat Salta ee ya ree installation of the Create Calling Lists Expansion Modules MONE Essential Edition Fastin Kay MURE Adminigier Speed Dial Sas pie OO PA RTN E R Ve rs I on Wear Ser Hr tem Settings system has been IP Adimas 19 IRA 42 1 Sub Net Mack 255 255 265 0 successful klana ge Hunt Groups Ehe actin Una SAAS aus English Humber assigned io first Extan sion 10 Conk I Hon Program Adminisier Auto Atendar Muriber of Extensions on Byrtem i Features Configured Kl j ls Daigh Bang Enabled pdate Trunk Configurations Spaten Trunki p r phones 5 Licar zes Installed HONE ETR 1 Digital Edenis ng Connected HOME Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Group Extensions Calling Group Extentions Might Serice Group Extensions NONE Agtigned Configura Allowed List Estennions Disallowed List Frienzions Emergency List Conliguned 971 Extentions MOT Configured for Voicebial HONE Extensions excluded tram Directors Listing HOME Extensions arugnad tor baanning MOME 3 6 Changing Password There are two types of password used for the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 1 Remote administration password This password controls remote or local access to the system to make administrative changes to the overall set up such as changes to the configuration or equipment
465. renced elsewhere within this Documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately util
466. ress while listening through the handset 1 2 Ringing Patterns ETR phones use the following ring patterns Call Type Ring Pattern Intercom Call ring BEEP ring e If you have a system display telephone the caller s extension number and BEEP ring BEEP name if programmed appears on the display Recalling Call ring BEEP BEEP e A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing ring BEEP BEEP back at your extension ring BEEP BEEP 1 3 Dial Tones There are two different dial tones when you call with a system telephone e Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line e Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call PARTNER User Guide Page 9 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 1 4 Light Patterns Each line button a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or pool is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Auto Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information The meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment are Light Pattern Line Button Programmable Button Intercom
467. rinting Avaya assumes no liability for any errors Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes Documentation disclaimer Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by End User Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation s provided by Avaya Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regard
468. rol Unit section of the configuration delete the entry for the component that is no longer present in the system Replacement of a Different Type If replacing a component with one of a different type the process should be divided into two stages First remove the existing component using the Permanent Removal process above and adjust the configuration and reboot Then install the new component using the Adding a New Component process above PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 96 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration Changing Components 5 5 1 Running SSA E Objective Allow SSA to be used to check the correct installation of additional equipment 24 2320 Procedure 1 From the Manager home page select File Advanced System Status 2 Click Logon 3 SSA shows Waiting for connection and then the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system status Wi IP Office R System Status O0FO00705719A 197 14R 47 1 IP500 Y 4 0 11019 AVAYA IP Office System Status Help Snapshot LogOtf Exit About gt E Memory Cards System SD E Control Unit IP500 v2 Lal Configuration 0 Service 1 Trunks 0 Link 0 Call Quality of Service 0 Mad la Number Tyne Current Firmware 5 6 Adding Licences License keys strings are used to activate various IP Office features of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system Each license is a uniqu
469. rrent setting of the button will now be set to Absent Message e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu To activate an absent text message 1 Press the absent text message button The first absent text message is displayed 2 Scroll through the default messages by pressing the button beneath the word Next until the required message is displayed Back soon Please call Back tomorrow e On holiday until Do not disturb At lunch until On vacation e Meeting until Out to lunch Don t disturb until At home e With visitors until Away from desk With Cust until Be right back 3 Press the button beneath the word Activ to select the message shown on the display 4 To add addition text or edit the existing text press More and then Edit 5 To complete the process press the absent text message button again To deactivate the absent text message 1 Press the absent text message button The green light flutters and the active absent text message is displayed 2 Press the button beneath the word Dactiv 3 To complete the process press the absent text message button again PARTNER User Guide Page 25 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 4 4 Forwarding Calls All external internal and transferred calls direct to your extension can be diverted to a different telephone internal extension number You can enter the destination extension telephone number and select when calls are r
470. rrrrrrr e 2008 08 01 15 32 52 00 00 03 3 01707299900 I 4002 390664 0 1000024 0 E403 Extn403 T9001 Line 1 2 0 O rrrrrrrrrrr Voicemail Supervised Transfer A call is routed to a voicemail module that performs a supervised transfer 2008 08 01 16 36 04 00 00 09 0 01707299900 I xfer 390664 0 1000061 1 T9001 Line 1 1 V9508 VM Channel 8 0 0 yyrrrr Hr rn 2008 08 01 16 36 07 00 00 03 4 I 402 402 0 1000062 0 E 402 Extn402 V8000 U12 0 8 0 Dry rer 2008 08 01 16 36 04 00 00 09 0 01707299900 I 402 390664 0 1000061 0 E402 Extn402 T9001 Line 1 1 0 O rrrrrrrrrrrie Outgoing External Call The External Targeting Cause indicates that the external call was caused by a user The lack of specific reason implies that it was most likely dialed The External Targeter ID is the user name in this example 16 23 06 00 00 04 5 203 0 9416 9416 0 1000035 0 E203 Extn203 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 EXtn203 rrrr U Extn203 Rerouted External Call In this example an incoming external call has been rerouted back off switch shown by the Party 1 fields and the Party 2 fields being external line details The External Targeter Cause shows that rerouting of the incoming call was done by an incoming call route ICR The External Targeter ID in this case is the Tag set on the incoming call route The E is the actual external number call 08 214 27 00200 03 5 392200 1 9416 200 70 100007370 T9005 Line 541 T9005 Line 3 2 0 0 47 0000 08 0000 00 0 0 616 0 01
471. rs see the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support Trademarks Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the United States of America and other jurisdictions Unless otherwise provided in this document marks identified by and SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Documentation information For the most current versions of documentation go to the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support or the IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center The support telephone number is 1 800 628 2888 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 2 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 How this book is StrUCtUured cccsececeecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 8 T2 TROD een 8 1l S Mepal cisrenan de n R ee 9 1 4 Equipment Availability ccccccecceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeees 9 tO VVC ONES cruisera Free Anne Tre enge 9 L6 Manndg use 9 2 System Overview 2 1 Partner Features cccccccssssseeeceessssseeeeesee
472. rsor will move onto the next space 11 amp Eis 2abcABC 3 3defDEF 4ghiGHI ca 5jkIJKL Ren 6mnoMNO Ea Es a mss fe eww 9 oz essen el os Del e Do not use punctuation characters such as _ and in the name Start the name with an alphabetic character Note that the name is case sensitive and must be unique 3 To remove the current name press Clear e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 24 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features Naming Your Extension 4 3 Absent Text Messages The absent text message feature assists internal callers by displaying a message on their telephone When another extension calls your extension your active absent text message appears on the caller s display This feature is only supported on ETR 18D ETR 34D 1408 and 1416 telephones It is not supported on ETR 6D and 1403 telephones To set and clear an absent text message you need to assign the feature to a programmable button with lights The button can then be used to activate select and deactivate the message To create an absent message button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is
473. rting from Manager into Excel Do not double click on the file exported from Manager Start Excel and use File Open to select the file Excel will recognize that the file uses UTF 8 encoding and start its text file importation wizard Follow the wizard instructions and select comma as the field delimiter e Speed Dial Entries For each speed dial entry in the dialog the following values are used e Name This is the name that will be associated with the speed dial e Number This is the external number that will be dialed by the telephone system when the speed dial code is dialed by an extension user e Speed dials beginning with are called marked speed dials and are treated differently A user can use a marked speed dial even if the number is in a disallowed list of which the user is a member Marked speed dials can also used when an extension is locked When dialed the is not included If a is required to be dialed the speed dial should be start with e Speed Dial Code Select a number between 600 and 699 Each number can only appear once in the list This is the short form substitute number for often used long numbers PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 32 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks User Settings 2 7 User Settings This dialog allows the basic configuration of the extension users It also enables you to set to which groups and lists the selected
474. ry 2010 ETR Telephones 1 ETR Telephones The IP Office PARTNER Version supports the ETR Series of Avaya phones The models supported are the ETR 6D ETR 18D and ETR 34D phones Feature ETR 6D ETR 18 ETR 18D ETR 34D Programmable buttons with lights 32 Programmable buttons without lights Intercom Buttons with light Display Speakerphone ETR 6 ETR 6D Line Programmable Buttons Intercom Buttons Message Light The ETR 6 does not include a display The ETR 6D includes the display PARTNER User Guide Page 7 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 ETR 18 ETR 18D Programmable Buttons 4 without lights Line Programmable Buttons 16 with lights Intercom Buttons Message Light Roos oe VY OO 000P The ETR 18 does not include a display The ETR 18D includes the display ETR 34D Programmable Buttons Dat 1 7 S J an O oO gt Baa 4 without lights N F gt I AVAVA SCI ahi eC al ot st a DD oO co ee oS Line Programmable Buttons es ee ee 32 with lights sc se E oo a oC Bee eee Nees ES IT Intercom Buttons I nn LI Message Light IN Ore sc DEF a 1 2 come te l iT i can oH aL mo i Zn SE Ofer ay Pas TH a nt DEE z l l l On ON eb fs eer 100 ww VOW 4 2 Fi The number of ETR 34D phones supported is li
475. s How many ETR Enhanced Tip and Ring phones are supported A maximum of 18 6 each on the ETR Module with 3 ETR modules maximum per IP Office 500v2 Is analog supported on the Aux port of the ETR phone Yes How is power fail supported In each ETR Module when used with the ATM4 trunk daughter card port 7 and 8 will failover to trunk port 12 Port 7 and 8 are not operational in normal power mode Which trunk interfaces are supported Analog T1 PRI and SIP trunks SIP trunks require the Combination Card Can IP500v2 systems in IP PARTNER Version be networked No Badger Communications Durand W1 54736 715 672 4200 715 672 4200 info badgercommunications com PARTNER ACS IP PARTNER Version Why is Avaya announcing EoS on PARTNER ACS IP Office Release 6 0 introduced the IP PARTNER Version which was designed to create the PARTNER experience for both Avaya Partners and customers alike IP PARTNER Version emulates key features of PARTNER ACS including Key and Lamp audible and visual feedback conference hold and transfer functions Additionally with the ETR6 Card PARTNER ETR telephones can be used with the system FAQ How does IP Office IP PARTNER Version work The new PARTNER Version SD card enables PARTNER version on the new IP Office 500v2 How close to PARTNER emulation do get with this solution All the major features will be emulated i e Key and Lamp audible and visual f
476. s D channels are not affected by licensing PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 55 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 4 1 Analog Trunk Card This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for 4 loop start analog trunks This card can be fitted to any IP500 base card except the IP500 Legacy Carrier card and IP500 4 Port Expansion card e Ports Channels 4 Loop start analog trunk ports Connections via the host IP500 base card e DTMF ICLID Busy tone detection e Over voltage and lightning protection may still require additional protection equipment see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections e DTMF and LD dialing e Adjustable echo cancellation default 16ms Selectable to Off 8 16 32 64 and 128 milliseconds e Power Failure Port Regardless of the IP500 card hosting it during power failure pins 4 and 5 of port 12 are connected to pins 7 and 8 In addition when fitted to an IP500 Analog Phone 8 base card during power failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12 e License No license required e Maximum per IP500 Control Unit 4 e P Office Software Level 4 0 Daughter Card Ports 9 12 x The LEDs for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows e Green on Card fitted e Green flashing Trunk in use e LED 9 is used for daughter card status e Red On Error e Red Flash every 5 sec
477. s provided by Avaya All content on this site the documentation s and the product s provided by Avaya including the selection arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases You may not modify copy reproduce republish upload post transmit or distribute in any way any content in whole or in part including any code and software Unauthorized reproduction transmission dissemination storage and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Copyright Preventing toll fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is n
478. s routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For transferred calls if the covering extension does not answer the call goes to the transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer Return Rings if VMS cover is not active If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence To send calls for coverage manually 1 Press FEATURE 20 2 Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove call coverage manually 1 Press FEATURE 20 2 Dial your extension number again To use a call coverage button 1 Press the programmed button When on if programmed on a button with a light the button s green light will be on PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 27 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 To create a call coverage button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Extension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed
479. s selected the list of lists that exist and the lists of which the user is a member are displayed e Group 42 gt If Group is selected the list of groups that exist and the groups of which the user is a member are displayed 2 8 Button Programming Many of the phones that can be attached to the telephone system have buttons the function of which can be programmed through this dialog Button programming enables you to e Select a system user and select a phone model for that user e Program feature button e Copy button settings to other users User Setup Button Programming Iser But User Buttons Butt Label Action Action Data ri 1 Appearance a 10 i 2 Appearance b 3 Line Appearance 01 Handset BEE 4 Line Appearance 02 2 Select Phone Type 5 Line Appearance 03 Select PROnS ECS 6 Line Appearance 04 Avaya 1416 4 Line Appearance 05 Avaya 1416 1BM 3 C Select All Copy Feature Buttons Print Labels Avaya 1416 2 EM e User This drop down list is used to select the extension user whose programmed buttons are to be displayed for editing e Handset When a configuration is loaded from the telephone system at Manager 7 start up the type of phone currently plugged into that extension port is displayed You can assign or change the type of phone by selecting from the drop down list of supported phones When a handset is selected a picture of that handset is displayed w
480. saging system but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller Add other parties to a call by pressing pool buttons if you are a pooled extension user Use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to join a call on that line if a line is not assigned to your extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension To join a call A steady red light next to a line button indicates that a call is in progress on that line 1 Press the line button next the the steady red light and lift the handset Alternatively press INTERCOM and dial 68 followed by the two digit line number 2 The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call PARTNER User Guide Page 20 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 4 Advanced Features PARTNER User Guide Page 21 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 e On ETR phones the FEATURE button is used to start dialing a feature code e On 1400 Series phones select Feature on the display to start dialing a feature code During a call you may need to select gt gt first to display the Feature option e On analog phones at dial tone dial followed by the feature code To do this during a call you need to press recall first to get to
481. sential Edition PARTNER Version system in order to allow removal of an SD card If the System SD card is removed licensed features will continue operating for up to 2 hours PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 89 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 5 3 1 2 Card Startup Reinserting a card into a system that is already switched on will automatically restart the card Similarly reinserting the card and rebooting the IP Office system will restart the card However if the card has been shutdown but not removed it can be restarted using Manager without requiring a reboot Card Startup Using Manager 1 Using IP Office Manager select File Advanced Memory Card Commands Startup 2 Using the Select IP Office menu select the IP Office system containing the memory card 3 Click OK h After reinsertion the SD card may not be fully functional until two hours have elapsed 5 3 2 Directories and Files The System SD card contains the following folders e primary System SD Contains the firmware files for the IP Office control unit external expansion modules and supported phones The folder can also contain music on hold files and license key files This is the Ss ystem main set of files used by the IP Office system when booting up Also contains the stored copy of the IP Office configuration fonmary hack backup ac Up Contains a copy of the primary folder at some previous point A ba
482. sfer and or use can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on Avaya s web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support Trademarks Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc in the United States of America and other jurisdictions Unless otherwise provided in this document marks identified by and SM are registered marks trademarks and service marks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Documentation information For the most current
483. sion PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 16 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Overview System Components e Power Supplies The IP Office 500 V2 control unit has an internal power supply unit Each external expansion module is supplied with an external power supply unit Additional power supply units may also be required for IP phones and some phone add ons e Power Cords Depending on the locale different power cords need to be ordered for each control unit external expansion module and any phones or devices using external power supply units e Cables The Essential Edition PARTNER Version is designed primarily for connection to a structured cabling system using CAT3 UTP cabling This approach allows telephone and data traffic to share the same wiring infrastructure and simplifies equipment moves e Mounting Kits The IP Office 500v2 control unit can be used free standing with an external expansion module stacked above it With optional rack mounting kits the control unit and external expansion module can also be rack mounted Alternatively with an optional wall mounting kit the control unit can be wall mounted e Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes Where the installation includes extensions in other buildings additional protective equipment is required This equipment may also be required in areas where the lightning risk is high e Phones Essential Edition PARTN
484. sion without knowing the 4 digit code that was used to lock the extension Mobile Twin Transfers call to mobile number if unanswered Coverage PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 38 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 N N N me Administration Tasks Button Programming Call Coverage Allows calls to a specified user to be redirected to another user when 20 the initial target s Call Coverage Ring 67 time is exceeded The button is used to turn coverage on green lamp or off no lamp Call Forwarding Allows calls to a specified user to be redirected to another user VMS Cover Allows the user to turn the use of voicemail for call coverage of their 115 calls on or off Messaging Absent Text Allows the user to set or clear an absence text message When set the message is displayed on their extension and also on an other extensions when it calls the user 2 8 3 System Programming Features These features are linked to the usage of the System Password 24 as they affect the operation of the phone system for all users and trunks This tab and thus the functions on it are only available to extension 10 System Password is a four digit password that must be entered to make changes to local settings such as call barring night service and other dialling restrictions It can only be changed by an administrator using a telephone handset at extension 10 1 Dial 403 2 Dial four digits to set
485. splayed asking whether the configuration should be validated If validation is selected and errors are found the send or save process is canceled This option is disabled if Validate configuration on edit is selected 3 1 6 Offline These menu commands are available for working with other configuration files that are not being used by your Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 3 1 6 1 Create New Config Manager can be used to create a configuration file for an Essential Edition PARTNER Version PARTNER Version system to be loaded into a system using Manager or to copy onto a System SD card h This menu command is only available when Manager is not connected to an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system 1 Inthe main menu bar select File Offline Create New Config or from Welcome View select Create an Offline Configuration PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 84 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu Lil Avaya IP Office R Manager Sele File Edit View Help Offline Configuration Creation Please epecity System Parameters Which type of IF Office Unite would you like to deploy PARTNER Configuration System Units Locale sn ur Extension Number Length E pansion Modules Hone Select Extension and Daughter Cards Slot Extension WI Trunk Combo DSE P2 YCM10 ATM 40M1 v ATM 4 UNI Dig Stag a P
486. sponsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Link Disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this Documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by mu
487. swered is also shown 2008 06 28 08 55 02 00 08 51 9 4797 0 08000123456 08000123456 0 1000014129 0 E4797 Joe Bloggs T9001 LINE 1 1 0 0 Voicemail Call The two records below show calls to voicemail The first shows the Dialed Number as 17 the default short code for voicemail access The second shows the Dialed Number as Voicemail indicating some other method such as the Message key on a phone was used to initiate the call 2008 06 28 09 00 03 00 00 19 0 4966 0 717 17 1 1 1000014131 0 F4966 John Smith V9501 VM Channel 1 0 0 2008 06 28 09 06 03 00 00 19 0 4966 0 VoiceMail VoiceMa1l 1 1000014134 0 E4966 John Smith V9501 VM Channel 1 0 0 Parked Call In this example the first record has a Park Time showing that the call was parked The Continuation field indicates that the call did not end this way and there are further records The second record has the same Call ID and shows a change in the Party2Name 4 indicating that party unparked the call Note also that both records share the same call start time 20087 10720 O7 216221 0900214 3 213 0 21705 219 71528 1 2215 Extn215 ED 2219 90 2 2008 10 20 07218 31 0 00219 0 215 0 210 218 15 38 0 E215 Extn215 E211 Extn211 0 0 Incoming call with Account Code In this example at some stage as the call was made or during the call an Account Code has been entered In this specific case it is a text account code which can be selected and entered by the user using IP Of
488. t be present in system e Up to 3 Phone 2 cards each provides up to 2 POTS station ports o Maximum of 3 because a combination card DS 8 or ETR 6 must be present in system An ATM4 daughter card can be added to any ETR card or DS card or Phone card increasing POTS line capacity 1 PRI T1 daughter card may be added to any ETR card or DS card or Phone card increasing digital line capacity One expansion module may be added to the main control unit providing additional growth capability The supported expansion modules are e DS16 Expansion Module adds 16 additional digital station ports e Phone 16 Expansion Module adds 16 additional analog station ports Based on these configurations an Essential Edition PARTNER Version may support up to 64 lines 1 PRI 3 ATM4 up to 10 SIP trunks and up to 48 stations Up to 18 ETR stations and or 46 digital ports 2 POTS Maximum growth capabilities are software blocked in the system Essential Edition PARTNER Version will Support up to 10 SIP trunks which can be assigned across multiple SIP service providers PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 15 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 2 3 System Components The following are typical components of an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system e IP Office 500v2 Control Unit The control unit holds the main configuration and performs the routing and switching for telephone calls and data traffi
489. t for the first part of the call and an additional SMDR record will be generated for the subsequent part of the call Each of these records will have the same Call ID Each record for a call indicates in the Continuation field if there will be further records for the same call Call Times Each SMDR record can include values for ringing time connected time held time and parked time The total duration of an SMDR record is the sum of those values The time when a call is not in any one of the states above for example when one party to the call has disconnected is not measured and included in SMDR records Where announcements are being used the connected time for a call begins either when the call is answered or the first announcement begins All times are rounded up to the nearest second Each SMDR record has a Call Start time taken from the system clock time For calls being transferred or subject to call Splitting each of the multiple SMDR records will have the same Call Start time as the original call 5 1 SMDR Fields The SMDR output contains the following fields Note that time values are rounded up to the nearest second 1 Call Start Call start time in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS For all transferred call segment this is the time the call was initiated so each segment of the call has the same call start time 2 Connected Time Duration of the connected part of the call in HH MM SS format This does not include ringing hel
490. t or night service outward restrictions to make a call The system password is also requested when a user switches the phone system into or out of night service mode e Log All Caller ID Calls for Users Default None selected Log information for the last 400 answered and unanswered calls on the system can be accessed by up to 3 extension users These fields are used to select those users Only calls that include caller ID are included The extensions must be ETR 18D 34D or 1400 Series 1408 1416 phone extensions and the extension user must have a programmable button set to Call Log in order to access the call log The character on the phone display indicates that there are unviewed call details in the call log 2 5 Calling Lists Allows you to configure the various telephone number lists used by the telephone system and to indicate to which extension users each list is applied You can also indicate which lists a user belongs to through the User Setup 33 gt dialog system List Management Allowed Lists Allowed List Number Telephone Number n list Disallowed Lists Emergency Number Lists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries u 1 IE BE eo ICE BE e sdo o o Tool OE Valid digits are 0 3 H and 7 Wildcard Assign Users to list Available Users Selected Users Add gt Add All gt gt lt Remove lt lt Remove All Use the Add or Remove keys to move users to and from the Selected Users l
491. te has been set on the Essential Edition PARTNER Version service user account and that date is approaching Someone with access to the IP Office s security settings will be required unlock the account and set a new expiry date PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 102 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Managing Configuration Files Welcome Screen Options e Your password will expire in X days Do you wish to change it now This message indicates that password ageing has been configured in the IP Office s security settings If your password expires someone with access to the IP Office s security settings will be required to unlock the account e Change password Through the IP Office s security settings a service user account can be required to change their password when logging in The dialog provides fields for entering the old password and new password e Contact Information Check This configuration is under special control This message will appear if a Manager user with administrator rights has entered their contact information into the configuration For example to indicate that they do not want the configuration altered while a possible problem is being diagnosed The options available are e Cancel Select this option to close the configuration without making any changes e Set configuration alteration flag Select this option if the configuration is being opened because of some urgent mai
492. tension is shown on the display 3 Press the button that you want to edit or enter a number between 03 to 80 to select a button The current setting of the button is displayed 4 Dial FEATURE 14 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Voice Mailbox Transfer e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create a voice mailbox transfer button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 3 Press Program and either dial 14 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Voice Mailbox Transfer and press Select 4 The current setting of the button will now be set to Voice Mailbox Transfer e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 35 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 5 Using Voicemail PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 37 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 5 Using Voicemail Each extension on the system has a voicemail mailbox by default Except for special cases for example th
493. ternal relay systems for example systems used to open doors You can configure which users are able to activate those ports and the type of activation See Contact Closure 47 gt for further detail The phone system supports an external music on hold source This is played to callers when they are put on hold The source of the music is connected to the phone system by the system maintainer h This feature is not yet implemented The phone system can log call details at the end of each call These records referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR can be output and sent to a specified IP address where they can be collected and processed by 3rd party call logging software 2 11 1 Door Phone If a handset has been configured as being a door phone you can specify which extension is alerted when that door phone is used Two door phones can be configured into the system There are two separate dialogs one for Door Phone 1 and one for Door Phone 2 Each has the same range of settings PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 45 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Auxiliary Equipment Door Phone 1 Setup Door Phone 1 Assign Extension Door Phone Extensions to be alerted 4 vallable Items Selected Items Contact Closure Group Add gt Contact Closure Group 2 Add All gt gt Music On Hold CDR lt Remove lt lt Remove Al e Assign Extension Default Non
494. that specific interface type 2 Where gain adjustment away from the default values are made precautions should be taken to ensure that the connection of terminal equipment is controlled by qualified installation personnel 6 2 5 Port Safety Classification The Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version system has the following ports which are classified as follows Port Description Port Classification PRI port PRI ISDN connection NET TNV Operating within the limits of SELV Analog ports Two wire analog trunk TNV3 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 109 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Power fail ports Two wire analog trunk TNV3 DTE port Async Data connection SELV Analog Telephone Ports Telephone Extension ports TNV2 Digital Telephone Ports Telephone Extension ports SELV WAN port not used WAN connection NET SELV LAN ports 10 100 BaseT attachment to LAN SELV Expansion ports Expansion Module connector SELV Audio port Connector for Music on Hold SELV External Control port Connector for Controlling Ancillary SELV circuits DC Input port Connector for DC input power SELV Interconnection circuits shall be selected to provide continued conformance with the requirements of EN 609050 1992 A3 1995 clause 2 3 for SELV circuits and with the requirements of clause 6 for TNV circuits after connections between equipment 6 2 6 EMC Directive 889 336 EEC EMC Directive CISPR
495. the Details soft key 4 Press the More soft key and then the Delete soft key PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 52 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 7 Call Log 1408 1416 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 53 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 7 Call Log 1408 1416 This menu is accessed by pressing the key e Making a Call 54 e Viewing Call Details 55 gt e Deleting a Record 56 e Deleting All Records 56 e Add a Record to Your Contacts 56 7 1 Using the Call Log 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Pressing OK will make a call to the number stored with the currently displayed record 3 You can use the functions listed at the bottom of the display by pressing the soft key below the function name e Call 54 Make a call to the number stored in the currently displayed call log record e Details 55 gt Display more details about the current call log record You can then also add the caller details to your personal directory 56 if required e More Switch between the different sets of available soft key functions e Delete 56 Deletes the current displayed record e Del All 56 Delete all the call log records not just the
496. the System SD slot on the rear of the control unit Except when necessary during maintenance the System SD slot should contain an Avaya SD card at all times The files on that card are used when the system is started and the Feature Key serial number only present on Avaya cards is used for the licensing of IP Office features e The control unit has two SD card slots labeled System SD and Optional SD e The system SD card is also used to store copies of core software binary files configuration files and backups as well as the voice mail application and the system status application e Embedded voicemail on the SD card provides 2 channels by default but can be licensed for up to 6 channels total e Various commands within the Manager interface enables the SD card contents to be backed up restored or copied These actions can also be achieved without Manager via the handset Instructions to do this are provided in the system TUI guide e The additional SD card slot can be used to store occasional full copies of the System SD card or as an additional memory card to or from which files can be copied Non Avaya cards can be used for this as long as they conform to the standard below SDHC minimum 4GB FAT32 format Single partition SDHC class2 FAT32 SPI amp SD bus PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 8 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 The Manager Application Introduction The System SD
497. the call was also answered externally 16217204 00 00 08 9 0 9416 94 16 0 1000026 0 2203 22 23 72003 Line 5 1 0 0 rrrrrrrr U MY 22103 9416 bor l7 202 008 00 06 11 207 0 293 203 77 1 1000025 0 E207 Extnz0 7 E203 Ex12n1203 0 0 ITTTTTTTITTTITTTTIT Mobile Twinned Call Picked Up Using the Twinning Button This is the same scenario as the example above however after answering the call on the external twinned device the user has picked it up internally by using a twinning button The first two records are for the answered external call and are output when that call is picked up by the internal extension The third record is output when the call is ended internally 162199187002 002 05 11 207 0 203 203 1 1000029 1 2207 2212207 F203 at I ns 16 19 20 00 00 05 9 0 9416 9416 0 1000030 0 E203 Extn203 T9005 Line 3 10 I ere EHER re N EZ 9416 16 19 18 00 00 05 0 207 0 203 203 1 1000029 0 E207 Extn207 E203 Extn203 0 O rrrrrrrrrrrre External Conference Party This is similar to internal conferencing see examples above but the conference setup and progress records include External Targeting Cause codes for user U conference proposal CfP and user U conferenced Cfd 16 48 58 00 00 02 2 203 0 9416 9416 0 1000066 1 E203 Extn203 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 rrrrrrrr U C P Extn203 16 48 37 00 00 04 3 203 0 207 207 1 1000064 1 E203 Extn203 E207 EXtNn207 7 Oprrrrrrrrrrrre 16 49 04 00 00 08 0 2
498. the expansion module to the Supports up to 4 connections phone must be via a surge protector at each end h Digital Station Expansion This device was previously and via the primary protection point in each module DS ports only referred to as the Avaya 146E building e The IP Office expansion module and control unit and IROB devices must be connected to the Analog Phone Extensions I P Office Barrier Box protective ground point in their building Supports a single connection A Phones Expansion module Maximum of 16 on any expansion The between building connection must be via POT or PHONE ports only module earthed ducting preferable underground The cable must not be exposed externally at any point Analog Trunks ITWLinx towerMAX CO 4x4 For locations where the risk of lightning strikes is felt Supports up to 4 two wire lines to be high additional protection of incoming analog This device was previously trunks is recommended referred to as the Avaya 146C External Output Switch ITWLinx towerMAX SCL 8 Connections from an IP Office Ext O P port to an This device was previously external relay device must be via a surge protector referred to as the Avaya 146G The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx http www itwlinx com PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 71 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 4 7 1 DS Phones When digital phone extensions are required i
499. the order in which those lines are used is described in the IP Office Installation Manual If additional lines are available Fallback can be used to specify a clock source to use Should the Network source not be available e Lines from which the clock source should not be taken should be set as Unsuitable PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 59 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 e If no clock source is available the phone system uses its own internal 8KHz clock source Framing Default ESF Selects the type of signal framing used ESF or D4 CRC Checking Default On Turns CRC on or off Zero Suppression Default B8ZS Selects the method of zero suppression used B8ZS or AMI ZCS CSU Operation Tick this field to enable the T1 line to respond to loop back requests from the line Line Signaling Default CPE The field can be set to either CPE Customer Premises Equipment or CO Central Office This field should normally be left at its default of CPE The setting CO is normally only used in lab back to back testing Haul Length Default 0 115 feet Sets the line length to a specific distance Channel Unit Default Foreign Exchange This field should be set to match the channel signaling equipment provided by the Central Office The options are Foreign Exchange Special Access or Normal 2 13 3 2 T1 Advanced Channel Setup Because some settings can conflict with or nullify
500. the password ie Set Button SIRE LANE Information Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Blank e Night Service A button set to this function allows the user to switch night service on or off The System Password is required to use this feature When night service is on use and behavior of VMS on some trunks may change depending on the trunk configuration Also when night service is on users in the night service group 42 gt must first use the System Password to make outgoing external calls other than emergency calls e Outgoing Call Restriction GI Not yet implemented A button set to this function allows the user to switch outgoing call restriction on or off The System Password is required to use this feature When outgoing call restriction is on users must use the System Password to make outgoing external calls other than emergency calls e Blank When selected this option removes all programming from the button PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 39 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 8 4 Line Assignment This dialog enables you customize lines by setting the programmable button as a line appearance button to make and answer calls on a particular line e Note that a number of each users programmable buttons are automatically configured as line appearance button according to the system Lines per phone 26 setting Ul Set Button Programming Informati
501. ther extensians and print labels Enable ALS Programming Print Label for this Extension e Default labels are assigned to buttons but when you click your mouse pointer on a button label you can edit it e Right click a button to assign or reassign a feature 37 The appropriate programming feature display is presented for you to make a Selection e The right mouse click also enables you to cut and paste button labels and features to other unassigned buttons PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 36 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Button Programming 2 8 2 Programming Features This dialog allows a range of individual functions to be assigned to the button Uw Set Button Programming Information Programming Features System Programming Feature Line Assignment Making Calls Auto Dial Outside O Auto Dial IEM Auto Dial ICM Page Group Calling Page Group Calling Ring Group Hunting Page Group Hunting Ring Last Number Redial Loud Speaker Paging Save Number Redial Simultaneous Page Answering Calls Call Log Call Pickup Caller ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display Direct Line Pickup Active Direct Line Pickup Idle Pickup Group O YMS Transfer Other Account Code Entry Conference Drop Contact Closure 1 Contact Closure 2 Do Not Disturb Pr
502. ting of the button will now be set to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing Feature 00 You can also exit programming mode by lifting the handset then place it back in the cradle To create an account code entry button 1408 1416 Phone 1 At the extension press Admin 2 Press the programmable button you want to change Alternatively e Use the d up or down arrows to scroll to Telephone Programming Press Select e At the Button prompt press the button to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 12 or use the d up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Account Code Entry and press Select 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Account Code Entry e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 32 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features Account Codes 4 11 Parking Calls Use this feature to place a call on a special type of hold where it can be retrieved from any extension in the system e You should park only one call at a time to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you retrieve the parked call e If you frequently park calls and you have a system telephone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing that button during th
503. ting your extension number or name if you have recorded on and askign them to leave a message after the tone You can override the default greeting with your own personal greeting Login 3 Edit greeting 1 Hear greeting Change greeting lt tone gt speak 3 Save greeting 4 Save in a continuous loop To listen to your greeting 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Press 3 to select the option to edit your greeting 3 Press 1 to hear your greeting If no greeting has been recorded your will hear The message has not yet been recorded You need to record a message To record or change your greeting 1 Login 39 to your mailbox 2 Press 3 to select the option to edit your greeting 3 Press 2 to change your greeting 4 When you are prompted speak your new greeting e The greeting must be longer than 3 seconds e A long approximately 10 seconds period of silence will disconnect you from voicemail 5 Press 2 when you have finished recording your greeting 6 Press 1 to listen to your new greeting After you have listened to your greeting you can e Press 3 to save the new greeting Your new greeting will be used e Press 2 to re record the new greeting e Press 4 to save the new greeting for playing on a continuous loop This option can be used to continually play the greeting to a caller the caller will not be able to leave a message Note that once this option is selected the greeting cannot be changed back to a normal g
504. tion Outgoing End Of Dial 1000 Maximum Inter Digit S00 Silent Interval 1100 Ring 4bandon 6300 Long Ring Duration 1100 Ping verify e Channel Parameters e Channel For information only not editable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned Range 2 to 9 digits Used for configuring Line Appearances with button programming The line appearance ID must be unique and not match any extension number PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 60 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks e Type Default Out of Service The T1 emulates the following connections Ground Start Loop Start E amp M TIE E amp M DID E amp M Switched 56K Direct I nward Dial Clear Channel 64K or Out of Service Trunks set to E amp M DID will only accept incoming calls If E amp M TIE is selected and the Outgoing Trunk Type is set to Automatic no secondary dial tone is provided for outgoing calls on this channel e Dial Type Default DTMF Dial Select the dialing method required DTMF Dial or Pulse Dial e Incoming Trunk Type Default Wink Start Used for E amp M types only The handshake method for incoming calls Automatic I mmediate Delay Dial or Wink Start e Outgoing Trunk Type Default Wink Start Used for E amp M types only The handshake method for outgoing calls Automatic Immediate Delay Dial or Wink Start e Tx Gain Default OdB The transmit g
505. tion place your cursor in the box right click and select Assign a Feature from the drop menu This will display a comprehensive dialog from which you can select the feature required See Programming Features 37 gt in the next section i Note You cannot assign a feature to an appearance button 1 and 2 e Action Data For some actions when selecting the action you are asked to enter action data e Enable ALS Programming This checkbox enables or disables Automatic Line Selection to specify the order in which the system selects an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses S to make a call without first selecting a specific line button e Print Label for this Extension If you have the DESI label printing application installed on the computer this control transfers the information required to print labels for the current user PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 35 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 8 1 Graphical Programming User Setup Button Programming User Buttons User 10 Ww Handset Avaya 1476 Ww Copy and Print Available Users C 11 C 12 C 13 C 14 C 15 C 16 Fl 17 C SelectAll Assign a Feature E E E E 08 0 Copy Feature Buttons Print Labels What can I do from here Assign usertelephone type and programmable feature buttons Copy feature buttons to o
506. tions The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ 45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ 45 to RJ 45 cable However connection at the line providers end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers equipment e RJ 11 Phone Connectors Many phones use RJ 11 sockets and are supplied with RJ 11 to RJ 11 cables RJ 11 plugs can be inserted into RJ 45 sockets and in many case the connection will work However this is not recommended or supported as the connection lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected An RJ 45 to RJ 11 cable should be used for these connections Standard IP Office Cables The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems The maximum length is applicable if the standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternative cable Cable Description Part number Standard Maximum Length Length 9 Way DTE Cable Connects to control unit RS232 DTE 2m 6 6 2m 6 6 port 9 Way D type plug to 9 way D type socket Structured Cabling DS Line Cable Connects from RJ 45 sockets to RJ 11 700047871 4m 13 2 See table socketed DS and analog phones below BRI PRI Trunk Cable Connects BRI PRI trunk ports to the 700213440 3m 9 10 line providers network termination point RJ 45 to RJ45 Red Expansion Interconnect Cable Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457 lm 3 3 lm 3 3 modules except WAN3 modules RJ 45 to RJ 45 Blue LAN Cable Connects from IP
507. tions to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground e Additional protective equipment In addition to grounding additional protective equipment will be required in the following situations Refer to Out of Building Telephone Installations in the main Avaya IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Reference Manual e On any Digital Station or Phones external expansion module connected to an extension located in another building 3 2 SD Card The IP Office 500v2 control unit used in Essential Edition PARTNER Version has two SD card slots on the rear panel labeled System SD and Optional SD Except during maintenance the System SD slot must contain an Avaya SD card at all times The files on that card are used when the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is started because the Feature Key serial number only present on Avaya cards is used for the licensing of IP Office features The Optional SD slot can be used for an optional second card to store occasional copies of the System SD card or individual files Non Avaya cards can be used for this as long as they conform to the standard below Format rules SDHC minimum 4GB FAT32 format Single partition SDHC class2 FAT32 SPI amp SD bus A SD Card Removal SD cards should never be removed while being used Though the SD card slot LEDs indicate when data is being written
508. to an SD card lack of flashing LED is not a sufficient safeguard If the System SD card is removed licensed features will continue operating for up to 2 hours This allows card replacement on a live system However the control unit is not fully functional until 2 hours after SD card re insertion The System SD card contains the following folders e primary System SD Contains the firmware files for the control unit external expansion modules and supported phones system The folder can also contain music on hold files and license key files This is the main set of files used by the IP Office system when booting up Also contains the stored copy of the Essential Edition primary PARTNER Version configuration backup Avmail gac Kup id l Contains a copy of the primary folder at some previous point A backup copy of the primary contents WAITS to this folder can be invoked manually using Manager or SSA or as part of the IP Office software Temp upgrade using Manager Feature Key Ivmail Contains the prompts used by embedded voicemail and the mailbox messages e dynamic Contains files used by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version and retained through a reboot of the system e temp Contains temporary files used by the Essential Edition PARTNER Version and not retained through a reboot of the system The Optional SD card can contain a similar set of folders These are used as an additional backup or they can be us
509. to display only matching entries d Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the matching entries To return to the start to match a different directory selection press the Clear soft key 2 When the required entry is displayed press Details to display the name and number 3 Use the d up and down arrow key to switch between the name and the number 4 The range of soft keys available will depend on the type of directory entry e Call 5b Make a call to the stored number e Back Go back to the directory listing e More If the contact is one of your personal directory entries the More soft key will be present to allow you to access the options below It is also present for external directory entries if you are a system administrator ext 10 or 11 e Edit 51 gt Edit the name and number e Delete 52 Delete the name and number PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 50 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Contacts 1408 1416 Viewing Contacts Details 6 2 Make a Call from the Directory You can use any directory contacts to make a call You can also use the directory in almost any telephone function where you need to select the number for a destination for example during transfers 1 Access the contacts directory a Press the CONTACTS key The directory menu is displayed b Use the left and right P arrow keys to select which type of directory entries you want displayed
510. to save or discard changes you have made before leaving any administration window to go on to another task However you should remember that you are accumulating these changes in a COPY of the control unit configuration file which must be saved back to the SD card 8 before changes are effective Similarly system changes such as plugging in handsets or making system changes through TUI actions during this time are recognized by the lt SHORTNAME gt system control unit but are undetected by Manager because it is working with a copy of the configuration file Avaya recommend that whilst using Manager you save 79 the configuration file and then restart Manager at frequent intervals to ensure the control unit working copy and the Manager copy of the configuration file remain as compatible as possible N Do not leave the Manager application open for long periods and particularly when it is not being used 2 2 Admin Tasks Display When a Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration is loaded into Manager the dialogs and options provided by Manager switch to the Administration Home Page window shown in the previous 15 gt section There is an alternative administration window which can be used This other window has two extra panes 1 Admin Tasks This is a more formal presentation of tasks It has a slightly different task listing and enables you to access all tasks 2 System Details Provides basic information on the Essential
511. ton for that specified extension To answer a Call ringing at your own extension 1 Pick up the handset you are connected to the incoming call If more than one line is ringing you are connected to the line that has been ringing for the longest time e To answer a specific line press the button for that line e On 1400 Series phones the press gt gt to display additional options e To VM can be used to send the ringing call to voicemail immediately e Ignore can be used to quieten or suppress the ringer To answer a Call ringing at another extension call pickup 1 Pick up the handset 2 Press an INTERCOM button and dial 6 followed by the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 17 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 3 3 Using Handsfree The ETR 6D ETR 18D ETR 34D telephones each have a speaker and microphone which you can turn on by pressing SPKR The 1408 and 1416 telephones also each have a speaker and microphone which you can turn on by pressing SPEAKER e In addition on the ETR 6D ETR 16D and ETR 34D telephones you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing MIC HFAI When the green light next to MIC HFAT is on the microphone is on e The 1403 telephones has a speaker but no microphone This allows it to hear page calls and hear the progress of a call when making a call However the handset must be used to speak on a call
512. ton to edit or enter from 03 to 80 3 The current setting of that button is displayed 4 Press Program and either dial 01 or use the a up or down arrow buttons to scroll the display to Do Not Disturb and press Select 5 The current setting of the button will now be set to Do Not Disturb e Exit programming by pressing PHONE EXIT Alternatively use the Back button to move to another menu PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 34 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Advanced Features Do Not Disturb 4 14 Voice Mailbox Transfer You can transfer a caller to directly to an extension s voice mailbox for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when you know that the extension user is not present and has not set do not disturb You can program a voice mailbox transfer button to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button and then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number To transfer a caller to an extensions mailbox 1 During the call press FEATURE 14 or press a Voice Mailbox Transfer button if the extension has one programmed 2 Dial the two digit extension number of the extension for which the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up To create a voice mailbox transfer button ETR 18D ETR 34D Phone 1 At the phone press Feature OO 2 Program Ex
513. trol units and other hardware components That includes bin file scr files and t x t files By default this is the Manager application s program directory e Note that in the Upgrade Wizard 90 gt right clicking and selecting Change Directory also changes this setting e Known Units File Sets the file and directory into which Manager can record details of the IP Office systems it has discovered Once a file location has been specified a Known Units button becomes available on the discovery dialog used for loading Essential Edition PARTNER Version configuration Pressing that button displays the known units file as a list from which the required IP Office system can be selected It also allows sorting of the list and entries to be removed 3 1 5 3 Discovery This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Discovery sub tab When is clicked the Select IP Office form appears and Manager attempts to discover any IP Office systems Within Preferences the Discovery tab sets the IP addresses and methods used for the discovery process By default Essential Edition PARTNER Version 3 2 systems respond to both UDP and TCP discovery Pre 3 2 IP Office systems only support UDP discovery PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 81 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Discovery TCP Discovery WIC IF NIC Subnet Lower IF Range Upper IF Range 132 169 42 203 255 255 255 0 192 168 42
514. ts 7 and 8 are connected to analog trunk port 12 However during normal operation analog phone ports 7 and 8 are not useable This card provides 8 DS digital station ports for the connection of Avaya digital phones other than IP phones e The card can be fitted with an IP Office 500 trunk daughter card which uses the base card ports for trunk connection e Maximum 3 per control unit e 4400 Series phones 4406D 4412D and 4424D are not supported on this card They are supported on an external expansion module 4 3 1 Digital Station This card is used to add digital station DS extension ports to the IP 500v2 control unit It provides 8 RJ 45 DS extension ports for use with Avaya digital phones not including IP phones A further 4 RJ 45 ports are provided for trunk connections when an IP500 trunk card is fitted to this card e Supports Provides 8 DS ports for digital stations supported e Maximum per Control Unit 3 e 1P500 Daughter Card Support 1 Port Type Ports Features Port LEDs Digit Station Phrase IP500 Analog e Green On Phone detected PortsProvides DS ports e LED1 is used for base card status for digital stations except 4406D 4412D and 4424D e Red On Error Red Flash every e Red Slow Flash Initializing 5 seconds Card okay Red Fast Flash System shutdown Optional Trunk The card can be fitted LED use depends daughter card type fitted Card Ports with one of the following e LED
515. ts functional ground screw Remove and discard this wire Connect a green yellow ground wire to the protective earth screw in the center of the Point on the back of the Barrier Box ils KAN PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 73 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 3 The rack mounting strip has threaded M4 earthing pillars Connect the free end of the barrier box ground wire using M4 washers and nuts to the earthing pillar on that side of the rack mounting strip 4 Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve connect one of the earthing pillars to the buildings protective earth 5 Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve connect the other earthing pillar to the Phone module 6 Ensure that the following wires are not routed together in the same bundle e Earth lead from the barrier box to the Phone 8 16 32 e Internal wires e g wires going directly to the Phone 8 16 32 e Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 74 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Out of Building Telephone Installations COPY 4 8 Associated Applications This section outlines the PC applications supported by Essential Edition PARTNER Version These are just outlines for full details refer to the specific installation manuals for those applications and to the IP Office T
516. ttern that should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension Pattern Ringing ls ring 2s Off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 0 25s off 0 25s ring 1 75s off 0 4s ring 0 8s Off 2s ring 4s Off 0 945s ring 4 5s Off 0 25s ring 0 24 off 0 25 ring 2 25 Off ls ring 3s Off se 2s ring 2s Off PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 58 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Administration Tasks Trunks e DID Mapping Table This table is used to set the destination for incoming calls based on the DID and ICLID number information received with the call This will override the Coverage Destination settings of the channel on which the call was received Calls routing by DDI mapping is not affected by the phone system being put into the night service state e DID Number If the incoming DID of a call on the T1 trunk matches the DID set here it will be routed to this destination e Incoming CLI If the incoming caller number on the T1 trunk matches the ICLID set here it will be routed to this destination e Destination When this field is selected the drop down list allows selection of the extension or group to which calls matching the DID Number or Incoming CLI settings should be routed The destination can also be set to Auto Attendant e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls routed via this
517. ttings system System Setup Installed Hardware Number Type Name om Control Unit IP 500 v2 External ETREAAT M4 External LCOMBOB21TOAAT M4 External DIGSTAS PRIS External PHONE External Dl OCPs16 System Parameters Syetem Name IF ffice_1 Locale Receive IF Address Via DHCP Server Automatic Daylight Saving Time Lines per phone T w e Installed Hardware This section displays a list of the hardware components control unit and its base cards for trunks and extensions installed in the telephone system These values are for information only and cannot be edited e System Parameters This section is used to configure the following system settings e System Name A name to identify this system This is typically used to identify the configuration by the location or customer s company name Some features require the system to have a name This field is case sensitive Do not use punctuation characters such as and e Locale Default United States US English This option is fixed and cannot be changed e Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server Default On When selected the telephone system acts as a DHCP client and will obtain its IP address details by making DHCP requests when started If not selected the telephone system uses the IP address set in the fields below e IP Address Default 192 168 42 1 Enter the IP address that the telephone system should use if Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server is
518. two wire analog phones For panel connection to 4 wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors If connected to an out of building extension the connection must be made via additional IP Office Barrier Boxes in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building an IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 101V is required at both ends see Lightning Protection Out of Building Connections All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the control unit in the IP Office system eo IPO 500 Phone 16 Ports 700449507 IEC60320 C13 Power Cord CEE7 7 one 700289762 BS1363 United Kingdom 700289747 NEMA5 15P America 700289770 China China 700261977 IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit All 700429202 Expansion modules include an external power supply unit PSU and an appropriate interconnect cable They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 60 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Expansion Modules 4 6 Telephones Essential Edition PARTNER Version su
519. ty instructions For example check that the rack legs have been lowered and fixing brackets have been used to stop toppling 2 Elevated Operating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Therefore consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature Tma specified by the manufacturer e Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F e Operating Humidity 10 to 95 non condensing 3 Reduced Air Flow Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised Proper ventilation must be maintained The side ventilation Slots on the IP Office 500 control unit should not be covered or blocked 4 Mechanical Loading Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading 5 Circuit Overloading Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on over current protection and supply wiring Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern 6 Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should
520. um e Bin file ip500v2 bin Power Supply Internal power supply unit Mounting Free standing rack mounted requires IP Office 500Rack Mounting Kit or wall mounted requires IP Office 500Wall Mounting Kit Dimensions Width 445mm 17 5 Depth 365mm 14 4 Height 73mm 2 9 2U Clearance 90mm minimum all sides 220m at front 500mm all side when wall mounted Memory Maximum configuration file size 2048KB PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 46 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 System Component Details Control Unit 4 1 1 Rear Connections TT Titty TIT C EHH He er SGG0 08808 5 6 7 an CCL aux BEEBE BBEBENEN BE ERE eee a me ERSist HNHEG co cum ome kl HIL es ns illite offi ge AS2a2 DTE Reset Expansion ports for status LEDs Port switch Expansion Modules m System SD card lat External LAN Ports Optional SO card slot music on hold LAN Lan External output switch input WAN LANZ A Only Port 1 of the extreme right hand expansion ports should be used Por ee AUDIO 3 5mm Stereo jack socket Used for external music on hold source input AUX If pressed during a restart of the control unit the control unit skip booting from the primary folder on the System SD card If pressed for between 5 and 10 seconds when a system is running the control unit will shutdown for 10 minutes CPU Indicates the status of the control unit e Alternate red green Starting up e Red
521. unit to be configured with an IP Office 500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license The module is referred to as the IPO 500 Digital Station 16 PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 57 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 IPO 500 Digital Station Connections ELL WH 20 21 22 23 ed it od Baa S Baa a a ca RE RR RE DZ If OTE EXPANSION REE 16 24W DE 5 04 MAX DIGITAL STATION Y2 24 DC 1 5 4 PHONE WE sch chen DC I P DS DTE EXPANSION DC power input port Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power supply unit supplied with the expansion module A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module RJ 45 sockets Digital Station port Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones If connected to an out of building extension the connection must be made via additional IROB barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection The module must also be connected to a protective ground 9 Way D Type socket For Avaya use only RJ 45 Socket Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module Protective Ground point Use of a protective ground is required for all installations see Grounding Earthing Where the module is
522. unk can be used as the Essential Edition PARTNER Version clock source PARTNER Version Installation and Reference Manual Page 94 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1a 30 January 2010 Administration External Trunk Configuration e Fallback If available the clock signal from this trunk can be used as the clock source only if none of the trunks set to Network are providing a clock source e Unsuitable The clock source from this trunk is never used as the IP Office clock source In the example below the first Essential Edition PARTNER Version is set to use the public network trunk as its clock source and ignoring the possible clock source from the QSIG trunk However the other system is using the QSIG trunk as it clock source Public Network PRI Network Unsuitable Source Priority When multiple trunks with the same setting are providing a clock signal the trunk used is determined in the following order of slots 1 to 4 and then by port on each slot Viewing the Current Clock Source The current clock source being used by an Essential Edition PARTNER Version system is shown on the Resources page within the IP Office System Status Application E Objective Set a chosen digital trunk as the network clock source and set all other digital trunks as fallback or unsuitable Refer to the IP Office Manager Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administrator documentation 5 4 2 Unused Trunks Each IP
523. upports the ETR Series of Avaya phones The models supported are the ETR 6D ETR 18D and ETR 34D phones Feature ETR 6D ETR 18 ETR 18D ETR 34D Programmable buttons with lights Programmable buttons without lights Intercom Buttons with light Display Speakerphone ETR 6 ETR 6D AMENA Line Programmable Buttons Intercom Buttons Message Light OOG The ETR 6 does not include a display The ETR 6D includes the display PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 7 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 ETR 18 ETR 18D ID AVAYA lt gt IH Programmable Buttons 5 5 4 without lights oO oO oO oO ea SGD SOD sao o o o o Line Programmable Buttons oD oD QD saD 16 with lights eGD SD sd sd saD Intercom Buttons Message Light SQD DO a a a a a ag ASOSOSDOS I_____ _ Vooo KAKAO oo OOO b The ETR 18 does not include a display The ETR 18D includes the display ETR 34D AVAVA Programmable Buttons eee EEE M aa eS ia See ee ee seed SS 8S Line Programmable Buttons a oCo aL ee os Sen es SE rog ano SSO DO OO BS 4 4 without lights Intercom Buttons meee T iae Light L N O TEN i f ABC DEF o if a E Di BIER a ae ann k In No IA NI MAANI NEY ay lores Pars TN wom Kamm tae I C3 l l o mews
524. used during UDP discovery Since UDP broadcast is not routable it will not locate IP Office systems that are on different subnets from the Manager PC unless a specific address is entered e Use DNS Selecting this option allows Manager to use DNS name or IP address lookup to locate an IP Office system Note that this overrides the use of the TCP Discovery and UDP Discovery options above This option requires the IP Office IP address to be assigned as a name on the users DNS server When selected the Unit Discovery Address field on the dialogue is replaced by a Enter Unit DNS Name or IP Address field 3 1 5 4 Visual Preferences A This feature is not available in Office Manager PARTNER Version The tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Visual Preferences sub tab PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 82 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Main Menu Commands File Menu loon Size Medium Multiline Tabs 3 1 5 5 Security This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Security sub tab Controls the various security settings of Manager All settings except Secure Communications can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights Ul IP Office Manager Preferences Preferences Directories Discovery Visual Preferences Security Validation
525. ut to lunch 25 Outgoing 52 54 55 56 Outside Dial Tone 9 P Paging 22 Parking Calls 33 Persoanl Speed Dial 31 Personal 50 51 Phone Manager 39 Pickup 33 Active Line 22 Call 22 Group 22 Idle Line 22 PARTNER User Guide IP Office PARTNER Version Please call 25 Privacy On Off 22 R Reason 55 Recall 22 Red Flash 10 Redial 16 Last Number 22 Saved Number 22 Release 22 Remote Call Forwarding 22 Reply 45 Rewind Message 40 Ring Time 55 Ringer Audible alerting on off 59 Ringer volume 9 19 Ringing Patterns 9 S Save Message 40 Save Number Redial 22 Simultaneous Paging 22 Skip Message 40 Speaker Button 9 Speaker volume 9 19 Speakerphone 18 Speed Dial Personal 31 System 30 Supervised Call Transfer 19 System Release 22 System Speed Dial 30 T Telephone 6D 7 To VM 17 Transfer To Voicemail 35 Voicemail 22 Transfer a Call 19 Transfer Button 9 U Unlock 22 30 Unsupervised Call Transfer 19 Users 50 51 V Version 22 Visual Alerting 59 VMS Cover On Off 22 Voice Mailbox Transfer 22 Voice Signal 22 Voicemail 39 Coverage 44 Transfer 35 Volume 19 Volume Control Buttons 9 W With Cust until 25 With visitors until 25 Y Your Mailbox 39 Page 64 Issue 1a 20 January 2010 PARTNER User Guide Page 65 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to
526. utput to the line as the result of the dial plan Action Incoming Number Filter Incoming Number The default Incoming Number filter simply converts international USA numbers into local lOdigit numbers However it is also useful for mapping PC calls from skype google windows etc into a diallable number plan One nice way to use this is to map PC calls into numbers in area code 555 Result Include in Dial Plan When you select include in dial plan the Partner Edition will automatically substitute the number you dial for outgoing calls as well PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 65 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 2 14 Additional Administration Tasks This section describes administration tasks that can only be accessed via the Admin Tasks pane of the three pane Administration window shown below Wa Avaya IP Office R6 Maragei File Edit View Help al J Admin Tasks Welcome lo IP Office Essential Edilion PARTNER Version Adminislralion System Setup What would you like to do Please review the current IP Office Setup below List Management Sneed Dial Set Change Remote Administration Password Hardware Installed Peed DIA DELUP f Control Unt IM 500 V2 License Marnaygerrienl Internal Wlodules DIGSTASIATHI4 Create Calling Lists Expansion Modules NONE User Setup Feature Key NONE Administer speed Dial Serial Number 000000000000 ser Settings System
527. va application e TAPI Devlink Provides a real time event stream in addition to the SMDR interface provided in Essential Edition PARTNER Version SMDR The real time event stream takes the form of a call record which is issued whenever the state of any endpoint of a call changes typically there are two end points on a call but for some circumstances such as conference calls or intruded calls there may be more e Monitor SysMon Monitor is a tool that can show a trace of all activity on the IP Office system in detail As a consequence interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high level of data and telephony protocol Knowledge Despite that however all IP Office installers and maintainers need to understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of Monitor traces to resolve support issues 4 8 1 Voicemail Key features are e Does not require a license key e Maximum Message Length 120 seconds for any message e Maximum of 4 Simultaneous Users e Supports basic voicemail email and customization e Pin code e Ringback e Voicemail On Off e Email address e Voicemail email on off User Group and Mailbox Names The voicemail application creates mailboxes based on the user and hunt group names allocated using the Essential Edition PARTNER Version Manager application Whenever either the voicemail server or the Control Unit restart new mailboxes are created for any new names found This method of operatio
528. versions of documentation go to the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support or the IP Office Knowledge Base http marketingtools avaya com knowledgebase Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center The support telephone number is 1 800 628 2888 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support PARTNER User Guide Page 2 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Contents 1 ETR Telephones kI Fed BUMOMS sii ibaetenenetotah Gi e a eea 9 1 2 Ringing Patterns us00 040000220000 nennen nnnnnnn nennen 9 1 3 Dal Fones sea a T 9 1 4 Light Palleinssuieie ee wel a 10 1 5 Adjusting the Telephone Display ccccceeeseeeees 10 2 1400 Series Phones 3 Basic Call Handling 3 1 Making Calls 2 16 3 2 Answering Calls Ra thaws 17 3 3 Using Handsteesre dace es taste eerste a 18 3 4 Hands Free Answer on Intercom ccccsssseeeeeeeeeeees 18 3 5 Adjusting the VOIUMG cccccccceecsssseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeesens 19 3 6 Holding Calls ee 19 8 7 FANSITE Balsam 19 3 8 Conferencing Calls uuussnnnenennnnnnneeeseennnnneennnnn 20 SO JONG Calle oo tees ee 20 4 Advanced Features 4 1 Feature and Intercom Codes ccccccccecssssseeeeeeeeeeeees 22 4 2 Naming Your ExteEnSiOn cccccsssseeeceeseee
529. ving the name and number press the Cancel soft key PARTNER User Guide Page 56 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Chapter 8 Phone Settings 1408 1416 PARTNER User Guide Page 57 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 8 Phone Settings 1408 1416 The MENU key is used to access a range of phone settings for your 1400 Series phone 4 Brightness tContrast tPersonal Ringing l l O m tButon Clicks ff p tError Tones On Screen Sounds e erg ee green tall Settings 4 Menu Screen Sounds LBrighiness tAdvanced Select Exit Do i ee es ee Menu Top I MM NM Screen Sounds le hal el tee Write 1 Select Exit Visual Alerting Cir FAudible Alerting On I es a none Seen On tAudio Path Speaker Menu Call Settings L Visual Alerting Select Erase a tSelf Test TAudio TLanquage 4 Menu Advanced LErase Select Options that are greyed out in the diagram above are not accessible or used 8 1 A Menu Auto Exit A Menu Erase Contacts Erase Cancel LHandset AGC Off FHeadset AGC On TSpeaker AGC On tSpeaker Open af tHeadset Xmit NR On FHeadset Rev Loud OT THeadset CC CMT FHandset xmit MR Ort A Menu Audio Gain Handset AGC Ondo tf 4 English E t Fran ais tEspafiol 4 Menu Language 4 English E Se
530. w keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Del All soft key to delete all your call log records 7 6 Adding a Record to Your Contacts You can add a name and number shown in your call log to your personal speed dials You can only do this if there is space in your allowed 20 personal speed dials 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records Press the Details soft key The individual details of the currently selected call record are displayed Press the Contact soft key Use the d up and down arrow keys to switch between the name and number details for the new contact Mm BR U N Using the telephone keypad and the Bksp soft key you can edit the name and the number When editing the number use the Pause soft key to enter a comma for a 1 second pause in the number dialing 6 When the name and number are set as required press the Save soft key To return without saving the name and number press the Cancel soft key PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 56 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 Chapter 8 Phone Settings 1408 1416 PARTNER Version Phone User Guide Page 57 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1c 09 April 2010 8 Phone Settings 1408 1416 The MEN
531. ware Manager can be used to change or introduce changes to the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system configuration Easy to use hot links initiate administrator tasks h IMPORTANT Manager is an off line editor It loads a copy of the Essential Edition PARTNER Version system current configuration settings Changes are made to that copy and it is then sent back to the IP Office 500v2 control unit for those changes to become active This means that changes to the active configuration in the system that occur between Manager receiving and sending back the copy may be overwritten For example this may affect changes made by users through their phone or voicemail mailbox after the copy of the configuration is received by Manager 1 1 1 Installing Manager Manager 7 is a component of the IP Office Admin Suite of applications This suite is supplied on the IP Office Administrator Applications DVD In addition to Manager the suite includes e System Monitor This is a tool for system installers and maintainers Interpreting the information output by System Monitor requires detailed data and telecoms knowledge e System Status Application This is a Java application that can be used to monitor the status of an IP Office system such as extension trunks and other resources It displays current alarms and most recent historical alarms PC Requirements Minimum PC Requirements Operating System Support Additional Apps NET2
532. within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User PARTNER Version Phone User Guide IP Office Essential Edition License types Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise no use should be made of materials on this site the Documentation s and Product
533. wn Create Calling Lists Expansion Modules NONE Feature Key Local 1301153063 Administer Speed Dial Serial Number 00e00705219a User Settings System Settings IP Address 192 168 42 1 Configure User Button Programming Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 System Locale United States US English Humber assigned to first Extension 10 Administer Auto Attencant Number of Extensions on System 22 Features Configured Daylight Saving Enabled Update Trunk Conmigqurations System Trunks per phones 5 Licenses Installed NONE ETR Digital Extensions Connected NONE Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Group Extensions Calling Group Extensions Hight Semice Group Extensions MONE Assigned Configure Allowed List Extensions Disallowed List Extensions Emergency List Configured gt 91 Extensions NOT Configured tor Voicemail WOME Extensions excluded from Directory Listing NONE Extensions assigned for Twinning MONE Extensions barred from making Outgoing Calls NONE Music on Hold Active Auto Attendant Greetings configured Mormingii 0000 1 1 53 00 Atemaond 2 00 00 17 53 00 Eveninat 8 0 Night Service Status Mot Acte Manage Hunt Groups SHlup Ausilary Equipments The Avaya SD card 8 software contains a default system setup and gathers information on control unit items Manager home page displays this system information in the common area at the right hand side of the screen as IP Office Setup Any settings that are not yet specifi
534. wn for newly entered licenses until the configuration is sent to the phone system and then reloaded again e Valid is shown if the license key matches the SD card serial number e Invalid is shown if the license key does not match the SD card 8 serial number e Dormant is shown if the license key is valid but is conditional on another license that is not present e Obsolete is shown if the license key is valid but the license is no longer used by the version of software installed in the phone system e Quantity Information field not editable This field indicates how many items are enabled by the license The meaning of this will vary depending on the feature being licensed e Expiry Date Information field not editable Some licenses have an expiry date This field will indicate that date 2 14 2 User Advanced Settings This dialog is reached by selecting User Setup Advanced Settings from the Admin Tasks 66 pane PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide Page 67 IP Office Essential Edition Issue 1b 01 February 2010 User Setup Advanced Settings User Selection Select User 10 y Advanced Parameters Hing Pattern F w YMS Lover Hing 3 H Abbreviated Ringing Active w Intercom Dial Tone Regular v Call Coverage Ring 2 ai Distinetive Ring Active v Call Wailing Exlersiur Nut Avsigred v Kull r z len Nunkea Automatic YMS Cover Assigned s Privacy Enabled Yoicamail
535. y discover the appropriate values To complete the fields automatically only the STUN Server IP Address is required STUN operation is then tested by clicking Run STUN If successful the remaining fields are filled with the results e STUN Server IP Address Default 69 90 168 13 This is the IP address of the SIP STUN server The phone system will send basic SIP messages to this destination and from data inserted into the replies can try to determine the type ITSP NAT changes being applied by any firewall between it and the ITSP e STUN Port Default 3478 Defines the port to which STUN requests are sent if STUN is used e Firewall NAT Type Default Unknown The settings here reflect different types of network firewalls e Blocking Firewall 222222227222 2222222 e Symmetric Firewall SIP packets are unchanged but ports need to be opened and kept open with keep alives If this type of NAT is detected or manually selected a warning Communication is not possible unless the STUN server is supported on same IP address as the ITSP will be displayed as part of the manager validation e Open Internet No action required If this mode is selected STUN lookups are not performed e Symmetric NAT A symmetric NAT is one where all requests from the same internal IP address and port to a specific destination IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port If the same host sends a packet with the same source address and
536. y channel basis Changes to the Dial plan could for example be used to change a certain range of numbers from Dial to Local Dial Where a Local Dial would be for targeting numbers on same ITSP This means the SIP INVITE will say INVITE sip 2003 freecalls com instead of INVITE tel 2003 You can also bar certain numbers here Note that the Allowed and Disallowed tables are in force on SIP Channels in exactly the same way as on Analog trunks so you should only bar numbers which are specifically inappropriate for dialling over the SIP Maximum size of the Dial plan table is set to 20 entries 2 13 2 2 PRI Advanced Channel Setup N Because some settings can conflict with or nullify other settings do not use this dialog except under direction of a trained Avaya technician or when directed to do so by support personnel This dialog allows the adjustment of settings for each channel of the PRI trunk PARTNER Version Administration Tool User Guide IP Office Essential Edition Page 55 Issue 1b 01 February 2010 Trunks PRI Advanced Channel Setup Trunk Number 9 Channel Parameters Channel Appearance lD AsGan TxGan VMS Delap Dap YMS Delay Night VMS Schedule Od Ode Ude Ode dE Ude dE Ude Ude Ude Ude Ode dE Ode 3 4 5 f e Channel Parameters e Channel For information only not editable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned Range 2 to 9 digits Used
537. y old messages 1 Flay saved messages 2 3 Edit Greeting Listen to greeting 1 Edit greeting 3 Record new greeting 2 Delete current message 4 Save new greeting 3 Save Current message 5 Save new greeting as loop 4 Forwarding options 6 Return to mailbox 6 Repeat last message Help 4 6 Forwarding skip current message 9 Fast forward Rewind Call back sender internal Direct all ta email U1 Send email notification 02 Turn email use of US Change mailbox access code U4 Record Name U5 Forward to email 1 Forward to extension s 4 Foward to extensian s with header message I follow each extension number with and then a final to finish entry IMPORTANT Once a new message has been listened to it is marked as old and is automatically deleted after 24 hours If you do not want the message deleted you must mark it as saved by pressing 5 while listening to the message PARTNER User Guide Page 39 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 5 2 Listening to Your Messages When you log in to your mailbox you are automatically played any new messages After a message has been played it is marked as being an old message Old messages are automatically deleted after 24 hours unless you mark the message as saved Login New messages played 4 Delete message 1 Old messages 5 gave message Saved messages 6 Forward message Repeat last message 3 Skip mess
538. yed call log record e Details 55 Display more details about the current call log record You can then also add the caller details to your personal directory 56 if required e More Switch between the different sets of available soft key functions e Delete 56 Deletes the current displayed record e Del All 56 Delete all the call log records not just the current types of records being shown 4 To exit the call log press the PHONE EXIT button 7 2 Making a Call from the Call Log You can use the call log to make calls to the number included in the currently selected call record 1 Access the call log a Press the ez CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the amp up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the Call soft key or OK to call the number displayed in the call record PARTNER User Guide Page 54 IP Office PARTNER Version Issue 1a 20 January 2010 Call Log 1408 1416 Making a Call from the Call Log 7 3 Viewing Call Details You can view additional details about the currently shown call 1 Access the call log a Press the CALL LOG button b The display will change to show your call log records The caller s name is shown if known otherwise the number c Use the d up and down arrow keys to scroll through the records 2 Press the Details soft key T

PARTNER® ACS/IP PARTNER Version

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PARTNER&reg; ACS/IP PARTNER Version

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PARTNER® ACS/IP PARTNER Version